Altimatic IIIc Maintenance

IER
ALTIMATIC IIIC
Service
Manual
PIPERAIRCRAFT
CORPORATION
761602
Piper Aircraft Corporation, Vero Beach, Florida

U.S. A.
Published by
PUBLICATIONS DEPARTMENT
Piper Aircraft Corporation
761 602
Issued: November 1974
PIPER ALTIMATIC IIIC SERVICE MANUAL
REVISIONS ISSUED
Current, Permanent and Temporary Revisions to this AltiMatic IIIC

Service Manual issued November 1974 are as follows:
761
76I
761
761
761
761
REVISED:
602
602
602
602
602
602
(PR750613)
(PR7704I5)
(PR780310)
(PR780810)
(PR791130)
(PR811016)
10/16/81
Permanent
Permanent
Permanent
Permanent
Permanent
Permanent
Revision
Revision
Revision
Revision
Revision
Revision
Dated
Dated
Dated
Dated
Dated
Dated
June 13, 1975

April 15, 1977
March 10, 1978
August 10, 1978
November 30, 1979
October 16, 1981
iii
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY
iv
LEFT BLANK
FOREWORD
This Service Manual is provided as a guide for Removal and Installation, Troubleshooting Procedures,
and Set-Up Procedures for the Piper AltiMatic IIIC.
The information presented in this manual has been divided into three parts; Part I contains six (6)
sections, Part II contains six (6) sections and Part III contains three (3) sections.
The information compiled in this manual will be kept current by revisions distributed periodically to
the manual owner through their local Piper Dealer or Distributor.
REVISION
There will be two (2) types of revisions used to keep this manual current. The material compiled in
these revisions will consist of information necessary to maintain the present AltiMatic IIIC. Therefore, it is
imperative that this material be inserted in the Service Manual at the time it is received.
I.
Temporary Revision
This type revision will be distributed at any time it is necessary to forward Technical Servicing
Information to the field. The temporary revision will usually consist of one or two pages which may be
inserted in the front of the manual. These revisions will include deletions and additions of material
pertinent to different paragraphs of the service manual. Therefore, when the temporary revision is received,
review the manual and mark the affected paragraph with the code date of the latest revision for a ready
reference.
II.
Permanent Revision
This type revision will be distributed periodically and will supersede all previous temporary revisions.
These revisions will be of complete page replacement and shall be inserted in the service manual in
accordance with the following instructions:
1. Replace the obsolete pages with revised pages of the same page number.
2.
Insert pages with page numbers followed by a small letter in direct sequence with the same
common page number.
3.
Insert pages with page numbers followed by a capital letter in direct sequence with the same
common page number but after any pages with the same common page number followed by a small letter.
ISSUED: 11/25/74
III.
Identification
of Revised Material
Revised text and illustrations shall be indicated by a black vertical line along the left-hand margin of
the page opposite the change. A line opposite the page number or section title and printing date will
indicate that the text or illustration was unchanged, but the material was relocated to a different page.
Newly added material shall be identified by an arrow pointing toward either the text, text heading or
illustration. When material is removed, an arrow will point away from the area from which the material was
removed.
Symbols will indicate only current revisions with changes and additions to or deletions of existing text
and illustrations. Changes in capitalization, spelling, punctuation or the physical location of the material on
the page will not be identified by symbols.
vi
ISSUED: 11/25/74
PIPER ALTIMATIC IRC SERVICE MANUAL
TABLE
OFCONTENTS
PARTI
ALTIMATIC
IIIC
I
INTRODUCTION
ANDDESCRIllfl0N
1-1
11
THEORY
OFOPERATION
21
Ill
REMOVAL
ANDINSTALLATIIDN
3-1
IV
TESTEQUIPMENT..................................................
4-1
SET-UPPROCEDURES
5-1
VI
DIAGRAMS.................................................
tilRING
6-1
.....................................
.............................................
........................................
...............................................
PART
II
COUPLER
GLIDE
SLOPE
VII
7-1
DESCRIllflON
.....................................................
OFOPERATION.............................................
VIII THEORY
IX
REMOVAL
ANDINSTALLATION........................................
TESTEQUIPMENT
XI
SET-UPPROCEDURES
BENCH
XII
SET-UPPROCEOURES
GROUNO
CHECK
ANDFLIGHT
9-1
10-1
.................................................
11-1
.......................................
ISSUED: 11/25/74
8-1
......................
12-1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
(cont.)
PART III
ELECTRONIC PITCH TRIM
XIII
XIV
XV
INTRODUCTION AND DESCRIPTION

THEORY OF OPERATION
GROUND CHECK
ELECTRONIC PITCH
13-1
14-1
XVI
TRIM SYSTEM
TROUBLESHOOTING...............................
15-1
16-1
..............
..........................
.....................................
viii
IIIC SERVICE MANUAL
PIPER ALTIMATIC
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
Figure
2-1.
3-1.
3-2.
3-3.
3-4.
3-5.
Page
3-6.
3-7.
3-7a.
3-8.
AltiMatic IllC Block Diagram

Roll, Rudder and Pitch Servo Guide
Bridle Cable Clamp Installation
PA-23-250 (Six Place) E & F Models AltiMatic IIIC Layout
PA-31-3 IO, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31 P Alti Matic IIIC Layout
PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32R-300, PA-32RT-300, PA-32RT-300T,
PA-32-301, PA-32-301T, PA-32R-301 and PA-32R-301T
AltiMatic IIIC Layout
PA-34-200T AltiMatic IIIC Layout
PA-44-180 AltiMatic IIIC Layout
PA-28RT-201 and PA-28RT-201T AltiMatic IIIC Layout.......................
Roll Servo Cable Tension Diagram
3-9.
Pitch and Rudder Servo Cable Tension Diagram
2-5
3-3
3-4
3-7
3-8
..............................................
.........................................
.............................................
.................................................
3-10.
3-11.
3-12.
3-13.
3-14.
3-15.
3-16.
3-17.
3-18.
3-19.
3-20.
3-21.
3-22.
3-23.
3-24.
3-25.
3-26.
..........................................
...........................................
..........................................
..............................
AltiMatic IIIC Console.....................................................

Alti Matic IIIC, Electronic Trim Amplifier and Autopilot
Amplifier
AltiMatic IIIC, Attitude Gyro...............................................
Situation Indicator
AltiMatic IIIC, Directional Gyro/Horizontal
AltiMatic IIIC, Altitude Hold Unit and Relay Box
Roll Servo Installation, PA-23-250 (Six Place) E & F Models
Pitch Servo Installation, PA-23-250 (Six Place) E Model
Pitch Servo Installation, PA-23-250 (Six Place) F Model
Pitch Trim Servo Installation, PA-23-250 (Six Place) E & F Models
AltiMatic IIIC, Gyro Slaving Amplifier.......................................
AltiMatic IIIC, Flux Detector...............................................
AltiMatic IIIC, N/V Converter (IC707)......................................
Roll Servo Installation, PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-3 lP
Pitch Servo Installation, PA-31-310, PA-3 I-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P
Rudder Servo Installation, PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31 P
Pitch Trim Servo Installation, PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P....
Yaw Damper Amplifier Installation, PA-31-3IO, PA-31-325, PA-31-350
and PA-31P
Roll Servo Installation, PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32R-300, PA-32RT-300,
PA-32RT-300T, PA-32-301, PA-32-30tT, PA-32R-301,
PA-32R-301T, PA-28RT-201 and PA-28RT-201T..........................
Pitch Servo Installation, PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32R-300, PA-32RT-300,
PA-32RT-300T, PA-32-301, PA-32-301T, PA-32R-301, PA-32R-301T,
PA-28RT-201, PA-28RT-201T and PA-44-180.............................
Pitch Trim Servo Installation, PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32R-300,
PA-32RT-300, PA-32RT-300T, PA-32-301, PA-32-301T, PA-32R-301,
PA-32R-301T, PA-28RT-201 and PA-28RT-201T..........................
Roll Servo Installation, PA-34-200T and PA-44-180
Pitch Servo Installation, PA-34-200T.........................................
Pitch Trim Servo Installation, PA-34-200T
.
3-23
................
............................
...................
...
.......................
.............
3-28.
3-29.
3-30.
3-31.
3-32.
REVISED:
.'.
11/30/79
3-24
3-25
3-27
3-29
3-31
3-32
3-32
3-33
3-38
3-39
3-41
3-43
3-44
..........................................................
3-27.
3-9
3-10
3-11
3-12
3-13
3-14
3-15/
3-17
3-19
3-21
3-22
3-51
3-54
3-57
3-63
3-65
3-66
ix
PIPER ALTIMATIC
HIC SERVICE MANUAL
(cont)
Figure
3-33.
3-34.
3-35.
3-36.
3-37.
4-1.
4-2.
4-3.
4-4.
4-5.
5-1.
5-2.
Page
Altitude Hold Unit Installation (lC725)
Relay Box Installation, PA-44-180
Pitch Trim Servo Installation, PA-44-180
NAV Flag Adapter Installation..............................................
KA-52 Autopilot Adapter Installation
Gyro Substitute
Power Section.............................................................
Console Substitute.........................................................
Radio Coupler Tester
Block Diagram of 66DI41 Test Kit
AltiMatic IIIC Console.....................................................
AltiMatic IIIC, IC515-l/IC515-3 Amplifier Threshold
Adjustment Potentiometers
Power Section Test Box
Extension Test Cables......................................................
Radio Coupler Power Cable
Radio Coupler Adjustment Points
Piper Omni/Localizer Coupler Modification Detail
NAV Converter (1C707) Adjustment Potentiometers
Sample Deviation Charts
Slaving Amplifier, N-S/E-W Corrector Adjustment Potentiometers
In-Line Test Box (Locally Fabricated)........................................
KA-52 Autopilot Adapter...................................................
Bench Test Wiring Harness Yaw Damper....................................
Test Equipment Hook-Up
Yaw Damper.....................................
AltiMatic 111CBlock Diagram, PA-23-250 (Six Place) E & F (up to
S/N 27-7754002) Models
AltiMatic IIIC Block Diagram, PA-23-250 (Six Place) F Models,
SN 27-7754003 and up
Alti Matic IIIC Block Diagram, PA-31-310 and PA-31-325
AltiMatic IIIC Block Diagram, PA-31-350
AltiMatic IIIC Block Diagram, PA-3IP
AltiMatic IIIC Block Diagram, PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32R-300,
PA-32RT-300 and PA-32RT-300T
Alti Matic IIIC Block Diagram, PA-34-200T and PA-44-180
AltiMatic 111C Harness.....................................................
Yaw Damper Block Diagram, PA-31-3IO, PA-31-325 and PA-31-350
Yaw Damper Block Diagram, PA-31P
Yaw Damper Harness (Optional)
Horizontal Situation Indicator Harness (Optional) with 1C707.
Horizontal Situation Indicator Harness (Optional) without IC707
Horizontal Situation Indicator (Optional) with RNAV..........................
Horizontal Situation Indicator Schematic Slaved (Optional).....................
Electronic Trim System Schematic
Servo Schematic...........................................................
Relay Box Schematic
3-70
3-71
3-73
3-80
......................................
...........................................
.....................................
3-81
........................................
4-2
4-2
...........................................................
4-3
4-5
4-6
......................................................
..........................................
5-5
5-7
5-13
5-15
5-16
5-29
5-33
5-34
5-38
5-39
5-41
5-42
5-44
5-44
...............................................
5-3.
5-4.
5-5.
5-6.
5-7.
5-8.
5-9.
5-10.
5-11.
5-12.
5-13.
5-14.
6-1.
....................................................
................................................
...........................................
............................
...........................
...................................................
..............
6-2
.................................................
6-2.
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-6
..................................................
6-3.
6-4.
6-5.
6-6.
....................................
......................................
.........................................
6-7.
6-8.
6-8a.
6-8b.
6-9.
6-10.
6-11.
6-11a.
6-12.
6-13.
6-14.
6-15.
x
.............
.......................................
..........................................
...........................................
......................................................
6-7
6-8
6-9
6-10
6-10
6 11/6-11a
6-12
6-13
6-14
6-15
6-16
6-17
6-17
REVISED:
10/16/81
IIIC SERVICE MANUAL
PIPER ALTIMATIC
(cont)
Figure
Page
6-16.
6-17.
Altitude Hold Unit Schematic...............................................

AltiMatic IIIC Pressure Bulkhead Connectors (PA-3IP)
6-18.
6-19.
6-20.
6-21.
6-22.
6-23.
6-24.
6-25.
6-26.
6-27.
6-28.
6-29.
6-30.
6-31.
6-32.
Servo, AltiMatic IIIC A P Harness, PA-23-250 (Six Place)

HSI Harness, PA-23-250 (Six Place)
Converter Harness, PA-23-250 (Six Place)
Radio Coupler Harness, PA-23-250 (Six Place)................................
Gyro Slaving Harness, PA-23-250 (Six Place)
Slaving Switch Harness, PA-23-250 (Six Place)
RM I Boot Strap Harness, PA-23-250 (Six Place)
and PA-3 I P
Flux Sensor Harness, PA-31-310;
EDO-AIRE
PA-31-3IO;
and
HSI,
Mitchell Harness,
HSI, EDO-AIRE Mitchell Harness, PA-31-310;
and
and PA-31 P
Compensator Harness, PA-3 1-310;
and
Gyro Slaving Harness, PA-3 1-310;
Boot Strap Harness, PA-31-310;
and PA-31P
Plug Bracket Schematic for AltiMatic IllC (PA-31)
HSI, EDO-AIRE Mitchell Harness, PA-3lP
7-1.
8-1.
8-2.
8-3.
9-1.
9-2.
9-3.
9-4.
9-5.
10-1.
11-1.
11-2.
AltiMatic IIIC Glide Slope Coupler Approach

Pitch Axis Control System with Glide Slope Coupler...........................
Block Diagram of AltiMatic IIIC with Glide Slope Coupler.....................
Glide Slope Coupler Block Diagram
Glide Slope Coupler Installation, PA-23-250 (Six Place) E & F Models
Glide Slope Coupler Installation, PA-31-310, PA-31-325 and PA-31-350
Glide Slope Coupler Installation, PA-31P.....................................
Glide Slope Coupler Installation, PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32R-300,
PA-32RT-300, PA-32RT-300T, and PA-34-200T...........................
Glide Slope Coupler Installation, PA-44-180
Glide Slope Coupler Test Cables and Jumper Plug.............................
Glide Slope Coupler
Glide Slope Coupler Harness Schematic
11-3.
Plug Bracket Schematic for AltiMatic IIIC with Glide Slope Coupler, PA-31.....
15-1.
AutoPilot
........................
.....................
.........................................
....................................
-350
-325;
-325
-350...................
-325
-350
-350
-325;
-325
-350
-350
-325;
............................
..................................
................................
.........................................
..................................
.......................................................
......................................
REVISED:
10/16/81
Manual Electric Trim.............................................
6-17
6-18
6-19
6-20
6-21
6-22
6-23
6-24
6-25
6-26
6-26
6-27
6-28
6-29
6-30
6-31
6-33
6-34
6-35
7-1
8-1
8-3
8-4
9-3
9-3
9-4
9-4
9-5
10-3
11-3
11-5
11-6
11-7
11-8
15-1
xi
PIPER ALTIMATIC
IIIC SERVICE MANUAL
LIST OF TABLES
Table
III-1.
III-II.
IV-l.
V-l.
V-II.
V-Ill.
X-l.
XVI-1.
xii
Page
AltiMatic lllC Trim Servo Clutch Tension....................................
AltiMatic IllC Applicability Chart...........................................
Trouble Isolation Block Diagram............................................
Roll Threshold
Pitch Threshold
Trouble Isolation Block Diagram
Trouble Isolation Block Diagram
Trouble Isolation Block Diagram............................................
............................................................
...........................................................
............................................
............................................
3-2
3-5
4-7
5-11
5-11
5-43
10-2
16-1
PART
I
ALTIMATIC
IIIC
ISSUED: 11/25/74
SECTION
I
INTRODUCTION
ANDDESCRIPTION
Paragraph
1-1.
1-2.
Introduction
Description
ISSUED: 11/25/74
Page
.
1-1
l-l
i-i
SECTION I

1-1. INTRODUCTION. This part of the service manual is divided into six sections. Section I contains a
description of the AltiMatic IIIC. Section II, Theory of Operation, explains the theory of the Automatic
Flight Control System including the Radio Coupling. Section III, Removal and Installation, provides the
information necessary for removal and installation of all AltiMatic IIIC components. Section IV, Test
Equipment, provides information on the equipment used to verify, adjust and troubleshoot the system.
Section V, Set-Up Procedures, provides the information necessary to perform a sequential test of the
system and Bench, Ground and Flight adjustments. Section VI, Wiring Diagrams, provides the information
for the AltiMatic IIIC electrical cables and harnesses used for intercomiecting the system.
1-2. DESCRIPTION. The Piper AltiMatic IIIC Automatic Flight Control System is designed to provide
smooth operation and high reliability with the minimum complexity possible in order to satisfy present day
operational requirements. Design techniques and components utilized represent the latest advances in the
state of the art both in electronics and lightweight flight control systems. Except for air driven gyro
instruments, the system operates from the airplane DC electrical system.
The AltiMatic IIIC is a complete 3-axis,two surface Autopilot, (3-axis,three surface Autopilot if
optional YAW Damper is installed) designed for the heavier single and light to medium twin engine
airplanes. The system automatically maneuvers the airplane in response to a preselected flight profile
selected by the pilot. The AltiMatic IIIC Autopilot features pitch, roll and optional yaw attitude, altitude,
heading and automatic pitch trim. With the pitch axis engaged, the Autotrim System keeps the pitch trim
properly set at all times. This not only enhances the ability of the system to fly the airplane, but also
improves safety by providing for the airplane to be turned over to the pilot in a trimmed condition when
the Autopilot is disengaged.
The AltiMatic IIIC incorporates a totally electronic Autotrim system that electronically senses trim
requirements and adjusts the trim as required. This is a solid state unit which replaces the mechanical trim
sensor used in previous III Series systems. This system offers reduced maintenance and installation
complexity. However, it requires greater time to totally resolve minor trim forces. Occasionally, when
disengaging the Autopilot a slight bump may be felt in the controls if insufficient time has elapsed for total
trim action to be accomplished.
With the installation of optional radio couplers in conjunction with the AltiMatic IIIC Autopilot, the
system offers the additional feature of ILS/VOR coupling. The radio coupler is a special purpose analog
computer which causes the system to fly with reference to a radio defined path.
The AltiMatic IIIC utilizes a lC515-1 or 1C515-3 computing amplifier which incorporates a roll and a
pitch threshold adjustment. There is no airspeed limiting feature in this system as in previous III Series
Autopilots. With the addition of threshold adjustments, the system has greater adaptability. There is no
Altitude Preselect in this system as in previous III Series Autopilots. However, the system incorporates an
Altitude Hold Mode which requires no pitch command adjustment prior to engagement.
The AltiMatic IIIC Autopilot disengage button is incorporated in the trim switch located on the pilot's
control wheel which energizes the Autopilot Disengage Relay. The Disengage Relay interrupts A+ to the
Autopilot, permitting the magnetically held Roll Switch to release and turn "OFF" the Autopilot. The
AltiMatic IIIC is also equipped with a Master Trim Disconnect/Interrupt
Switch on the pilot's control
wheel. When this switch button is depressed it will disconnect the Autopilot and Yaw Damper if installed.
When depressed and held it will interrupt all Electric Elevator Trim Operations. Trim operation will be
restored when the switch is released.
REIVSED: 3/10/78
1-1
SECTION
II
THEORY
OFOPERATION
Paragraph
2-1.
2-2.
2-3.
2-4.
2-5.
2-6.
2-7.
2-8.
2-9.
Page
Piper AltiMatic IIIC Automatic Flight Control System

Console
Amplifier
2-17.
2-18.
2-19.
2-20.
2-21.
................................................
Gyros...................................................
Horizontal Situation Indicator (Non-Slaved) (Optional)
Horizontal Situation Indicator (Slaved) (Optional)
YawDamperSystem(Optional)
..
..
2-14.
2-15.
2-16.
.................................................
Roll,Yaw(Optional),andPitchServos
PitchTrimServo
2-10. AltitudeController
2-11. ModesofOperation
2-12.
2-13.
..
..
...
..
..
..
...
..
..
...
..
..
...
..
..
..
..
..
..
RollMode
HeadingMode..............................................
PitchMode
AltitudeHoldMode
Lateral Guidance System (Radio Coupler)
OmniMode
NavMode
HeadingMode
...
...
..
..
...
..
...
...
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
................................................
...............................................
..........................................
...............................................
................................................
..............................................
Localizer(Normal)Mode
Localizer(Reverse)Mode
ISSUED: 11/25/74
.......................................
.......................................
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-2
2-2
2-3
2-3
2-3
2-3
2-3
2-3
2-3
2-4
2-4
2-4
2-4
2-4
2-4
2-4
2-4
ii-i
SECTION II
THEORY OF OPERATION
2-1. PIPER ALTIMATIC IIIC AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM. The Piper AltiMatic IIIC
Autopilot incorporates several unique concepts and circuits which provide smooth operation, simplified
installation and maintenance, and high reliability. The most significant is the computing amplifier which
eliminates the need for a control surface follow-up element.
The Piper AltiMatic IIIC Autopilot may be operated from either a 14-volt DC or a 28-volt DC airplane
electrical system. To understand the operation of the Piper AltiMatic IIIC Autopilot, refer to the block
diagram in Figure 2-1. The various options to the system are also shown in Figure 2-1. The following
paragraphs present a theoretical description of the components of the Piper AltiMatic IIIC Autopilot.
2-2. CONSOLE. The flight profile is programmed by the pilot at the console and modified at his
discretion. The console can be considered as a funnel for all inputs to the Computing Amplifier during
Autopilot operation, and all service set-up adjustments are also located on the console. For information
pertaining to set-up adjustments, refer to Section V of this manual. If the system employs radio coupling,
the pilot selects the mode of operation at the coupler. The console provides Autopilot engagement, Roll,
Heading, Pitch and Altitude Hold modes of operation, also the Pitch Effort Meter, Pitch Command Disc
and the Roll Command Knob. Various conbinations of mode selection through individual mode switches
are also available to the operator.
NOTE
The Operator's Manual for the Piper AltiMatic IIIC Autopilot
must be studied in depth by the serviceman if he is to interpret the
indications and functions of the system in a manner to affect
proper repairs and determine corrective action if and when
required to the system.
2-3. AMPLIFIER.
The computing amplifier, as in previous Piper Automatic Flight Control Systems
Equipment, processes all input information according to the program modes selected by the pilot. The
amplifier also contains the threshold adjustments required for the AltiMatic IIIC Autopilot. The amplifier is
required to furnish a power output to both the roll and pitch servo motors during autopilot operation. The
autopilot mode of operation is controlled through the autopilot disengage relay. The autopilot can be
disabled by the operator by pressing the control wheel mounted Master Trim Disconnect/ Interrupt Switch
which also disengages the optional Yaw Damper and interrupts electric trim operation or by pressing the
disengage button incorporated in the control wheel mounted trim switch. Pressing either switch actuates the
relay.
2-4. GYROS. Employed in the Piper AltiMatic 111Care three inch lightweight gyros. The Attitude Indicator
and Directional Gyro are air-driven and supply attitude and heading signals to the amplifier. The Directional
Gyro incorporates the heading Preselect feature, hereafter referred to as the Heading Bug. The air to these
gyros passes through a filter. Periodically, this filter should be changed to increase gyro life, and insure
correct performance.
On some installations the DG-360 is used in lieu of the standard Directional Gyro. The DG-360 is an
THEORY OF OPERATION
REVISED: 10/16/81
2-1

integrated instrument combining an air<lriven gyro and an electrically servo'd heading card. Loss of either
air or electric power will cause the red HDG flag to be visible. Also incorporated in the DG-360 is the A/P
Radio Course Arrow which must be set to match the desired VOR/ILS course as selected on the Omni
Bearing Selector.
2-5. HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR (Non-Slaved) (Optional). The AltiMatic IIIC may utilize
the optional non-slaved HSI in lieu of the standard Directional Gyro. The HSI is an integrated instrument
combining an air-driven gyro and an electrially servo'd heading card with VOR/Localizer and Glide Slope
information in addition to visual display. The HSI provides aircraft heading and course data to the system,
and course information for VOR/ILS procedures during Autopilot operation. This instrument incorporates
conventional warning flags which function as follows: The Heading (HDG) Flag which will retract from
view when the instrument is receiving proper vacuum and electrical power. The "NAV" flag which will
retract from view once a VOR or LOC frequency is tuned in and a reliable signal is received. The Glide
Slope Flag which will retract from view when an ILS frequency is channeled and a reliable Glide Slope
signal is present.
2-6. HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR (Slaved) (Optional). The AltiMatic IIIC may utilize the
optional slaved HSI in lieu of the standard Directional Gyro. This instrument offers all the features of the
non-slaved HSI as outlined in Paragraph 2-5. However, the slaved HSI which requires initial heading setting
on start up receives corrected heading information from the Slaving Sub-System and subsequent resetting of
the heading card, required manually on non-slaved versions, is accomplished automatically.
The Slaving Sub-System is equipped with a dual channel Slaving Amplifier and a Flux Detector. The
Slaving Meter and Slaved Directional Gyro are incorporated in the HSI. This system combines the desirable
long term accuracy of a magnetic compass and the short term accuracy and stability of a gyro compass,
thus eliminating the undesirable characteristics of short term oscillation of the magnetic compass and long
term drift of the gyro compass.
The Flux Detector can be considered as a magnetic compass. The device is sensitive and reacts to the
magnetic flux field surrounding the earth as does any magnetic compass. Due to the specialized
construction of the Flux Detector, the seven (7) errors common to the standard aircraft magnetic compass
are reduced if not eliminated. Also, of prime importance are stocking considerations. The Flux Detector
must be stored to avoid areas of magnetic interference such as: radar energy transmissions, other flux
detectors, transformers and any devices emitting electromagnetic radiation or magnetism.
The dual channel Slaving Amplifier is the next device within the Slaving Sub-System. The Flux
Detector being a magnetic sensing device passes its output through both channels of the Slaving Amplifier.
The North-South/East-West Compensator, incorporated in the slaving amplifier, corrects the output of the
Flux Detector for deviations due to both electrical and physical locating errors. The N-S/E-W Compensator
has two adjustments, one for North-South and one for East-West. These adjustments correct for minor Flux
Detector errors and are normally made following the installation of the Slaved Sub-System. When aligning
the system refer to Section V of this manual for the proper procedure.
The Slaved Directional Gyro incorporated in the HSI provides the stable gyroscopic system
information. The activities of the gyro are controlled automatically. For example, instead of the human
pilot visually observing gyro compass and magnetic compass readings and then caging and resetting the
gyro, the Flux Detector and the North-South/East-West Corrector (incorporated in the Slaving Amplifier)
provide
constant magnetic reference information to the gyro unit. If an error exists, it is automatically
corrected electrically. The corrective activities are continuous and are visually displayed to the human pilot
by means of the Slaving Meter.
The Slaving Meter indicates the direction, length of time, and frequency of errors being eliminated by
45
oscillating about a
point to show that the slaving circuits are accomplishing their function. Should the
needle remain motionless or either vertical or horizontal for an extended period (two minutes) in level
flight, the heading should be manually set using the magnetic compass and the performance of the heading
card observed. If slaving difficulties are encountered,set the slaving mode switch to SL 2 or free gyro. In
2-2
THEORY OF OPERATION
ISSUED: 11/25/74

free gyro mode the instrument
precession.
must be periodically reset to manually counteract
the effects of gyro
2-7. YAW DAMPER SYSTEM (Optional). The Yaw Damper System is a frequently installed option with
the AltiMatic IIIC Autopilot. The system has a panel mounted push ON.push OFF control switch. The
system can be disengaged by placing the panel mounted switch in the OFF position or by momentarily
pressing the control wheel mounted Master Trim Disconnect|Interrupt Switch. The system includes an
electric rate gyro sensing element, an electronic solid state servo amplifier and the rudder servo. The
sensitive signals of a rate gyro are combined with those of an electrolytic potentiometer which acts as a
pendulum. The composite signals are tuned to the natural yaw frequency of the aircraft for maximum
performance. The system gyro is energized through the main aircraft electrical bus and receives power any
time the aircraft master switch is on.
2-8. ROLL, YAW (OPTIONAL), AND PITCH SERVOS. The Roll, Yaw and Pitch Servos of the Piper
AltiMatic IIIC are electrical servos similar to the Autopilot servos used in previous Piper Automatic Flight
Control Systems equipment. The servos engage electrically and are easily overridden. If the electrical system
fails, they automatically disengage.
2-9. PITCH TRIM SERVO. As in previous Piper Automatic Flight Control Systems equipment, the
Electric Pitch Trim Servo receives electrical power from both a manual and automatic source. When the
Autopilot function of the AltiMatic IHC is not used, the Pitch Trim Servo furnishes Manual Electric Trim
via the control wheel trim switch. The panel mounted Trim Master Switch must be placed in the ON
position for manual electric trim operation. When the Autopilot function is engaged, control of the Pitch
Trim Servo reverts to Automatic Electric Pitch Trim via the electronic Autotrim system that electronically
senses trim requirements and adjusts the trim as required. There is only one (1) Electric Pitch Trim Servo in
the system, the trim servo shown in Figure 2-1 in two (2) blocks only to indicate the servo operates
independently in one (1) of two (2) modes. The remainder of pertinent information for the Piper AltiMatic
IIIC Electric Pitch Trim System is covered in Part III of this manual.
2-10. ALTITUDE CONTROLLER. The Piper AltiMatic IHC Autopilot does not offer altitude preselect as
did previous III Series Piper pitch axis Automatic Flight Control Systems equipment. The Altitude
Controller features Altitude Hold which may be activated any time the Autopilot is engaged by simply
placing the ALT Hold rocker switch (on the console) in the ON position. The pilot can reject this input by
placing the ALT Hold rocker switch in the OFF position or by disengaging the Autopilot.
2-11. MODES OF OPERATION. Following is a brief description of the different modes of operation of
the AltiMatic IIIC Autopilot. The engage button for each mode of operation is explained in the following
paragraphs.
2-12. ROLL MODE. Because Roll is first in logical sequence, the Roll engage acts as the Autopilot master
switch. As such, the Roll must be engaged for all other engage and mode switches to become operative.
With the Roll switch only engaged, the Autopilot is responsive only to the roll axis of the Attitude Gyro
and the commands of the Roll Command Knob. Use of the Roll Command Knob permits bank angles up to
30on
the AltiMatic IIIC.
2-13. HEADING MODE. The function of the Heading Mode Switch is to remove the Roll Command Knob
from the Autopilot circuit and add the Directional Gyro or Horizontal Situation Indicator Heading
Command and Coutiler functions to the basic Roll Attitude control. Prior to engagement of the heading
mode, the Heading Bug of the D.G. or HSI and Coupler Modes should be set. (See Coupler Mode, Paragraph
2-16.)
THEORY OF OPERATION
ISSUED: 11/25/74
2-3

2-14. PITCH MODE. The Pitch Mode Switch engages the Autopilot pitch servo and makes the Autopilot
responsive to the Pitch Attitude of the Gyro Horizon and the commands of the Pitch Command Disc.
Attitude changes may be made by rotating the pitch command disc in the appropriate direction. Design of
the system is such that commanded attitudes remain constant throughout power changes and gear and flap
transitions.
2-15. ALTITUDE HOLD MODE. The function of the Altitude Hold Mode Switch is to remove the Pitch
Command Disc from the Autopilot circuit and initiate a smooth transition to the pressure altitude at which
it was engaged.
2-16. LATERAL GUIDANCE SYSTEM. (Radio Coupler) The radio coupler contains a five position switch
which selects the desired mode of lateral guidance.
2-17. OMNI MODE. When the Omni Mode is selected, the Autopilot is coupled to the NAV and
Omni/Converter CDI. When the D.G. Heading Bug or the HSI Course Arrow is set to match the Omni
course selection, all headings are then controlled by the Omni Radio Signals. Intercept and track are
automatic.
2-18. NAV MODE. The NAV mode extends the coupler utility by making operation practical under the
adverse conditions of unsteady or erratic Radio Omni Signals. This mode incorporates an extended time
delay in the circuitry which reduces Autopilot reaction to short term needle deflections of the Omni. The
NAV mode should not be used for close in Omni approach work.
2-19. HEADING MODE. When in the HDG Mode, the Autopilot will function as described in Paragraph
2-13.
2-20. LOCALIZER (NORMAL) MODE. In the Loc Norm Mode, the coupler dynamics are set for
optimum performance in tracking the localizer beam which is only 1/4 as wide as the Omni beam. Intercept
and track are automatic as in the Omni Mode.
2-21. LOCALIZER (REVERSE) MODE. This mode permits automatic BACK COURSE approaches and
outbound tracking on the FRONT COURSE prior to procedure turn. The features of back course are
identical to front course except that the Autopilot response will be in reverse to the localizer indications
and the Course Selector Directional Gyro must be set to the reciprocal of the front course heading. (For
exceptions see CAUTION note.)
CAUTION
incorporating the optional Horizontal Situation
Indicator, when operating in the NAV mode, the HSI always gives
the correct display if the heading card is matched to the magnetic
heading. When operating in the Localizer mode, the course arrow
of the HSI should be placed on the INBOUND front course
heading. The display will then be correct for either front course or
back course. During Back Course Approaches, the display will be
inverted and the tail of the course arrow will indicate the back
course heading. The Left/Right needle sensing will require turns
toward the needle for course center line.
On installations
2-4
THEORY OF OPERATION
ISSUED: 11/25/74
DG
ROLL
SERVO
RUDDER
SERVO
DisENGAGE
RELAY
SERVO
PITCH
FLIGHT
AMPLIFIER
COMPUTER
SERVO
TRIM
ALTITUDE
HOLD UNIT
CONTROLLER
HORIZON
ATTITUDE
AUTO PILOT
AUTOPILOT AUTO MODE
SWITCH
TO CONTROL WHEEL MASTER

TRIM DISCONNECT INTERRUPT
TO CONTROL WHEEL
TRIM SWITCH
DG-S360
SERVO
TRIM
MANUAL MODE
A IOS
OMNI
LOC G/S
SECTION III
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Paragraph
3-1.
3-2.
Page
Introduction
Pre-Installation Check and Adjustments of Roll, Yaw and Pitch
Servo Assemblies
Console (AltiMatic IIIC)
Removal of Console (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models
Installation of Console (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models
Removal of Autopilot Amplifier (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models
Removal of Electronic Trim Amplifier (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models
Installation of Electronic Trim Amplifier (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models
Installation of Autopilot Amplifier (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models
Removal of Attitude Gyro (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models
Installation of Attitude Gyro (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models
Removal of Directional Gyro and/or Horizontal Situation Indicator
(PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models
Installation of Directional Gyro and/or Horizontal Situation Indicator
(PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models
Removal of Altitude Hold Unit (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models
Installation of Altitude Hold Unit (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models
Removal of Relay Box (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models
Installation of Relay Box (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models
Removal of Roll Servo (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models
Installation of Roll Servo (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models
Removal of Pitch Servo (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models
Installation of Pitch Servo (PA-23-250 Six Place) E Model
Installation of Pitch Servo (PA-23-250 Six Place) F Model
Removal of Pitch Trim Servo (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models
Installation of Pitch Trim Servo (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models
Removal of Gyro Slaving Amplifier (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models
Installation of Gyro Slaving Amplifier (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models
Removal of Flux Detector (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models
Installation of Flux Detector (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models
Removal of NAV Converter (lC707) (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models
Installation of NAV Converter (IC707) (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models.....
Removal of Console (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P)............
Installation of Console (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P)
Removal of Autopilot Amplifier (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P)
Removal of Electronic Trim Amplifier (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350
and PA-31P)..........................................................
Installation of Electronic Trim Amplifier (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350
and PA-31P)
Installation of Autopilot Amplifier (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350
and PA-3]P)..........................................................
Removal of Attitude Gyro (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P).
3-1
..............................................................
......................................................
3-3.
3-4.
3-5.
3-6.
3-7.
3-8.
3-9.
3-10.
3-11.
3-12.
...................................................
......................
.....
3-22
....................................
3-13.
3-23
....................................
3-14.
3-15.
3-16.
3-17.
3-18.
3-19.
3-20.
3-21.
3-22.
3-23.
3-24.
3-25.
3-26.
3-27.
3-28.
3-29.
3-30.
3-31.
3-32.
3-33.
3-34.
3-35.
............
.......
3-37.
REVISED: 8/10/78
3-23
3-24
3-24
3-24
3-25
3-25
3-26
3-26
3-28
3-30
3-30
3-31
3-31
3-31
3-33
3-33
3-33
3-34
3-34
3-34
3-34
3-34
..........................................................
3-36.
3-!
3-19
3-19
3-19
3-20
3-20
3-20
3-20
3-20
3-21
3-35
3-35
iii-i
Paragraph
3-38.
Page
Installation of Attitude Gyro (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350
and PA-31P)
Removal of Directional Gyro and/or Horizontal Situation Indicator (PA-31-310,
PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P)
(PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P)
Removal of Altitude Hold Unit (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350
and PA-31P)..........................................................
Installation of Altitude Hold Unit (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350
and PA-31P)
Removal of Relay Box (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P)
Installation of Relay Box (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350
and PA-31P)..........................................................
Removal of Roll Servo (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31 P)
Installation of Roll Servo (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P)
Removal of Pitch Servo (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P)
Installation of Pitch Servo (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-3 IP).
Removal of Rudder Servo (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P).
Installation of Rudder Servo (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350
and PA-31P)..........................................................
Removal of Pitch Trim Servo (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P)...
Installation of Pitch Trim Servo (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350
and PA-31P)..........................................................
Removal of Yaw Damper Amplifier (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350
and PA-31P)..........................................................
Installation of Yaw Damper Amplifier (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350
and PA-31P)
Removal of Gyro Slaving Amplifier (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350
and PA-3IP)
Installation of Gyro Slaving Amplifier (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350
and PA-31P)..........................................................
Removal of Flux Detector (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P).
Installation of Flux Detector (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350
and PA-31P)
Removal of NAV Converter (1C707) (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350
and PA-31P)
Installation of NAV Converter (lC707) (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350
and PA-31P)
Removal of Console (PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32R-300, PA-32RT-300
PA-32RT-300T, PA-32-301, PA-32-301T, PA-32R-301 and PA-32R-301T)
Installation of Console (PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32R-300, PA-32RT-300,
PA-32RT-300T, PA-32-301, PA-32-301T, PA-32R-301 and PA-32R-30lT)
Removal of Autopilot Amplifier (PA-32-260, S/N 32-750001 to
7700023; PA-32-300, S/N 32-7540001 to 7840045 and PA-32R-300,
S/N 32R-7680001 to 7780417)...........................................
Removal of Electronic Trim Amplifier (PA-32-260,
S/N 32-7500001 to 7700023 and PA-32-300, S/N 32-7540001
to 7840045)
Installation of Electronic Trim Amplifier (PA-32-260,
S/N 32-750000i to 7700023 and PA-32-300, S/N 32-7540001
to 7840045)
3-35
..........................................................
3-39.
3-36
.....................................
3-40.
3-36
..........................
3-41.
3-42.
...
3-43.
3-44.
3-45.
3-46.
3-47.
3-48.
3-49.
3-50.
3-51.
3-52.
3-53.
3-54.
3-55.
3-56.
3-57.
3-58.
3-59.
3-60.
3-61.
.........
..
...
....
..
..
................
...
....
3-36
..
3-37
.......
3-42
3-43
..........................................................
3-43
..........................................................
3-44
3-44
.
3-64.
3-45
..........................................................
3-45
..........................................................
3-45
...........................................................
3-65.
...............................................
lii-li
3-45
..........................................................
....
3-63.
3-37
3-37
3-37
3-39
3-40
3-40
3-41
3-42
....
3-62.
3-37
--.
REVISED:
3-45
3-45
3-45
3-46
3-46
11/30/79
Page
Paragraph
3-66.
3-67.
Installation of Autopilot Amplifier (PA-32-260, S/N 32-7500001 to

7700023; PA-32-300, S/N 32-7540001 to 7840045 and PA-32R-300,
S/N 32R-7680001 to 7780417)...........................................
Removal of Autopilot Amplifier (PA-32-260, S/N 32-7800001
and up; PA-32-300, S/N 32-7840046 and up; PA-32R-300,
S/N 32R-7780418 and up; PA-32RT-300, PA-32RT-300T, PA-32-301,
PA-32-301T, PA-32R-301 and PA-32R-301T)
Installation of Autopilot Amplifier (PA-32-260,
S/N 32-7800001 and up; PA-32-300, S/N 32-7840046 and up;
PA-32R-300, S/N 32R-7780418 and up; PA-32RT-300, PA-32RT-300T,
PA-32-301, PA-32-301T, PA-32R-301 and PA-32R-301T)...................
Removal of Electronic Trim Amplifier (PA-32-260,
S/N 32-7800001 and up; PA-32-300, S/N 32-7840046 and up;
PA-32R-300, PA-32RT-300, PA-32RT-300T, PA-32-301, PA-32-301T,
PA-32R-30I and PA-32R-301T)
Installation of Electronic Trim Amplifier (PA-32-260,
S/N 32-78-00001 and up; PA-32-300, S/N 32-7840046 and up; PA-32R-300,
PA-32RT-300, PA-32RT-300T, PA-32-301, PA-32-301T, PA-32R-301
and PA-32R-301T)
Removal of Attitude Gyro (PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32R-300,
PA-32RT-300, PA-32RT-300T, PA-32-301, PA-32-301T, PA-32R-30I
and PA-32R-301T)
Installation of Attitude Gyro (PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32R-300,
PA-32RT-300, PA-32RT-300T, PA-32-301, PA-32-301T,
PA-32R-301 and PA-32R-301T)
Removal of Directional Gyro and/or Horizontal
Situation Indicator (PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32R-300,
and PA-32R-301T)
Installation of Directional Gyro and/ or Horizontal
Situation Indicator (PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32R-300,
and PA-32R-301T)
Removal of Altitude Hold Unit (PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32R-300,
and PA-32R-301T)
Installation of Altitude Hold Unit (PA-32-260, PA-32-300,
PA-32R-301 and PA-32R-301T)
Removal of Relay Box (PA-32-260, S/N 32-7500001 to 7700023;
PA-32-300, S/N 32-7540001 to 7840045 and PA-32R-300,
S/N 32R-7680001 to 7780417).......................................---.
Installation of Relay Box (PA-32-260, S/N 32-7500001
to 7700023; PA-32-300, S/N 32-7540001 to 7840045 and
PA-32R-300, S/N 32R-7680001 to 7780417)
Removal of Relay Box (PA-32-260, S/N 32-7800001 and up;
PA-32-300, S/N 32-7840046 and up; PA-32R-300, S/N 32R-7780418
and up; PA-32RT-300, PA-32RT-300T, PA-32-301, PA-32-301T,
PA-32R-301 and PA-32R-301T)
3-46
3-46
.............................
3-68.
3-69.
3-47
3-47
.........................................
3-70.
...........................----.-----
3-71.
--..
3-47
............................................-...-...
3-72.
3-47
.........................................
3-73.
.............................................
3-74.
......................................-
3-75.
............................................
3-76.
.........................................
3-77.
3-78.
3-79.
....................................--.
REVISED:
11/30/79
3-47
3-48
3-48
3-48
3-48
3-48
3-49
3-49
Page
Paragraph
3-80.
Installation of Relay Box (PA-32-260, S/N 32-7800001 and up;

PA-32-300, S/N 32-7840046 and up; PA-32R-300, S/N 32R-7780418
and up; PA-32RT-300, PA-32RT-300T, PA-32-301, PA-32-30IT,
PA-32R-301 and PA-32R-301T)
Removal of Roll Servo (PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32R-300, PA-32RT-300,
PA-32RT-300T, PA-32-301, PA-32-301T, PA-32R-301 and
PA-32R-301T)
Installation of Roll Servo (PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32R-300,
PA-32-RT-300, PA-32RT-300T, PA-32-301, PA-32-301T, PA-32R-301
and PA-32R-301T)
Removal of Pitch Servo (PA-32-260 and PA-32-300,
S/N 32-7540001 to 7840222)
Removal of Pitch Servo (PA-32-300, S/N 32-7940001 and up;
P 32R-301 and PA-32R-301T)
Installa on of Pitch Servo (PA-32-260 and PA-32-300,
S/N 32-7540001 to 7840222)
Installation of Pitch Servo (PA-32-300, S/N 32-7940001
and up; PA-32R-300, PA-32RT-300, PA-32RT-300T, PA-32-301,
PA-32-301T, PA-32R-301 and PA-32R-301T)
Removal of Pitch Trim Servo (PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32R-300,
and PA-32R-30lT)
Installation of Pitch Trim Servo (PA-32-260, PA-32-300,
PA-32R-300, PA-32RT-300, PA-32RT-300T, PA-32-301, PA-32-301T
PA-32R-301 and PA-32R-301T)----.-
Deleted
Deleted
3-49
-.--....-...----..
3-81.
3-49
........................................................
3-82.
3-49
....................................................
3-83.
3-52
---..---
3-84.
3-52
.........................................
3-85.
3-52
............................-------
3-86.
3-53
.......................-.....
3-87.
3-89.
3-90.
3-91.
3-92.
Deleted
3-94.
Deleted
3-95.
3-96.
3-97.
3-98.
3-99.
3-100.
3-101.
3-102.
3-103.
Removal of Console (PA-34-200T)

Installation of Console (PA-34-200T).........................................
Removal of Autopilot Amplifier (PA-34-200T)
Installation of Autopilot Amplifier (PA-34-200T)
Removal of Electronic Trim Amplifier (PA-34-200T)
Installation of Electronic Trim Amplifier (PA-34-200T).........................
Removal of Attitude Gyro (PA-34-200T)
Installation of Attitude Gyro (PA-34-200T)
Removal of Directional Gyro and/or Horizontal Situation Indicator
(PA-34-200T)
(PA-34-200T)
Removal of Altitude Hold Unit (PA-34-200T, Serial Nos. 34-7570001 to
34-7770 185 incl., 34-7770187 to 34-7770263 incl.).
Installation of Altitude Hold Unit (PA-34-200T, Serial Nos. 34-7570001 to
34-7770185 incl., 34-7770 187 to 34-7770263 incl.).
Removal of Altitude Hold Unit (PA-34-200T, Serial Nos. 34-7770186,
34-7770264 and up)
3-105.
3-106.
3-107.
3-55
Deleted
Deleted
3-93.
3-104.
3-57
3-57
3-57
3-59
...........................................
................................
..............................
3-59
...........................
3-59
3-59
3-59
.....................................
...................................
.........................................................
3-59
.........................................................
3-60
3-60
3-60
3-60
....................................................
iii-iv
3-55
---
.......................................-.
3-88.
"
Paragraph
3-108.
Page
Installation of Altitude Hold Unit (PA-34-200T, Serial Nos. 34-7770186,
34-7770264 and up)
Removal of Relay Box (PA-34-200T).........................................
Installation of Relay Box (PA-34-200T)
Removal of Roll Servo (PA-34-200T)
Installation of Roll Servo (PA-34-200T)
Removal of Pitch Servo (PA-34-200T)........................................
Installation of Pitch Servo (PA-34-200T)
Removal of Pitch Trim Servo (PA-34-200T)...................................
Installation of Pitch Trim Servo (PA-34-200T)
Removal of Gyro Slaving Amplifier (PA-34-200T)
Installation of Gyro Slaving Amplifier (PA-34-200T)
Removal of Flux Detector (PA-34-200T)
Installation of Flux Detector (PA-34-200T)
Deleted
Deleted
Removal of Console (PA-44-180)
Installation of Console (PA-44-180)
Removal of Autopilot Amplifier (PA-44-180)
Installation of Autopilot Amplifier (PA-44-180)
Removal of Electronic Trim Amplifier (PA-44-180)
Installation of Electronic Trim Amplifier (PA-44-180)
Removal of Attitude Gyro (PA-44-180)....................................-..
Installation of Attitude Gyro (PA-44-180)
Removal of Directional Gyro and or Horizontal Situation Indicator
Installation of Directional Gyro and, or Horizontal Situation Indicator
(PA-44-180)...........................................................
Removal of Altitude Hold Unit (PA-44-180)
Installation of Altitude Hold Unit (PA-44-180)
Removal of Relay Box (PA-44-180)
Installation of Relay Box (PA-44-180)........................................
Removal of Roll Servo (PA-44-180)..........................................
Installation of Roll Servo (PA-44-180)........................................
Removal of Pitch Servo (PA-44-180)
Installation of Pitch Servo (PA-44-180).......................................
Removal of Pitch Trim Servo (PA-44-180)
Installation of Pitch Trim Servo (PA-44-180)
Removal of Console (PA-28RT-201 and PA-28RT-201T)
Installation of Console (PA-28 RT-20 I and PA-28 RT-20 1T)
Removal of Autopilot Amplifier (PA-28RT-20l and
PA-28RT-201T)
Removal of Electronic Trim Amplifier (PA-28RT-201 and
PA-28RT-201T)
Installation of Electronic Trim Amplifier (PA-28RT-201
and PA-28RT-201T)
Installation of Autopilot Amplifier (PA-28RT-201 and
PA-28RT-201T)
Removal of Attitude Gyro (PA-28RT-201 and
PA-28RT-201T)
Installation of Attitude Gyro (PA-28RT-201 and
PA-28RT-201T)
3-60
3-61
3-61
3-61
3-63
3-64
3-64
3-65
3-66
3-67
3-67
3-67
3-67
....................................................
3-109.
3-110.
3-111.
3-112.
3-113.
3-114.
3-115.
3- I 16.
3-117.
3-118.
3-119.
3-120.
3-121.
3-122.
3-123.
3-124.
3-125.
3-126.
3-127.
3-128.
3-129.
3-130.
3-131.
3-132.
3-133.
3-134.
3-135.
3-136.
3-137.
3-138.
3-139.
3-140.
3-141.
3-142.
3-143.
3-144.
3-145.
......................................
........................................
......................................
.....................................
3-149.
3-150.
REVISED:
...........................
...................................
3-68
............................................
..........................................
.................---
..........-
---
..................................
..
..........................................
.........................................
....................................
.......................
...................................................
3-148.
.....................................
..............................................,........
3-147.
.............................
.......................................................
3-146.
11/30/79
3-68
3-68
3-68
3-68
3-68
3-69
3-69
3-69
3-69
3-69
3-70
3-70
3-70
3-71
3-71
3-72
3-72
3-73
3-74
3-74
3-74
3-74
3-74
3-75
3-75
.......................................................
3-75
.......................................................
3-75
.......................................................
3-75
iii-v
Page
Paragraph
3-151.
3-152.
3-153.
Removal of Directional Gyro and/or Horizontal

Situation Indicator (PA-28RT-201 and PA-28RT-201T)
Installation of Directional Gyro and/or Horizontal
Situation Indicator (PA-28RT-20I and PA-28RT-201T)
Removal of Altitude Hold Unit (PA-28RT-201 and
PA-28RT-201T)
Installation of Altitude Hold Unit (PA-28RT-20l
and PA-28RT-201T)
Removal of Relay Box (PA-28RT-20l and PA-28RT-201T)
Installation of Relay Box (PA-28RT-201 and PA-28RT-201T)...................
Removal of Roll Servo (PA-28RT-20l and PA-28RT-201T).....................
Installation of Roll Servo (PA-28RT-201 and PA-RT-201T).....................
Removal of Pitch Servo (PA-28RT-201 and PA-28RT-201T)....................
Installation of Pitch Servo (PA-28RT-201 and PA-28RT-201T)..................
Removal of Pitch Trim Servo (PA-28RT-201 and PA-28RT-201T)
Installation of Pitch Trim Servo (PA-28 RT-20 1 and PA-28 RT-201T)
Removal of Nav Flag Adapter (PA-23-250 Six Place,
S/N 27-7554001, 7554074 to 7754127; PA-31, S/N 31-7512023
to 7712064; PA-31-350, S/N 31-7552054 to 7752100,
31-7752102 to 7752113 and PA-31P, S/N 31P-7630014
to7730012)....................................................
Installation of Nav Flag Adapter (PA-23-250 Six Place,
S/N 27-7554001, 7554074 to 7754127; PA-31, S/N 31-7512023
to 7712064; PA-31-350, S/N 31-7552054 to 7752100,
31-7752102 to 7752113 and PA-31P, S/N 31P-7630014
to7730012)--.-.-.-.-.-.---Removal of Nav Flag Adapter (PA-32-260, S/N 32-7600001
to 7700017; PA-32-300, S/N 32-7640001 to 7740075; PA-32R-300,
S/N 32R-7680001 to 7780350 and PA-34-200T, S/N 34-7670001 to 7770261)
Installation of Nav Flag Adapter (PA-32-260, S/N 32-760001
to 7700017; PA-32-300, S/N 32-7640001 to 7740075; PA-32R-300,
S/N 32R-7680001 to 7780350 and PA-34-200T, S/N 34-7670001
to 7770261)
Removal of KA-52 Autopilot Adapter........................................
Installation of KA-52 Autopilot Adapter
....................
3-75
....................
3-76
3-76
.......................................................
3-154.
...................................................
3-155.
3-156.
3-157.
3-158.
3-159.
3-160.
3-161.
3-162.
3-163.
3-164.
3-165.
'
3-166.
.....................
...............
3-79
3-79
...........................................................
3-167.
3-168.
iii-vi
3-76
3-76
3-76
3-76
3-77
3-77
3-77
3-78
3-79
.....................................
ADDED:
3-79
3-80
3-80
3-81
11/30/79
SECTION III
3-1. INTRODUCTION. The instructions in this section provide removal and installation procedures for the
AltiMatic IIIC components. Checks and adjustments are limited to those required for removal and
installation of the components. Repairs, Bench Checks and Adjustments, and Set-Up Procedures are found
in the sections to follow.
On the following pages are two tables. Table III-I lists all the Pitch Trim Servos installed in each
airplane. Table III-II lists all the components of the AltiMatic IIIC installed in each airplane.
Figure 3-1 is used to properly set up and check a servo prior to installation in the airplane. The use of
this illustration will be discussed in Paragraph 3-2.
To help initially locate the AltiMatic IIIC component parts in any given airplane, refer to Figures 3-3
thru 3-7a inclusive. The Radio Coupler, which is optional equipment, is not shown in these illustrations.
When the coupler is installed, it is easily located in the instrument panel.
When installing a servo bridle cable, reference is made to either Figure 3-8 or Figure 3-9. The
illustrated airplane cable systems shown in these illustrations will help to properly adjust the bridle cable
tension.
CAUTION
The Allen head set screw (Piper P/N 757 579) used in the servo
capstan may have a nylon insert on the shank. The insert is used as
a locking device and any screw with this on should be discarded
after it has been removed because the locking capability of the
nylon is limited to one installation.
3-2. PRE-INSTALLATION CHECK AND ADJUSTMENTS OF ROLL, YAW AND PITCH SERVO
ASSEMBLIES. Prior to installation of a roll, yaw or pitch servo assembly, certain checks and adjustments
should be conducted according to Figure 3-1 and the following instructions.
NOTE
Figure 3-1 describes the set-up procedures
1C465-1 1C470-1 and 1C508-1 Servos.
for the 1C363-1,
a.
Switch Position: Check the position of either the switch plate or the motor wiring to pin C and
pin D of the servo connector with the appropriate table in Figure 3-1. To set the switch in the correct
position, remove the two screws through the face of the switch plate. Move the slide switch to the left or
right, as necessary, and reinstall the plate with the corresponding letter visible. If the servo does not feature
a switch, the wiring from the motor to pin C and pin D of the servo motor connector must be checked. For
clockwise rotation of the shaft, place the Blk wire on pin C and the Red wire on pin D. For
counterclockwise rotation, place the Red wire on pin C and the Blk wire on pin D.
b.
Cable Guards: Check the correct location and number of guards required for each servo.
REMOVE ALL OTHER CABLE GUARDS FROM THE SERVO.

REVISED: 11/30/79
3-1
c.
Torque Output Clutch Adjustment: The Clutch Adjustment Procedure is not authorized in the
field at this time on copper/carbon type clutches as per manufacturer EDO-AIRE Mitchell.
d.
Servo Model Number: Three digits will identify the servo as to the model of the servo as installed
in the airplane. Whether it is set for a roll, yaw or pitch servo will be identified by the letter placed after the
three digits, either "R", "Y" or "P".
e.
Bridle Cable Tension: The tension of the airplane control cables should be checked to assure that
it is in accordance with the specifications for the particular model before attachment of the bridle cable is
accomplished.
TABLE III-I. ALTIMATIC IIIC TRIM SERVO CLUTCH TENSION
AIRPLANE
PA-23-250
PA-28RT-201;-201T
PA-31-310
PA-31-325
PA-31-350
PA-31P
PA-32-260/300
PA-32R-300&
PA-32RT-300/300T
PA-32-301;-301T
PA-32R-301-301T
PA-34-200T
PA44-180
PA-44-180T
SERVO NO
IC469-6-504
lC373-6-755
IC469-6-483
IC469-6-483
I C469-6-498
1C469-6-484
SEE NOTE IC3734488
SEE NOTE IC373-6-529
IC373-6-529
IC373-6-677
IC373-6-487
IC373-6-719
\C373-6-719
SWITCH
POSITION
CLUTCH SETTING
R
R
R
R
R
25 t 5 lbs.
21 i4 lbs.
20 t 5 lbs.
20 t 5 lbs.
25 i 3 lbs.
35 t 5 lbs
18 i 3 lbs.
L
L
L
L
L
L
18 i3 lbs.
18 3 lbs.
21 t 4 lbs.
20 5 lbs.
21 t 4 lbs.
21 4 lbs.
L
R
NOTE
IC373-6-529 Trim Servo and IC508-1-775P Pitch Servo used on

PA-32-300 on S/N PA-32-7940001 and up; IC373-6-677 Trim
Servo (clutch setting 21 4 lbs.) used on PA-32RT-300/300T on
S/ N PA-32R-7985014 and up and PA-32R-7887004, 7887051 and
up.
3-2

REVISED:
10/16/81
TO PIN C
TO MOTOR
TO CONNECTOR
ALTERNATE WIRING FOR
POSITION
POSITION 1
'
4A 152
TENSION
WASHER
SWITCH POSITION
REVERSE FOR L
Airplane
Servo Model
PA-23-250 E Model
PA-23-250 E Model
PA-23-250 F Model
PA-23-250 F Model
PA-28RT-201:-201T
PA-28RT-20\;-201T
PA-31-310
PA-31-310
PA-31-310
PA-31-325
PA-31-325
PA-31-325
PA-31-350
PA-31-350
PA-31-350
IC465-1-504R
IC470-504P
IC465-1-504R
IC470-1-509P
IC373-1-430R
1CSO8-1-529P
Guard
Position
1&3
I, 2 & 4
I &3
2&4
I & 3
I &2
I &3
2&4
2 &4
1&3
2 &4
2 &4
I &3
2&4
2&4
1&3
IC470-1-484P
R
L
R
L
R
R
R
L
R
R
L
R
R
L
R
R
L
IC465-1-491Y
2 &4
1C465-1-483R
IC470-1-483P
IC465-1-491Y
1C465-1-483R
1C470-1-498P
IC465-1-491Y
IC465-1-498R
IC4761-498P
1C465-1-491Y
1C465-1-484R
PA-31P
PA-3IP
PA-31P
Switch
Position
2&4
Clutch
Setting
35 lbs. 5
17 lbs. 3
35 lbs. 5
17 lbs. 3
23 lbs. 3-5
44 lbs.: 6
45 lbs. 3
15 lbs. 3
40 lbs. 10
451bs.3
20 lbs. 5
40 lbs.
10
40 lbs.. 5
20 lbs.5
40 lbs. 10
45 lbs. 3
261bs.4-6
40 lbs.
10
Tension
Washer
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
PA-32-260 300. PA-32R-300
-E
& PA-32RT-300:300T
IC363-1-269R
2&4
43 lbs. 7-8
YES
PA-32-2607 300
PA-32R-300 &
PA-32RT-300/300T
PA-32-301:-30\T &
PA-32R-301:-301T
PA-32-301;-301T
PA-32R-30I:-301T
PA-34-200T
PA-34-200T
PA-44-180
PA-44-180
PA-44-180T
PA-44-180T
ICSOS-1-183P*
55 lbs. 3
YES
1C508-1-529P
I &2
44 lbs. 6
YES
IC363-1-269R
ICSO8-I-775P
R
R
R
R
R
2
I
I
I
ICSO8-I-529P
IC363-1-487R
1CSO8-I-487P
IC363-1-719R
ICSO8-I-529P
IC363-1-757R
ICSO8-1-529P
R
R
R
R
&4
&2
&2
&3
I
I &3
\ &2
I &3
1&2
43 lbs. 7-8
55 lbs. 3
44 lbs. 6
40 lbs.5
50 lbs. : 10
31 lbs.4
44 lbs. 6
26 lbs.4
44 lbs.6
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
*SEE NOTE
Figure 3-1. Roll, Rudder and Pitch Servo Guide

REVISED: 10/16/81
PAGE 3-2
3-3
BRIDLE CABLE
P/N 757 863 (42A 173-1)
PA-23-250 (Six Place) E & F Models

PA-28RT-201, PA-28RT-201T
PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P
PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32R-300,
PA-32-301, PA-32-301T, PA-32R-301
and PA-32R-301T
PA-34-200T
PA-44-180
BRIDLE CABLE
ROLL AND PITCH

ROLLAND PITCH
RUDDER
ROLL AND PITCH
ROLL AND PITCH
ROLL AND PITCH
ROLLAND PITCH
5 CCOANTLREOL
P/N 758 082 (42A 184-1)
PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P
ROLL
Figure 3-2. Bridle Cable Clamp Installation

3-4

REVISED: 11/30/79
PA-44
INDI
PA-44-ING
PA-44-INo
19720
10720
ID720
PA-34-2001
ID720
ID720
PA-32R-301;-30IT
10720
ID720
PA-32RT-300
PA-32RT-300T
ID720
PA-32R-3tKI
19720
PA-32-301;-30IT
10515-!
10720
PA-32-260
PA-32-300
ICSIS-I
10515-1
10515-3
ICSUN-1-929p
ICSUN-i-529P
111C APPLlCABlLITY
IC363-i.757R
IC363-1-714R
IC363-1-4N7R
ICSUN-t-487P
CHART
10725
I( 725
10725
or
10407
10725
IC363-I-269R
10725
10725
10407
or
10407
10407
IC363-1-269R
IC363-1-269R
IC363-1-269R
IC363-1-269R
IC363-i-269R
10465-1-491
IC465-1-49IV
IC407
IC407
ICSUN-i-529P
ICSON-I-529P
ALTIMATIC
10515-1
10465-1-491Y
IC465-1-491Y
10725
IC725
10725
ICSIS-I
-775P
ICSUN I-529P
1050N I-529P
ICSON
ICSOH-I-Ig3p
IC363-1-269R
IC465-1-484R
IC470-1-484P
ICSON-I-IN3P
IC465-1-498R
I-498P
IC47
IC465-1-483R
IC465-I-483R
I-483P
IC470-1498P
IC47
10725
IC465-1-504R
ATTITUDE
HOLD UNIT
IC363-1-430R
IC465-1-504R
RUDDER SERVO
1047 I-509P
ICSOS-i-529P
IC515-I
IC515-I
ICSIS-I
ICSIS-I
ICSIS-I
10720
PA-3IP
ICSIS-I
ID720
PA-31-350
ID720
ICSINI
ID720
PA-31-3IO
ICSIS-I
ICSIS-I
PA-31-325
ICSIS-I
ID720
IC470-I-504P
ICSIS-1
ROLL SERVO
IC407
10407
PITCH SERVO
AMPLIFIER
F Model
PA-28RT-201;-20IT
CONSOLE
ID720
ID720
AIRPLANE
TABLE III-II.
IAny Modilicanoni
IC3NM*
IAny Modiiscation)
1038N
10388
10388.
(Any Modilicanon)
10388
10388
(Any Meditication)
10388*
(Any Moddication)
10388'
(Any Modification)
IC388
(Any Modification)
IC388
IC388*
(Any Modificalion)
RADIO
COUPLER (OFT.)
% \
44-7945(Nil
up
NN 44-HIU7tWII & uP
10725 Altjiude Hold Unit used

on PA-34-200T with S/N 34-7770186.
34-7770264andup.
IC725 Aliitude Hold Unit used

on PA-32-260 with SN 32-78txKl01
aondPA-32-300 with SN
d7
up
10725 Altuude
Hold I nu used on
PA 32-260 unh NN 32-78tNMHil and up
and on PA-32-3tWI unh N \ 12-784iM)46
and
will
RadioCoupler Piper P/N

757898installed.
*Airplanes equipped
LO
d
REMARKS
3-6
LEFT BLANK
00
10
11. FLUX DETECTOR

12. NAV CONVERTER
(tC707)
1. CONSOLE
2. ELECTRONIC TRIM AMPLIFIER AND AUTOPILOT AMPLIFIER
3. ATTITUDE GYRO
4. DIRECTIONAL GYRO/HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR
6. ALTITUDE HOLD UNIT
6. RELAY BOX
7. ROLL SERVO
8. PITCH SERVO
9. PITCH TRIM SERVO
10. GYRO SLAVING AMPLIFIER
13. FLUX DETECTOR

14. NAV CONVERTER
(1C707)
7. ROLL SERVO
8. PITCH SERVO
9. RUDDER SERVO
10. PITCH TRIM SERVO
11. YAW DAMPER AMPLIFIER
12. GYRO SLAVING AMPLIFIER
CONSOLE
ELECTRONIC TRIM AMPLIFIER AND AUTOPILOT AMPLIFIER
ATTITUDE GYAO
SITUATION INDICATOR
DIRECTIONAL GYRO/HORIZONTAL
5. ALTITUDE HOLD UNIT
6. RELAY BOX
1.
2.
3.
4.
11
13
1 CONSOLE
3 ELECTRONIC TRIM AMPLIFIER (PA-32-260.

S/N 32-7800001
S/N 32-7840046 AND UP; PA-32R-300,
AND UP; PA-32-300.
PA-32RT-300.
PA-32-301T.
PA-32RT-300T,
PA-32-301.
PA-32R-301
AND PA-32R-301T)
4 AUTOPILOT AMPLIFIER (PA-32-260,
S/N 32-7500001
TO
PA-32-300.
S/N 32-7540001
TO 7840045 AND
7700023;
PA-32R-300,
S/N 32R-7680001
TO 7780417)
S/N 32-7800001 AND
6 AUTOPILOT AMPLIFIER (PA-32-260,
UP, PA-32 300. S/N 32-7840046 AND UP; PA-32R-300,
PA-32RT-300T,
S/N 32R-7780418
AND UP; PA-32RT-300,
PA-32R-301
PA-32-301T.
PA-32-301,
AND PA-32R-301T)
6 ATTITUDE GYRO
7 DIRECTIONAL GYRO AND/OR HORIZONTAL SITUATION
INDICATOR
S/N 32-7500001 TO
8 ALTITUDE HOLD UNIT (PA-32-260,
S/N 32-7540001
7700023 AND PA-32-300,
TO 7840045)
TO
9 ALTITU1DE HOLD UNIT (PA-32R-300. S/N 32R-7680002
2 ELECTRONIC TRIM AMPLIFIER (PA-32-260. S/N 32-7500001

TO 7700023 AND PA-32-300, S/N 32-7540001 TO 7840045)
17
18
FLUX DETECTOR (OPTION)
13 ROLL SERVO
S/N 32-7540001
14 PITCH SERVO (PA-32-260 AND PA-32-300,
TO 7840222)
S/N 32-7940001
AND UP.
15 PITCH SERVO (PA-32-300,
PA-32R-300,
PA-32RT-300T,
PA-32RT-300.
PA 32-301.
PA-32R-301
PA-32-301T.
AND PA-32R-301T)
16 PITCH TRIM SERVO
SN 32R-7680001 TO 7780417)
S/N 32-7800001
AND UP;
12 RELAY BOX (PA-32-260,
PA-32-300.
S/N 32-7840046 AND UP; PA-32R-300.
PA-32RT-300T.
SN 32R-7780418 AND UP; PA-32RT-300.
PA-32R-301
AND PA-32R-301T)
PA 32-301. PA-32-301T,
S/N 32-7800001
AND UP;
10. ALTITUDE HOLD UNIT (PA-32-260,
PA-32-300,
S/N 32-7840046 AND UP. PA-32R-300.
PA-32RT-300T.
S/N 32R-7780418
AND UP; PA-32RT-300.
PA-32A-301 AND PA-32R-301T)
PA-32-301.
PA-32-301T.
TO 7700023;
11 RELAY BOX (PA-32-260.
S/N 32-7500001
PA-32-300.
S/N 32-7540001 TO 7840045 AND PA-32R-300.
10.
11.
12.
8.
9.
7.
6.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
10
12
ELECTRONIC TRIM AMPLIFIER AND AUTOPILOT AMPLIFIER

ATTITUDE GYRO
DIRECTIONAL GYRO/HORIZONTAL
SITUATION INDICATOR
ALTITUDE HOLD UNIT
RELAY BOX
ROLL SERVO
PITCH SERVO
PITCH TRIM SERVO
GYRO SLAVING AMPLIFIER
FLUX DETECTOR
NAV CONVERTER
CONSOLE
11
1. CONSOLE
2. AUTOPILOT AMPLIFIER
3. ELECTRICTRIM AMPLIFIER
4. ATTITUDE GYRO
5. DIRECTIONAL GYRO
6. ALTITUDE HOLD
7. RELAY BOX
8. ROLL SERVO
9. PITCHTRIM SERVO
10. PITCH SERVO
3
8
10
PIPER ALTIMATIC
->-o
IIIC SERVICE MANUAL
com
Figure 3-7a. PA-28RT-201 and PA-28RT-201T

3-12
AltiMatic IllC Layout
REMOVAL
AND INSTALLATION
REVISED: 11/30/79
PIPER ALTIMATIC IHC SERVICE MANUAL
PA-23-250 (Six Pla) E & F Model's
AILERON
CABLE
BRIDLE
CABLE
CLAMP
Y
AILERON
CABLE
SERVO
TENSION
OF AILERON
TENSION
OF BRIDLE
AIRPLANES
SPECIFIED
CABLE
BETWEEN
CABLE
BRIDLE
CLAMPS
CABLE
AILERON
CABLE
TENSION
PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P
X -TENSION
OF AILERON
OF BRIDLE
TENSION
AIRPLANES
SPECIFIED
CABLE
BETWEEN
BRIDLE
CABLE
rLAMPS
CABLE
AILERON
CABLE
TENSION
Figure 3-8. Roll Servo Cable Tension Diagram

REVISED:
8/10/78
3-13
PA-28RT-201;-201T,
PA-32-260,
PA-32-300.
PA-32R-300,
PA-32RT-300, PA-32RT-300T,
PA-32-301,
PA-32-301T,
PA-32R-301
and PA-32R-301T
BRIDLE
CABLE
CLAMP
5ERVO
AILERON
X
Y
TENSION
OF AILERON
TENSION
OF BR1DLE
AIRPLANES
'
CABLE
CABLE
BETWEEN
CABLE
BRIDLE
CLAMPS
CABLE
SPECIFIED
AILERON
CABLE
TENSION
PA-34-200T and PA-44-180
BRIDLE
CABLE
CLAMP
SERVO
AILERON
TENSION
OF AILERON
TENSION
OF BRIDLE
AIRPLANES
SPECIFIED
CABLE
CABLE
a',,'
SETWEEN
BRIDLE
CABLE
CLAMPS
CABLE
AILERON
CABLE
TENSION
Figu 3-8. Roll Servo Cable Tension Diagram (cont.)

3-14

REVISED: 11/30/79
PA-23-250 (Six Pla) E & F Model's
STABILATOR
CABLE
SERVO
Z
BRIDLE
STABILATOR
X
Y -TENSION
OF
Z-STABILATOR
-
CABLE
BRIDLE
CABLE
TENSION
AFT
OF
BRIDLE
CABLE
CABLE
CLAMP
CLAMPS
CABLE
TENSION
FORWARD
OF
BRIDLE
CABLE
CLAMPS
PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P
z
Y
Figure 3-9. Pitch and Rudder Servo Cable Tension Diagram

i

8/10/78
REVISED:
3-15
PA-32-300. PA-32R-300,
PA-32RT-300, PA-32RT-300T,
PA-32-260,
PA-32-301,
PA-32-301T,
PA-32R-301 and PA-32R-301T
Y
t
'
5TABILATOR
CABLE
SERVO LOCATION FOR

PA-32-300
PA-32-260,
'
SERVO LOCATION FOR

ALL OTHER MODELS
(EARLY MODELS)
Y
CABLE
BRIDLE
X
Y
=
-
CLAMP
STABILATOR
CABLE
TENSION OF BRIDLE
AIRPLANE
SPECIFIED
TENSION
BETWEEN
CABLE
STABILATOR
BRIDLE
CABLE
CABLE
CLAMPS
TENSION
PA-34-200T
STABILATOR
SERVO
CABLE
Y
BRIDLE
CABLE
X
Y
=
-
CLAMP
STABILATOR
CABLE
TENSION OF BRIDLE
AIRPLANE
SPECIFIED
TENSION
BETWEEN
CABLE
STABILATOR
BRIDLE
CABLE
CABLE
CLAMPS
TENSION
Figure 3-9. Pitch and Rudder Servo Cable Tension Diagram (cont.)
3-16

REVISED: 11/30/79
PIPER ALTIMATIC IB C SERVICE MANUAL
PA-28RT-201;-201T
and PA-44-180
BRIDLECABLE CLAMPS
2
Z
STABILATOR
SERVO
CABLE
TENSION OF BRIDLECABLE
AIRPLANESPECIFIED STABILATOR
CABLE TENSION
Figure 3-9. Pitch and Rudder Servo Cable Tension Diagram (cont.)
INTENTIONALLY

REVISED: 11/30/79
LEFT BLANK
3-17
PIPER ALTIMATIC III C SERVICE MANUAL
3-18
LEFT BLANK
REMOVAL
AND INSTALLATION
ADDED: 8/10/78
CONSOLE
COVER
POTENTIOMETERS
KNOB
ROLLCOMMAND
ATTACHMENT
SCREW
Figure 3-10. AltiMatic III C Console

3-3. CONSOLE (ALTIMATIC IIIC). The exploded view of the AltiMatic IIIC Console is shown in
illustration form in this section. Although the location varies in each airplane, the Flight Controller is the
same in all installations.
3-4. REMOVAL OF CONSOLE. (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models.
The console is located in the lower left section of the instrument panel.
a.
Remove the Roll Command Knob.
b.
Remove the four screws securing the face plate and remove face plate.
c.
Remove the console retaining screw. It is the screw located to the left of the trim meter on the
console.
d.
Disconnect the electrical harness plugs CD-20 and CD-40 from the rear of the console.
e.
Remove the console from the airplane.
3-5. INSTALLATION OF CONSOLE. (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models. (Refer to Figure 3-10.)
a.
Place the console in the instrument panel cutout.
b.
Connect the electrical harness plugs, CD-20 and CD-40, to the rear of the console. (Make sure
spring clip on CD-20 is secured.)
c.
Secure the console and install and secure the face plate.
d.
Install roll command knob and secure.
e.
Check console operation. (Refer to Section V.)

REVISED:
8/10/78
3-19

3-6. REMOVAL OF AUTOPILOT AMPLIFIER. (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Model's.
NOTE
The Electronic Trim
a mounting bracket
Amplifier. Therefore,
Amplifier is removed
Amplifier for the AltiMatic IIIC is located on

which is secured to the top of the Autopilot
the Electronic Trim Amplifier and Autopilot
from the airplane as one assembly.
The amplifier is located on the radio shelf in the aft section of the forward baggage compartment.
a.
Access to the amplifier is through the forward baggage compartment door.
b.
Disconnect the electrical harness from the amplifier by removing the two knurled screws from
the large amplifier connector and removing the connector from the amplifier.
c.
Disconnect the electrical connectors from the electronic trim amplifier.
d.
Unfasten the two fasteners that secure the amplifier to the mounting bracket.
e.
Remove the autopilot amplifier and electronic trim amplifier from the airplane as one unit.
f.
To remove the electronic trim amplifier and mounting bracket from the autopilot amplifier,
simply remove screws and lock washers securing the mounting bracket to the autopilot amplifier.
3-7. REMOVALOF ELECTRONIC TRIM AMPLIFIER. (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Model's.
The electronic trim amplifier is located on the radio shelf in the aft section of the forward baggage
compartment.
a.
b.
Remove amplifier per instructions in previous paragraph.
c.
Remove the four screws securing the electronic trim amplifier to the mounting bracket and
remove amplifier from mounting bracket.
3-8. INSTALLATION OF ELECTRONIC TRIM AMPLIFIER. (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models.
(Refer to Figure 3-11.)
a.
Place the electronic trim amplifier on the mounting bracket and secure with attaching screws.
b.
Place the mounting bracket with trim amplifier attached on the autopilot amplifier and secure
with attaching screws.
c.
Install autopilot amplifier as per the instructions in the following paragraph.
3-9. INSTALLATION OF AUTOPILOT AMPLIFIER. (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models. (Refer to
Figure 3-11.)
a.
With the large thirty pin receptable facing forward, place the amplifier on the mounting bracket
located on the radio shelf in the aft section of the forward baggage compartment and secure with the
fasteners.
b.
With the cables from the harness fanning to the left side of the airplane, connect the harness to
the autopilot amplifier by securing with the two screws previously removed from the receptacle.
c.
Connect the electrical connectors to the electronic trim amplifier.
d.
Check amplifier operation. (Refer to Section V.)
3-10. REMOVAL OF ATTITUDE GYRO. (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Model's.

The Attitude Gyro is located in the left instrument panel.
a.
Pull the control wheel, that is at the opposite side of the instrument panel from where the
shock-mounted panel is to be removed, to its aftmost position and secure with a cord tied between the
wheel and around the seat back.
3-20

REVISED:
8/10/78
The Electronic Trim Amplifier and

the Autopilot Amplifier are not
located together on all models.
Figure 3-11. AltiMatic III C, Electronic Trim Amplifier

and Autopilot Amplifier
Pad the control wheel tube with foam rubber or similar material.
b.
c.
Remove the self-locking nuts that secure the floating panel to its shock mounts. With an open
end wrench held next to the back side of the panel, hold the rubber mounts to eliminate twisting as the
nuts are being removed.
d.
Pull the panel back and allow it to rest on the padded control wheel tube.
e. Unscrew the electrical connector from the post light(s).
f.
Disconnect the electrical connection from the instrument.
g.
Disconnect the vacuum line and the relief line from the instrument. Identify hoses to facilitate
reinstallation. To prevent contamination, place protective covers over the ends of the hoses and the
instrument ports.
h.
Remove the post light(s) by turning off nut.
i.
Remove the screws securing the instrument to the instrument panel and remove instrument.
3-11. INSTALLATION
OF ATilTUDE GYRO. (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models. (Refer to Figure
3-12.)
a.
Position the instrument in its proper panel cutout and secure with appropriate screws.
b.
Remove any caps which were placed over the hoses and the instrument ports.
c.
Connect hoses to proper ports of instrument.
d.
Connect the electrical connection to the instrument.
e.
Connect the electrical connector to the post light(s) and tighten connector finger tight.
f.
Ascertain that one end of the ground strap is placed over the panel side of the shock mount stud.
g.
Place the floating panel in position and allow the shock mount attachment studs to protrude
through the panel. Install and tighten attachment nuts.

REVISED: 8/10/78
3-21
Figure 3-12. AltiMatic III C Attitude Gyro

h.
i.
j.
Remove the padding and release the control wheel.

Check operation of instrument. (Refer to Section V.)
Check post light operation.
3-12. REMOVAL
HORIZONTAL
SITUATION
OF DIRECTIONAL
GYRO AND/OR
INDICATOR. (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models.
The Directional Gyro and/or Horizontal Situation Indicator is located in the left instrument panel.
a.
Pull the control wheel that is at the opposite side of the instrument panel from where the
b.
c.
Remove the self-locking nuts that secure the floating panel to its shock mounts. With an open
end wrench held next to the back of the panel, hold the rubber mounts to eliminate twisting as the nuts are
being removed.
d.
e.
Unscrew the electrical connection from the post light(s).
f.
g.
Disconnect the vacuum line and relief line from the instrument. Identify hoses to facilitate
reinstallation.
To prevent contamination, place protective covers over the ends of the hoses and the
instrument ports.
h.
Remove the post light(s) by turning off nut.
i.
3-22

REVISED:
8/10/78
3-13.
GYRO AND/OR HORIZONTAL

INSTALLATION
OF DIRECTIONAL
INDICATOR. (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models. (Refer to Figure 3-13.)
SITUATION
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Connect the electrical connector to the post light(s) and tighten connector finger tight.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
3-14. REMOVAL OF ALTITUDE HOLD UNIT. (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Model's.
The altitude hold unit is located behind the left instrument panel directly forward of the cons. le. The
unit is secured to a mounting bracket with strap clamps which in turn is shock mounted to the fuselage.
a.
Access to the unit is from beneath the left instrument panel.
b.
Disconnect the electrical connection from the altitude hold unit.
c.
Disconnect the static hose by releasing the clamps and sliding the hose off the port. To prevent
contamination, place protective covers over the ends of the hose and the instrument port.
d.
Loosen the clamp screws securing the unit to the mounting bracket.
e.
Remove the altitude hold unit from the airplane.
Figure 3-13. AltiMatic III C Directional Gyro/Horizontal

Situation Indicator
8/10/78
REVISED:
3-23
Figure 3-14. AltiMatic III C Altitude Hold Unit (1C407)and Relay Box
3-15. INSTALLATION OF ALTITUDE HOLD UNIT. (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models. (Refer to
Figure 3-14.)
Position the altitude hold unit on the mounting bracket located behind the left instrument panel
a.
directly forward of the console. Position unit so static port is pointing aft and secure by tightening clamp
screws to 5 l inch pounds.
b.
Remove any caps which were placed over the ends of the hose and the static port.
c.
Connect the hose from the rate of climb indicator to the port marked static on the unit and
secure with clamp.
d.
Connect the electrical connection to the unit.
e.
Check operation of altitude hold unit. (Refer to Section V.)
3-16. REMOVAL OF RELAY BOX. (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Model's.
The relay box is located on a mounting bracket behind the left instrument panel directly forward of
the console.
a.
Access to the relay box is from beneath the left instrument panel.
b.
Disconnect the electrical connection from the relay box.
c.
Remove the screws and spacers securing the relay box to the mounting bracket.
d.
Remove the relay box from the airplane.
3-17. INSTALLATION OF RELAY BOX. (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models. (Refer to Figure 3-14.)
a.
Position the relay box on the mounting bracket located behind the left instrument panel directly
forward of the console. With the electrical connector to the right, install spacers and secure with
appropriate screws.
b.
Connect the electrical connection to the relay box.
c.
Check operation of relay box. (Refer to Section V.)
3-24

REVISED:
8/10/78

3-18. REMOVAL OF ROLL SERVO. (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Model's.
The roll servo is located beneath the pilot's seat forward of the main spar. The mounting bracket and
roll servo is removed as one unit.
a.
Remove the pilot's seat from the airplane.
b.
Roll back carpet on tunnel beneath pilot's seat over the main spar.
c.
Remove attaching screws in cover over servo assembly and remove cover.
d.
Disconnect the electrical connection from the servo.
Paint the aileron balance cable where the bridle cable clamps are attached and then remove the
e.
two bridle cable clamps. (DO NOT paint the bridle cable end terminals as one terminal is painted red to
facilitate reinstallation.)
f.
Remove the six bolts, washers and nuts that secure the bracket and roll servo to the airframe and
remove servo and mounting bracket from the airplane.
g.
Remove the four bolts, washers and nuts that secure the roll servo to the mounting bracket and
remove roll servo from mounting bracket.
3-19. INSTALLATION OF ROLL SERVO. (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models. (Refer
to Figure 3-15.)
a.
Insert bridle cable pin in capstan and tighten bridle cable pin lock screw.
b.
Wrap the long end of the bridle cable three-quarters of a turn clockwise on the lower capstan
grooves and the short end of the bridle cable with the red ball one and one-quarter turns counterclockwise
on the upper capstan grooves.
c.
Adjust the cable guards on the servo to provide a gap of
of an inch between the capstan and
guard.
d.
Position the roll servo on the mounting bracket and secure with the four bolts, washers and nuts
previously removed.
.031
une com
BRIDLE
CAKE
MIKECAKE
ctm
clamp
IMOLECAKE
Figu 3-15. Roll Servo Installation, PA-23-250 (Six Place)

E & F Models
REVISED:
8/10/78
3-25

e.
Place the mounting bracket with roll servo attached in its proper position and secure with the six
bolts, washers and nuts previously removed.
REFER TO FIGURE 3-8 AND CHECK THAT CONTROL CABLE TENSION (Z) IS ADJUSTED
f.
+
TO 40 8 0 POUNDS PRIOR TO ATTACHING THE BRIDLE CABLE CLAMPS. Ascertain area on cable
where clamp attaches is clean, dry and free of all lubricants and anti-corrosive additives. Attach the bridle
cable to the aileron balance cable. The bridle cable is drawn to the balance cable and attached with clamps
at the previously painted locations on the balance cable. The end of the bridle cable with the red ball
extends toward the right side of the airplane. (Refer to Figure 3-15.) (Should the balance cable not be
painted, position the control wheel in neutral and align the bridle cable pin, installed in the capstan, as
shown in Figure 3-15.) Adjust the bridle cable clamps so the bridle cable tension (Y) is equal to the control
cable tension between the bridle cable clamps (X) as shown in Figure 3-8 without increasing the control
cable tension from the bridle cable clamps outward. At no time shall the bridle cable tension be greater
than the control cable tension between the clamps. Adjusting the bridle cable tension will lower the control
cable tension between the two bridle cable clamps. Torque the bridle cable clamp bolts to 55 5
inch-pounds.
g.
Connect the electrical connection to the servo.
-
CAUTION
Check security of bridle cable clamps and the bridle cable capstan
pin. To do this, turn on the master switch and with the roll
command knob centered place the roll engage rocker switch in the
ON position to engage the roll servo. Turn the control wheel
manually to the extreme left and right positions to ascertain the
clamps and pin do not change position. Next operate the servo
electrically by rotating the roll command knob to its extreme left
and right position. Examine the bridle cable to verify the clamps
and pin do not change position. The clutch will slip during these
operations.
h.
i.
Install servo cover on tunnel over main spar and secure with appropriate screws.
Install carpet and pilot's seat and secure.
3-20. REMOVAL OF PITCH SERVO. (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Model's.

The pitch servo is located aft of the rear baggage compartment on the lower fuselage.
a.
Remove attaching screws from the hat shelf panel in rear baggage compartment and remove
panel.
b.
Remove attaching screws in aft panel of rear baggage compartment and remove panel.
c.
d.
Paint the stabilator control cables where the bridle cable clamps are located and then remove the
e.
Remove the bolts, washers and nuts securing the servo to the mounting bracket and remove the
servo from the airplane.
3-21. INSTALLATION OF PITCH SERVO. (PA-23-250 Six Place) E Model. (Refer to Figure 3-16.)
a.
Install bridle cable pin in capstan and tighten bridle cable pin lock screw.
b.
Wrap the end of the bridle cable with the red terminal one and three-quarter turns clockwise
from the bridle cable pin on the upper capstan grooves and the other end of the bridle cable three-quarters
of a turn counterclockwise from the bridle cable pin on the lower capstan grooves.
3-26

REVISED:
8/10/78
CLAMP
ilOLECABLE
Figure 3-16. Pitch Servo Installation, PA-23-250

(Six Place) E Model
c.
guard.
.031
d. Position the servo on the mounting bracket and secure with the four bolts, washers and nuts
previously removed.
e.
REFER TO FIGURE 3-9 AND CHECK THAT THE CONTROL CABLE TENSION (Z) IS
ADJUSTED TO 35 4 POUNDS PRIOR TO ATTACHING THE BRIDLE CABLE CLAMPS. Ascertain area
on cable where clamp attaches is clean, dry and free of all lubricants and anti-corrosive additives. Attach the
bridle cable to the stabilator control cables. The bridle cable is drawn to the stabilator control cables and
attached with clamps at the previously painted locations. The end of the bridle cable with the red ball is
attached to the left control cable. (Refer to Figure 3-16.) (Should the stabilator cables not be painted,
position the control wheel full forward and with the servo disengaged, align the bridle cable pin installed in
the capstan as shown in Figure 3-16. Adjust the bridle cable clamps so that the bridle cable tension (Y) as
shown in Figure 3-9 is 15 2 pounds. Check the control cable tension forward of the bridle cable clamps
and adjust, if necessary to obtain 35 4 pounds. If the control cables require adjustment, it will be
necessary to readjust the bridle cable tension to 15 2 pounds. Torque the bridle cable clamp bolts to 55
5 inch-1bs.
f.

8/10/78
REVISED:
3-27
CAUTION
pin. To do this, turn on the master switch and with the pitch
command disc centered place the roll engage rocker switch and the
pitch mode switch in the ON position. Move the control wheel
manually to the extreme fore and aft positions to ascertain the
electrically by rotating the pitch command disc full UP and full
DOWN. Examine the bridle cable to verify the clamps and pin do
not change position. The clutch will slip during these operations.
g.
h.
Install aft panel in rear baggage compartment and secure with appropriate screws.
Install hat shelf panel in rear baggage compartment and secure with appropriate screws.
3-22. INSTALLATION OF PITCH SERVO. (PA-23-250 Six Place) F Model. (Refer to Figure 3-17.)
a.
b.
Wrap the end of the bridle cable with the red terminal two turns counterclockwise from the bridle
cable pin on the upper capstan grooves and the other end of the bridle cable one-half turn clockwise from the
bridle cable pin on the lower capstan grooves.
c.
.031
guard.
d.
Position the servo on the mounting bracket and secure with the four bolts, washers and nuts
previously removed.
e.
ADJUSTED TO 35 4 POUNDS PRIOR TO ATTACHING THE BRIDLE CABLE CLAMPS. Ascertain area
on cable where clamp attaches is clean, dry and free of all lubricants and anti-corrosive additives. Attach the
bridle cable to the stabilator control cables. The bridle cable is drawn to the stabilator control cables and
attached with clamps at the previously painted locations. The end of the bridle cable with the red ball is
attached to the left control cable. (Refer to Figure 3-17.) (Should the stabilator cables not be painted,
position the control wheel full forward and with the servo disengaged, align the bridle cable pin installed in
the capstan as shown in Figure 3-17.) Adjust the bridle cable clamps so that the bridle cable tension (Y) as
shown in Figure 3-9 is 15 2 pounds. Check the control cable tension forward of the bridle cable clamps
and adjust, if necessary to obtain 35 4 pounds. If the control cables require adjustment, it will be
necessary to readjust the bridle cable tension to 15 2 pounds. Torque the bridle cable clamp bolts to 55
5 inch-lbs.
f.
3-28

REVISED:
8/10/78
POI
BRIOLE
CABLE
RED8ALL
CABLE
SUARO
CAPSTAN
CLAMPBRIBLE
CABLE
Figure 3-17. Pitch Servo Installation, PA-23-250

(Six Place) F Model
CAUTION
command dise centered place the roll engage rocker switch and the
electrically by rotating the pitch command disc full UP and full
DOWN. Examine the bridle cable to verify the clamps and pin do
g.
h.

8/10/78
REVISED:
3-29
3-23. REMOVAL OF PITCH TRIM SERVO. (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models.
The pitch trim servo is located on the upper fuselage area above the ceiling panel
in the rear baggage

compartment.
a.
Remove the attaching screws in the ceiling panel in the rear baggage comparunent and remove
ceiling panel.
b.
Remove attaching screws in the hat shelf panel in the rear baggage compartment and remove
panel, then remove attaching screws in the aft panel of the rear baggage compartment and remove panel to
gain access to turnbuckles to release the trim cable tension.
NOTE
To maintain cable routing of the trim cable during removal and
installation of the trim servo, it is recommended that a service aid
be fabricated from shop material such as two bridle cable clamps
and a short length of cable or two blocks of wood pre-drilled with
a bolt and nut inserted to maintain cable routing.
c.
d.
e.

Remove the four bolts, washers and nuts securing the servo to the mounting bracket.
Unwrap trim cable from capstan and idler pulley and remove the servo from the airplane.
3-24. INSTALLATION OF PITCH TRIM SERVO. (PA-23-250 six Place) E & F Models. (Refer to Figure
3-18.)
a.
Position the pitch trim servo on the mounting bracket and secure with bolts, washers and nuts
previously removed.
b.
Route the trim cable from the forward part of the airplane around the top capstan groove to the
idler pulley and around the bottom capstan groove to the aft section of the airplane, completing a figure
eight.
Tighten the trim cable (on aircraft incorporating the Stabilator Bungee Spring Installation, the
c.
Bungee Spring must be disconnected when adjusting cable tension) to obtain 15 3 lbs. cable tension.
d.
e.
Check servo operation. (Refer to Section V.)
f.
g.
h.
Install ceiling panel in rear baggage compartment and secure with appropriate screws.
3-30

8/10/78
REVISED:
CAPSTAN
PULLEY
IDLER
Figure 3-18. Pitch Trim Servo Installation, PA-23-250

(Six Place) E & F Models
3-25. REMOVAL OF GYRO SLAVING AMPLIFIER. (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models.
The gyro slaving amplifier is located on upper right forward section of the pedestal beneath the right
instrument panel.
a.
Disconnect the electrical connection from the amplifier.
b.
Remove the screws securing the amplifier to the pedestal.
c.
Remove the amplifier from the airplane.
3-26. INSTALLATION OF GYRO SLAVING AMPLIFIER. (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models. (Refer
to Figure 3-19.)
a.
With the electrical connector facing forward place the amplifier on the upper right forward
section of the pedestal beneath the right instrument panel and secure with appropriate screws.
b.
Connect the electrical connection to the amplifier.
c.
3-27. REMOVAL OF FLUX DETECTOR. (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models.
The flux detector is located aft of the rear baggage area on a mounting bracket on the left side of the
fuselage.
a.
Remove attaching
screws from the hat shelf panel in rear baggage compartment
and remove
panel.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Remove the screws attaching the aft panel in the rear baggage area and remove the panel.
Disconnect the electrical connection from the flux detector.
Mark the original position of the flux detector.
Remove the three screws securing the flux detector to the mounting bracket.
Remove the flux detector from the airplane.

REVISED:
8/10/78
3-31
Figure 3-19. AltiMatic III C, Gyro SlavingAmplifier
Figure 3-20. AltiMatic III C, Flux Detector

3-32

8/10/78
REVISED:
3-28. INSTALLATION
Figu 3-21. AltiMatic III C, NAV Converter (lC707)

OF FLUX DETECTOR. (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models. (Refer to Figure
3-20.)
a.
Position the flux detector on the mounting bracket with the label side up and the arrow pointing
forward, and secure with original screws.
b.
Connect the electrical connection to the flux detector.
c.
Check flux detector operation. (Refer to Section V.)
d.
Install the aft panel in the rear baggage area and secure with appropriate screws.
e.
3-29. REMOVAL OF NAV CONVERTER (lC707). (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models.
The NAV Converter is located on the left rear section of the radio shelf aft of the forward baggage
compartment.
a.
Access to the converter is through the forward baggage compartment door.
Disconnect the electrical connection from the NAV converter.
b.
Remove the three screws and nuts securing the NAV converter to the radio shelf.
c.
d.
Remove the NAV converter from the airplane.
3-30. INSTALLATION OF NAV CONVERTER (lC707). (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models. (Refer to
Figure 3-21.)
a.
With the electrical connector facing forward place the NAV converter on the left rear section of
the radio shelf aft of the forward baggage compartment and secure with appropriate screws and nuts.
b.
Connect the electrical connection to the NAV converter.
c.
Check NAV converter operation. (Refer to Section V.)

8/10/78
REVISED:
3-33
3-31. REMOVAL OF CONGOLE. (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P)

The console is located in the top of the control quadrant pedestal.
a.
b.
c.
console.
d.
e.
f.
Remove the roll command knob.

Remove the largest access plate from the right side of the control pedestal.
Disconnect the electrical harness plugs, CD-20 and CD-40, from the rear of the console.
3-32. INSTALLATION OF CONSOLE. (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P) (Refer to Figure
3-10.)
a.
Place the console in the cutout in the top of the control quadrant pedestal.
b.
Connect the electrical harness plugs CD-20 and CD-40, to the rear of the console. (Make sure
c.
d.
e.
Install access plate on the right side of the pedestal and secure.
f.
3-33. REMOVAL OF AUTOPILOT AMPLIFIER. (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P)
NOTE
The Electronic Trim
a mounting bracket
Amplifier. Therefore,
Amplifier is removed
Amplifier for the AltiMatic IIIC is located on

which is secured to the top of the Autopilot
the Electronic Trim Amplifier and Autopilot
from the airplane as one assembly.
The amplifier is located on the right side of the radio shelf aft of the forward baggage compartment.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
To remove the electronic trim amplifier and mounting bracket from the autopilot amplifier,
simply remove screws and lock washers securing the mounting bracket to the autopilot amplifier.
3-34. REMOVAL OF ELECTRONIC TRIM AMPLIFIER. (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P)
The electronic trim amplifier is located on the right side of the radio shelf aft of the forward baggage
compartment.
a.
b.
c.
Remove the four screws securing the electronic trim amplifier to the mounting bracket and
remove amplifier from mounting bracket.
3-35. INSTALLATION OF ELECTRONIC TRIM AMPLIFIER. (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and

PA-31P) (Refer to Figure 3-11.)
a.
3-34

REVISED:
8/10/78
b.
Place the mounting bracket with trim amplifier attached on the autopilot amplifier and secure
with attaching screws.
c.
3-36. INSTALLATION
PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and
OF AUTOPILOT AMPLIFIER. (PA-31-310,
a.
With the large thirty pin receptable facing forward, place the amplifier on the mounting bracket
located on the right side of the radio shelf aft of the forward baggage compartment and secure with
fasteners.
b. With the cables from the harness fanning to the left side of the airplane, connect the harness to
the autopilot amplifier by securing with the two screws previously removed from the receptable.
c.
d.
3-37. REMOVAL OF ATTITUDE GYRO. (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P)
The Attitude Gyro is located in the left instrument panel.
a.
Unsnap the forward side of the instrument panel cover and slide forward enough to allow it to
move from its attachment slot. Remove the cover from over the panel.
b.
c.
d.
Remove the four self-locking nuts that secure the floating panel to its shock mounts. There is one
nut located on the panel at each side of the control wheel tube and one nut located at each side of the
panel near the top. With an open end wrench held next to the back side of the panel, hold the rubber
mounts to eliminate twisting as the nuts are being removed.
e.
f.
Unscrew the electrical connector from the post lights.
g.
h.
instrument ports.
i.
Remove the screws securing the instrument to the instrument panel and remove the instrument.
3-38. INSTALLATION OF ATTITUDE GYRO. (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P) (Refer
to Figure 3-12.)
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Connect the electrical connector to the post lights and tighten connector finger tight.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.

REVISED:
8/10/78
3-35
3-39. REMOVAL
GYRO
AND/OR
HORIZONTAL
OF DIRECTIONAL
SITUATION
INDICATOR. (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P)
a.
Unsnap the forward side of the instrument panel cover and slide forward enough to allow it to
move from its attachment slot. Remove the cover from over the panel.
b.
c.
d.
Remove the four self-locking nuts that secure the floating panel to its shock mounts. There is one
nut located on the panel at each side of the control wheel tube and one nut located at each side of the
panel, near the top. With an open end wrench held next to the back side of the panel, hold the rubber
mounts to eliminate twisting as the nuts are being removed.
e.
f.
Unscrew the electrical connector from the post lights.
g.
h.
Disconnect the vacuum line and relief line from the instrument. Identify hoses to facilitate
instrument ports.
i.
3-40.
INSTALLATION
OF DIRECTIONAL GYRO AND/OR HORIZONTAL
SITUATION
INDICATOR. (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P) (Refer to Figure 3-13.)
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Connect the electrical connector to the post lights and tighten connector finger tight.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
341. REMOVAL OF ALTITUDE HOLD UNIT. (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P)
The altitude hold unit on the early PA-31-310/325, PA-31-350 and all PA-31P model aircraft is
located behind the right instrument panel up near the firewall. On the later PA-31-310/325 and PA-31-350
model aircraft the unit is located on the upper right forward side of the bulkhead aft of the radio shelf. This
unit is secured to a mounting bracket with strap clamps which in turn is shock mounted to the existing
fuselage bracket and/or bulkhead.
a.
Access to the unit is from beneath the right instrument panel and/or by removing the access plate
on right side of the nose section at fuselage sta. 81 (PA-31-310/325) or fuselage sta. 57 (PA-31-350).
b.
c.
Disconnect the static hose by releasing the clamp and sliding the hose off the port. To prevent
contamination, place protective covers over the ends of the hose and the instrument port.
d.
e.
3-36

8/10/78
REVISED:
PIPER ALTIMATIC HIC SERVICE MANUAL
OF ALTITUDE HOLD UNIT. (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and

342. INSTALLATION
a.
(Early PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and all PA-31P model aircraft) Position the altitude
hold unit, with the static port pointing aft, on the mounting bracket located behind the right instrument
panel up near the firewall. Secure unit by tightening clamp screws to 5 l inch pounds.
b.
(Later PA-31-310, PA-31-325 and PA-31-350 model aircraft) Position the altitude hold unit, with
the static port pointing outboard, on the mounting bracket on the upper right forward side of the bulkhead
aft of the radio shelf. Secure unit by tightening clamp screws to 5 \ inch pounds.
Remove any caps which were placed over the ends of the hose and the instrument port.
c.
d. Connect the hose from the rate of climb indicator to the port marked static on the unit and
secure with clamps.
e.
f.
g.
Install access plate on right side of nose section and secure.
3-43. REMOVALOF RELAY BOX. (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P)
The relay is located on the existing brake support channel brace behind the left instrument
the left of the pilots control column.
a.
b.
c.
Remove the screws securing the relay box to the brake support channel brace.
d.
panel to
344. INSTALLATION OF RELAY BOX. (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P) (Refer to
Figure 3-14.)
a.
Position the relay box with electrical connection pointing forward on the brake support channel
brace, located behind the left instrument panel to the left of the pilots control column. Secure with
appropriate screws.
b.
c.
REMOVAL OF ROLL SERVO. (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P)

The roll servo is located in the lower section of the left wing between wing sta. 49.0 and sta. 58.5 aft
of the wheel well bulkhead.
a.
Remove the access plate from the bottom wing skin aft of the wheel well bulkhead by removing
345.
attaching screws.
b.
c.
Prior to removing the roll servo the center inspection plate in the aft bulkhead of the wheel well
and the access plate at wing sta. 67.50 must be removed to gain access to the bridle cable clamps.
d.
Paint the aileron balance cable where the bridle cable clamps are located and then remove the
e.
Remove the four bolts, washers and nuts securing the roll servo to the mounting brackets.
f.
Remove the roll servo from the airplane.
3-46. INSTALLATION OF ROLL SERVO. (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P) (Refer to
Figure 3-22.)
a.
b.
Wrap the bridle cable one-half turn each direction around the capstan from the bridle cable pin.
c.
guard.
.031

REVISED: 8/10/78
3-37
CLAMP
BRIOLE
CABLE
REDBALL
CAPSTAN
CABLE
GUARD
BRIDLE
CLAMP
CABLE
Figure 3-22. Roll Servo Installation, PA-31-310,

PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P
Position the roll servo on the mounting brackets and secure with the four bolts, washers and nuts
removed.
e.
ADJUSTED TO 352 POUNDS PRIOR TO ATTACHING THE BRIDLE CABLE CLAMPS. Ascertain
Attach
area on cable where clamp attaches is clean, dry and free of all lubricants and anti-corrosiveadditives.
the bridle cable to the aileron control cable. The bridle cable is drawn to the aileron control cable and attached
with clamps at the previously painted locations on the control cable. The end of the bridle cable with the
red ball extends to the inboard section of the wing. (Should the aileron cable not be painted, position the
control wheel in neutral and align the bridle cable pin installed in the capstan as shown in Figure 3-22.)
Adjust the bridle cable clamps so that the bridle cable tension (Y) is equal to the control cable tension
between the bridle cable clamps (X) 17 2 pounds without increasing the control cable tension from the
bridle cable clamps outward. At no time shall the bridle cable tension be greater than the control cable
tension between the clamps. Adjusting the bridle cable tension will lower the control cable tension between
the two bridle cabk clamps. Torque the bridle cable clamp bolts to 55 5 inch pounds.
f.
d.
previously
CAUTION
pin. To do this, turn on the master switch and with the roll
command knob centered place the roll engage rocker switch in the
ON position to engage the roll servo. Turn the control wheel
manually to the extreme left and right position to ascertain the
electrically by rotating the roll command knob to its extreme left
3-38

REVISED: 10/16/81
and right position. Examine the bridle cable to verify the clamps
and pin do not change position. The clutch will slip during these
operations.
g.
Install and secure the center inspection plate in the aft bulkhead of the wheel well, the access
plate at wing sta. 67.50, and the access plate aft of the wheel well bulkhead between wing sta. 49.0 and sta.
58.5.
347. REMOVAL OF PITCH SERVO. (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P)

The pitch servo is located aft of the rear baggage compartment on the center of the bulkhead at sta.
317.75.
(PA-31-310, PA-31-325 and PA-31-350) Remove the screws securing the aft panel in the rear
a.
baggage compartment and remove panel. Remove the access plate on the left side of the fuselage between
sta. 317.75 and sta. 332 by removing the screws securing the access plate to the fuselage.
(PA-31P only.) Remove the access plate on the left side of the fuselage between sta. 274 and sta.
b.
296 by turning the screw type fasteners to release the panel and remove the access plates on both the left
and right side of the fuselage between sta. 317.75 and sta. 332 by removing the screws securing the access
plates to the fuselage.
c.
d.
The bridle cable is attached to the bellerank. The end of the bridle cable with the turnbuckle is
attached to the lwer part of the bellerank.
e.
Loosen the bridle cable turnbuckle attached to the lower part of the bellerank to release the
bridle cable tension.
.
CABLE
GUARD
8 LBSal
EX1STINGACCESS OPENING
RT SlOE
CAPSTAN
FWD
BRIDLE
CABLE-
Figure 3-23. Pitch Servo Installation, PA-31-310,

PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P
REVISED:
8/10/78
3-39
f.
Remove the cotter pin and nut from both the upper and lower bolts in the bellerank to remove
the bridle cable.

g.
h.
Remove the four bolts, washers and nuts securing the pitch servo to the mounting bracket.
Remove the pitch servo from the airplane.
3-48. INSTALLATION OF PITCH SERVO. (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P) (Refer to
Figure 3-23.)
a.
b.
Wrap the end of the bridle cable terminating with a turnbuckle one and three-quarter turns
clockwise from the pin on the lower capstan grooves and the other end of the bridle cable one and
one-quarter turns counterclockwise from the pin on the upper capstan grooves.
l of an inch between the capstan and
c.
.03
guard.
d.
Position the pitch servo on the mounting bracket and secure with the bolts, washers and nuts
previously removed.
REFER TO FIGURE 3-9 AND CHECK THAT THE ELEVATOR CABLE TENSION (X)
e.
FORWARD OF THE BELLCRANK IS ADJUSTED TO2012 POUNDS PRIOR TO ATTACHING THE
BRIDLE CABLE TO THE BELLCRANK. Attach the bridle cable to the bellerank. The bridle cable is
drawn around pulleys and installed over both the upper and lower bolts in the bellerank. The end of the bridle
cable with the turnbuckle should be attached to the lower arm of the bellcrank. Secure bridle cable to bellerank
with nut and cotter pin previously removed. With the elevator controls in neutral POSITlON aline the bridle
cable pin installed in the capstan as shown in Figure 3-23. Adjut the turnbuckle until a deflection of 1 2 inch at
the midpoint between turnbuckle and bulkhead (sta. 317.75) will produce 8 lbs. + 1. (Pull on fish scale or
equivalent as shown in fig. 3-23.) Safety the bridle cable turnbuckle.
f.
g.
(PA-31-310, PA-31-325 and PA-31-350 only.) Install aft panel in rear baggage compartment and
h.
secure with appropriate screws and install the access plate on the left side of the fuselage between sta.
317.75 and sta. 332 and secure with appropriate screws.
(PA-31P only.) Install the access plate on the left side of the fuselage between sta. 274 and sta.
i.
296 and secure with screw type fasteners and install the access plates on both the left and right side of the
fuselage between sta. 317.75 and sta. 332 and secure with appropriate screws.
NOTE
With pitch servo installation completed, the elevator system must
be checked for frictional resistance. Depending on the airplane
being serviced, refer to either the PA-31, PA-31-350 or PA-31P
Airframe Service Manual for the test procedure.
REMOVAL OF RUDDER SERVO. (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P)

The rudder servo is located on mounting brackets aft of the rear baggage compartment between sta.
274 and sta. 296.
(PA-31-310, PA-31-325 and PA-31-350 only.) Remove the access plate on the right side of the
a.
fuselage between sta. 274 and sta. 296 by removing the screws securing the access plate to the fuselage.
b.
296 by turning the screw type fasteners to release the panel and remove the access plates on both the left
and right side of the fuselage between sta. 317.75 and sta. 332 by removing the screws securing the access
plates to the fuselage.
349.
3-40

REVISED:
8/10/78
iti lALL
Figure 3-24. Rudder Servo Installation, PA-31-310,

PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P
c.
Disconnect the electrical connection from the rudder servo.
d.
Paint the rudder balance cables where the bridle cable clamps are located and then remove the
Remove the four bolts, washers and nuts securing the rudder servo to the mounting brackets.
e.
f.
Remove the servo from the airplane.
3-50. INSTALLATION OF RUDDER SERVO. (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P) (Refer
to Figure 3-24.)
a.
b.
Wrap the bridle cable three-quarters of a turn in each direction around the capstan from the
bridle cable pin.
c.
guard.
d.
Position the rudder servo on the mounting brackets and secure with the bolts, washers and nuts
previously removed.
e.
ADJUSTED TO 25 2 POUNDS PRIOR TO ATTACHING THE BRIDLE CABLE CLAMPS. Ascertain the
area on the cable where the clamp attaches is clean, dry and free of all lubricants and anti-corrosive
additives. Attach the bridle cable to the rudder control cables. The bridle cable is drawn to the rudder
control cables and attached with clamps at the previously painted locations on the control cables. The end
of the bridle cable with the red ball attaches to the RIGHT control cable. (Should the rudder cables not be
painted, position the rudder in neutral and the bridle cable pin installed in the capstan as shown in Figure
3-24.) Adjust the bridle cable clamps, so that the bridle cable tension (Y) as shown in Figure 3-9 is 15 + 2
.031

REVISED:
8/10/78
3-41

0 pounds. Check the control cable tension forward of the bridle cable clamps and adjust, if necessary, to
obtain 25 2 pounds. If rudder cables require adjustment, it will be necessary to readjust the bridle cable
tension to 15 + 0 2 pounds. Torque the bridle cable clamp bolts to 55 5 inch pounds.
f.
g.
(PA-31-310, PA-31-325 and PA-31-350 only.) Install the access plate on the right side of the
h.
fuselage between sta. 274 and sta. 296 and secure with appropriate screws.
(PA-31P only.) Install the access plate on the left side of the fuselage between sta. 274 and sta.
i.
296 and secure with screw type fasteners and install the access plates on both the left and right side of the
fuselage between sta. 317.75 and 332 and secure with appropriate screws.
-
3-51. REMOVAL OF PITCH TRIM SERVO. (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P)
The pitch trim servo is located on the aft side of the fuselage bulkhead at sta. 317.75.
Remove the access plate on the right side of the fuselage between sta. 317.75 and sta. 332 by
a.
removing the screws securing the access plate to the fuselage.
(PA-31-310, PA-31-325 and PA-31-350 only.) Remove the access plate on the right side of the
b.
fuselage between sta. 274 and sta. 296, by removing the screws securing the access plate to the fuselage, to
gain access to turnbuckle to release trim cable tension.
(PA-31P only.) Remove the access plate on the right side of the fuselage between sta. 274 and
c.
sta. 296 by turning screw type fasteners to release the panel to gain access to turnbuckle to release trim
cable tension.
NOTE
d.
e.
f.
g.

Remove the four bolts, washers and nuts securing the trim servo to the mounting brackets.
Unwrap the trim cable from the capstan and idler pulleys.
Remove the trim servo from the airplane.
3-52. INSTALLATION OF PITCH TRIM SERVO. (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and

a.
Position the pitch trim servo on the mounting brackets and secure with the bolts, washers and
nuts previously removed.
b.
Route the trim cable from the forward part of the airplane around the bottom capstan groove
and around the forward idler pulley, continuing around the aft idler pulley then around the top capstan
groove to the aft section of the airplane.
c.
Tighten the trim cable to obtain 14 2 pounds cable tension.
d.
Connect the electrical connection to the trim servo.
e.
Check trim servo operation. (Refer to Section V.)
f. (PA-31-310, PA-31-325 and PA-31-350 only.) Install the access plate on the right side of the
fuselage between sta. 274 and sta. 296 and secure with appropriate screws.
(PA-31P only.) Install the access plate on the right side of the fuselage between sta. 274 and sta.
g.
296 and secure with screw type fasteners.
h.
Install the access plate on the right side of the fuselage between 317.75 and sta. 332 and secure
with appropriate screws.
3-42

8/10/78
REVISED:
GUARD
CABLE
-
PULLEY
\DLER
CAPSTAll
FORWARD
PULLEY
IDLER
Figure 3-25. Pitch Trim Servo Installation, PA-31-310,PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P
I
3-53. REMOVAL OF YAW DAMPER AMPLIFIER. (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P)
The yaw damper amplifier is shockmounted on a mounting bracket on the left side of the fuselage aft
of the rear baggage compartment.
(PA-31-310, PA-31-325 and PA-31-350 only.) Remove screws securing the aft panel in the rear
a.
baggage compartment and remove panel.
b.
296 by turning the screw type fasteners to release the access plate.
c.
Disconnect the electrical connection from the yaw damper amplifier.
d.
Remove the four screws, washers and nuts securing the yaw damper amplifier to the mounting
bracket.
e.
Disconnect the ground wire from the amplifier case by removing the attaching screw.
f.
Remove the yaw damper amplifier from the airplane.
3-54. INSTALLATION OF YAW DAMPER AMPLIFIER. (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and
a.
Position the yaw damper amplifier with shockmounts attached on the mounting bracket on the
left side of the fuselage aft of the rear baggage compartment and secure with appropriate screw, washers
and nuts.
b.
Connect the ground wire to the amplifier case and secure with appropriate screw.
c.
Connect the electricel connection to the amplifier.
d.
Check yaw damper amplifier operation. (Refer to Section V.)
(PA-31-310, PA-31-325 and PA-31-350 only.) Install aft panel in rear baggage compartment and
e.
secure with appropriate screws.
(PA-31P only.) Install access plate on the left side of the fuselage between sta. 274 and sta. 296
f.
and secure with screw type fasteners.

REVISED:
8/10/78
3-43
Figure 3-26. Yaw Damper Amplifier Installation,

PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P
3-55. REMOVAL OF GYRO SLAVING AMPLIFIER. (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P)
The gyro slaving amplifier is located beneath the center floor panel directly behind the main wing spar
at fuselage sta. 151.30.
Remove carpet from over the center floor panel directly behind the main spar.
a.
Remove screws securing center floor panel directly aft of main wing spar and remove panel.
b.
(PA-31P only.) Handle panel carefully to avoid damaging sealing gaskets.
c.
Disconnect the electrical connections from the amplifier.
Remove the screws securing the amplifier to the bulkhead.
d.
e.
3-56. INSTALLATION OF GYRO SLAVING AMPLIFIER. (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and

a.
With electrical connector facing inboard place the amplifier on the bulkhead at fuselage sta.
151.30 and secure with appropriate screws.
b.
Connect the electrical connections to the amplifier.
c.
(PA-31-310, PA-31-325 and PA-31-350 only.) Install center floor panel and secure with
d.
appropriate screws.
(PA-31P only.) Ascertain that floor panel sealing gaskets are clean and undamaged prior to
e.
installation of panel. Install center floor panel and tighten all screws evenly around panel to prevent cabin
pssure leaks.
f.
Install carpet and secure.
3-44

8/10/78
REVISED:

3-57. REMOVAL OF FLUX DETECTOR. (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P)
The flux detector is located in the left wing beneath the top access plate outboard of wing sta. 221.50,
a.
Remove the screws securing the access plate to the wing and remove access plate.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3-58. INSTALLATION OF FLUX DETECTOR. (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P) (Refer
to Figure 3-20.)
a.
b.
c.
d.
Install the top access plate in the left wing, outboard of wing sta. 221.50 and secure with
appropriate screws.
3-59. REMOVAL OF NAV CONVERTER (lC707). (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and'PA-31P)

The NAV converter is located on the left radio shelf aft of the forward baggage compartment.
a.
Access to the converter is through the forward baggage compartment door.
b.
Disconnect the electrical connection from the NAV converter.
c.
Remove the three screws and nuts securing the NAV converter to the radio shelf.
d.
Remove the NAV converter from the airplane.
3-60. INSTALLATION OF NAV CONVERTER (lC707). (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and
a.
With the electrical connection facing forward place the NAV converteron the left radio shelf aft
of the forward baggage compartment and secure with appropriate screws and nuts.
b.
Connect the electrical connection to the NAV converter.
c.
Check NAV converter operation. (Refer to Section V.)
3-61. REMOVAL OF CONSOLE. (PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32R-300, PA-32RT-300, PA-32RT-300T,
PA-32-301, PA-32-301T, PA-32R-301 and PA-32R-301T.)
a.
b.
c.
console.
d.
e.

3-62. INSTALLATION OF CONSOLE. (PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32R-300, PA-32RT-300, PA-32RTPA-32-301, PA-32-301T, PA-32R-301 and PA-32R-301T) (Refer to Figure 3-10.)
300T,
I
a.
b.
Connet the electrical harness plugs, CD-20 and CD-40, to the rear of the console.(Make sure spring
clip on CD-20 is secured.)
c.
d.
e.
3-63. REMOVAL OF AUTOPILOT AMPLIFIER. (PA-32-260, S/N 32-7500001 to 7700023; PA-32-300,
S/N 32-7540001 to 7840045 and PA-32R-300, S/N 32R-7680001 to 7780417)

REVISED: 11/30/79
3-45
PIPER ALTIMATIC
IIIC SERVICE MANUAL
NOTE
The Electronic Trim Amplifier for the AltiMatic IIICon the aircraft
listed above is located on a mounting bracket which is secured to the
top of the autopilot amplifier. Therefore, the Electronic Trim
Amplifier and Autopilot Amplifier is removed from the airplane as
one assembly.
The amplifier is located behind the right instrument panel, directly forward of the circuit breaker panel.
a.
Access to the amplifier is from beneath the right instrument panel.
Disconnect the electrical barness from the amplifier by removing the two knurled screws from the
b.
large amplifier connector and removing the connector from the amplifier.
c.
d.
e.
f.
To remove the electronic trim amplifier and mounting bracket from the autopilot amplifier, simply
remove screws and lockwashers securing the mounting bracket to the autopilot amplifier.
3-64. REMOVAL OF ELECTRONIC TRIM AMPLIFIER. (PA-32-260, S/N 32-7500001 to 7700023 and
PA-32-300, S/ N 32-7540001 to 7840045)
The electronic trim amplifier is located behind the right instrument panel directly forward of the circuit
breaker panel.
a.
Access to the amplifier is from beneath the right instrument panel.
b.
Remove the four screws securing the electronic trim amplifier to the mounting bracket and remove
c.
amplifier from mounting bracket.
3-65. INSTALLATION OF ELECTRONIC TRIM AMPLIFIER.(PA-32-260,

S/N 32-7500001 to7700023
32-7540001
PA-32-300,
and
S/ N
to 7840045) (Refer to Figure 3-11.)
a.
Place the mounting bracket with trim amplifier attached on the autopilot amplifier and secure with
b.
appropriate screws.
c.
3-66. INSTALLATION OF AUTOPILOT AMPLIFIER.(PA-32-260,
S/N 32-7500001 to7700023; PA-3232R-7680001
32-7540001
PA-32R-300,
S/N
to 7780417) (Refer to Figure 3-11.)
300, S/N
to 7840045 and
a.
With the large thirty pin receptacle pointing upward, place the amplifier on the mounting bracket
located behind the right instrument panel, directly forward of the circuit breaker panel and secure with
fasteners.
With the cable from the harness fanning to the left side of the airplane, connect the harness to the
b.
autopilot amplifier by securing with two screws previously removed from the receptacle.
c.
Connect the electrical connectors to the electonic trim amplifier.
d.
|3-67.
REMOVAL OF AUTOPILOT AMPLIFIER. (PA-32-260, S/N 32-7800001 and up; PA-32-300, S/N
32-7840046 and up; PA-32R-300, S/ N 32R-7780418 and up; PA-32RT-300, PA-32RT-300T, PA-32-301, PA32-301T, PA-32R-301 and PA-32R-30]T.)
NOTE
The Electronic Trim Amplifier and the Autopilot Amplifier for the
AltiMatic IIIC are not located together on the above models.
Therefore, the Electronic Trim Amplifier and Autopilot Amplifier
are not removed as one assembly.
3-46

REVISED: 11/30/79
PIPER ALTIMATIC
IIIC SERVICE MANUAL
The amplifier is located beneath the floor panel under the center set of seats.
Remove the center seats and floor panel directly behind the main spar by removing the seat belts and
a.
screws. Remove the floor panel from the airplane.
b.
Disconnect the electrical harness from the amplifier by removing the two knurled screws from the
c.
d.
3-68. INSTALLATION OF AUTOPILOT AMPLIFIER.(PA-32-260,
S/N 32-7800001and up; PA-32-300,
S/ N 32-7840046 and up; PA-32R-300, S/ N 32R-7780418 and up; PA-32RT-300, PA-32RT-300T, PA-32-30 1,
PA-32-301T, PA-32R-301 and PA-32R-301T) (Refer to Figure 3-11.)
With the large thirty pin receptacle pointing outward for the PA-32R-300, and inward for the other
a.
models, place the amplifier on the mounting bracket located beneath the floor panel under the center set of
seats and secure with fasteners,
Connect the harness to the autopilot amplifier by securing with two screws previously removed from
b.
receptacle.
c.
3-69. REMOVAL OF ELECTRONIC TRIM AMPLIFIER.

300, S/N 32-7840046 and up; PA-32R-300, PA-32RT-300,
32R-301 and PA-32R-301T)
(PA-32-260, S/N 32-7800001 and up; PA-32PA-32RT-300T, PA-32-301, PA-32-301T, PA-
The electronic trim amplifier is located aft of the rear baggage compartment mounted on the second
above the floor on the left side of the airplane.
a.
Access to the amplifier is through the rear baggage area.
b.
c.
Remove the four screws securing the amplifier to the mounting bracket and remove the amplifier
d.
from the airplane.
stringer
3-70. INSTALLATION OF ELECTRONIC TRIM AMPLIFIER.(PA-32-260,

S/N 32-7800001 and up; PA32-7840046
PA-32-301T, PAPA-32R-300,
PA-32RT-300,
PA-32-301,
32-300, S/ N
PA-32RT-300T,
and up;
32R-301 and PA-32R-301T) (Refer to Figure 3-11.)
Place the electronic trim amplifier on the bracket and secure with attaching screws.
a.
Connect the electrical connectors to the amplifier.
b.
c.
3-71. REMOVAL OF ATTITUDE GYRO.(PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32R-300, PA-32RT-300, PA-32RT300T, PA-32-301, PA-32-301T, PA-32R-301 and PA-32R-301T)
The attitude gyro is located in the left instrument panel.
Remove the face panel by removing the screws from around the perimeter of the panel.
a.
Disconnect the electrical connector from the instrument.
b.
Disconnect the vacuum line and the relief line from the instrument. Identify hose to facilitate
c.
reinstallation. To prevent contamination, place protective covers over the ends of the hoses and the instrument
ports.
d.
3-72. INSTALLATION OF ATTITUDE GYRO. (PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32R-300, PA-32RT-300, PA32RT-300T, PA-32-30I, PA-32-301T, PA-32R-301 and PA-32R-301T) (Refer to Figure 3-12.)
a.
b.
c.
Connect the electrical connector to the instrument.
d.
e.
Install face panel and secure with appropriate screws.
f.
REVISED: 11/30/79
3-47
PIPER ALTIMATIC
IIIC SERVICE MANUAL
3-73. REMOVAL OF DIRECTIONAL GYRO AND/OR HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR.

(PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32R-300, PA-32RT-300, PA-32RT-300T, PA-32-301, PA-32-301T, PA-32R-301
and PA-32R-301T)
The directional gyro is located in the left instrument panel.
a.
b.
c.
reinstallation. To prevent contamination, place protective covers over the ends of the hoses and the instrument
ports.
d.
3-74. INSTALLATION
GYRO AND/OR
OF DIRECTIONAL
HORIZONTAL
SITUATION
INDICATOR. (PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32R-300, PA-32RT-300, PA-32RT-300T, PA-32-301, PA-32301T, PA-32R-301 and PA-32R-301T) (Refer to Figure 3-13.)
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
3-75. REMOVAL OF ALTITUDE HOLD UNIT.(PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32R-300, PA-32RT-300, PA32RT-300T, PA-32-301, PA-32-301T, PA-32R-301 and PA-32R-301T)
The altitude hold unit is located behind the right instrument panel directly forward of the circuit breaker
panel. The unit is secured to a mounting bracket with strap clamps which in turn is shock mounted to the
airplane.
Access to the unit is from beneath the right instrument panel.
a.
Disconnect the electrical connector from the altitude hold unit.
b.
c.
contamination, place protective covers over the end of the hose and the instrument port.
d.
e.
3-76. INSTALLATION OF ALTITUDE HOLD UNIT. (PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32R-300, PA-32RT300, PA-32RT-300T, PA-32-301, PA-32-301T, PA-32R-301 and PA-32R-301T) (Refer to Figure 3-14 for
IC407 or Figure 3-33 for IC725)
a.
Position the altitude hold unit on the mounting bracket located behind the right instrument panel
directly forward of the circuit breaker panel. Position unit on bracket and secure by tightening clamp screws to
5 l inch pounds.
b.
c.
Connect the hose from the rate of climb indicator to the port marked static on the unit and secure
with clamp.
d.
e.
Connect the electrical connector to the unit.

3-77. REMOVAL OF RELAY BOX. (PA-32-260, S/N 32-7500001 to 7700023; PA-32-300, S/N 32-7540001
7840045 and PA-32R-300, S/ N 32R-7680001 to 7780417)
to
The relay box is located behind the right instrument panel just to the left of the circuit breaker panel.
Access to the relay box is from beneath the right instrument panel.
a.
b.
Disconnect the electrical connector from the relay box.
Remove the screws securing the relay box to the instrument panel.
c.
d.
3-48

REVISED:
11/30/79
PIPER ALTIMATIC
IIIC SERVICE MANUAL
3-78. INSTALLATION OF RELAY BOX. (PA-32-260, S/N 32-7500001 to 7700023; PA-32-300, SN 327540001 to 7840045 and PA-32R-300, S/N 32R-7680001 to 7780417) (Refer to Figure 3-14.)
Position the relay box on the back side of the right instrument panel just to the left of the circuit
a.
breaker panel and secure with appropriate screws.
Connect the electrical connector to the relay box.
b.
c.
3-79. REMOVAL OF RELAY BOX. (PA-32-260, S/N 32-7800001 and up; PA-32-300, S/N 32-7840046 and
up; PA-32R-300, S/N 32R-7780418 and up; PA-32RT-300, PA-32RT-300T, PA-32-301, PA-32-301T, PA32R-301 and PA-32R-301T)
The relay box is located behind the left instrument panel along the left side of the fuselage.
a.
b.
Remove the screws securing the relay box to its mount.
c.
Remove relay box from the airplane.
d.
3-80. INSTALLATION
OF RELAY BOX. (PA-32-260, S/N 32-7800001 and up; PA-32-300, S; N 327840046 and up; PA-32R-300, S/N 32R-7780418 and up; PA-32RT-300; PA-32RT-300T; PA-32-301; PA-32301T; PA-32R-30I and PA-32R-301T) (Refer to Figure 3-14.)
a.
Position the relay box behind the left instrument panel along the leftside of the fuselage and secure
b.
c.
3-81. REMOVAL OF ROLL SERVO. (PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32R-300, PA-32RT-300, PA-32RT390T, PA-32-301, PA-32-301T, PA-32R-301 and PA-32R-301T)
The roll servo is located beneath the floor panel under the center set of seats.
a.
screws. Remove the floor panel from the airplane.
b.
Disconnect the electrical connector from the servo.
c.
Paint the aileron balance cable where the bridle cable clamps are located and then remove the two
bridle cable clamps. (DO NOT paint the bridle cable end terminals as one terminal is painted red to facilitate
reinstallation.)
d.
e.
Remove the bolts, washers and nuts that secure the roll servo to the mounting bracket.
3-82. INSTALLATION
OF ROLL SERVO. (PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32R-300, PA-32RT-300, PA32RT-300T, PA-32-301, PA-32-301T, PA-32R-301 and PA-32R-301T) (Refer to Figure 3-27.)
a.
b.
Wrap the bridle cable one full turn each direction around the capstan from the bridle cable pin.
c.
Adjust the cable guards on the servo to provide a gap of.031 of an inch between the cable and guard.
d.
Position the servo on the mounting bracket located in the area beneath the floor aft of the main spar.
Secure the servo with the bolts, washers and nuts previously removed.
e.
REFER TO FIGURE 3-8 AND CHECK THAT THE CONTROL CABLE TENSION (z) IS
ADJUSTED TO 405 POUNDS, PRIOR TO ATTACHING THE BRIDLE CABLE CLAMPS. Ascertain
area on cable where clamp attaches is clean, dry and free of all lubricants and anti-corrosive additives. Attach
the bridle cable to the aileron balance cable. The bridle cable is drawn to the balance cable and attached with
clamps at the previously painted locations on the balance cable. The longest portion of the bridle cable, or the
end with the red ball, extends outboard toward the left side of the airplane. (Refer to Figure 3-27.) (Should the
balance cable not be painted, position the control wheelin neutral and align the bridle cable pin, installed in the
capstan, as shown in Figure 3-27.) Adjust the bridle cable clamps so the bridle cable tension (y) is equal to the

REVISED: 11/30/79
3-49

control cable tension between the bridle cable clamps (x) as shown in Figure 3-8, without increasing the control
cable tension from the bridle cable clamps outward. At no time shall the bridle cable tension be greater than the
control cable tension between the clamps. Adjusting the bridle cable tension will lower the control cable
tension between the two bridle cable clamps. Torque the bridle cable clamp bolts to 55 5 inch pounds,
Connect the electrical connector to the servo.
f.
CAUTION
pin. To do this, turn on the master switch and with the roll command
knob centered, place the roll engage rocker switch in the ON
position to engage the roll servo. Turn the control wheel manually to
the extreme left and right positions to ascertain the clamps and pin
do not change position. Next operate the servo electrically by
the roll command knob to its extreme left and right
rotating
position. Examine the bridle cable to verify the clamps and pin do
g.
Install the floor panel, seat belts and seat.
INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
3-50

REVISED:
11/30/79
BRIDLE CABLE PIN

RED BALL
BRIDLE CABLE
CLAMP
BRIDLE CABLE
CLAMP
CABLE
GUARDS
35
20 (PA-28RT)
PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32-301, PA-32-301T, PA-28RT-201 and PA-28RT-201T

BRIDLE CABLE
CABLE GUARD
CLAMP
RED BALL
BRIDLE CABLE PIN
BRIDLLE CABLE
CABLE GUARD
PA-32R-300, PA-32RT-300,
PA-32RT-300T,
FWD.
PA-32R-301 and PA-32R-30lT
Figure 3-27. Roll Servo Installation

REVISED: 11/30/79
3-51
PIPER ALTIMATIC
IIIC SERVICE MANUAL
3-83. REMOVAL OF PITCH SERVO. (PA-32-260 and PA-32-300, S/N 32-7540001 to 7840222)
The pitch servo is located beneath the floor panel under the center set of seats.
a.
screws.
b.
Paint the stabilator control cable where the bridle cable clamps are located and then remove the two
c.
reinstallation.)
d.
e.
Remove the four bolts, washers and nuts securing the pitch servo to the mounting bracket.
3-84. REMOVAL OF PITCH SERVO. (PA-32-300, S/N 32-7940001 and up; PA-32R-300, PA-32RT-300,
PA-32RT-300T, PA-32-301, PA-32-301T, PA-32R-301 and PA-32R-30IT)
The pitch servo is located aft of the rear baggage compartment on the lower fuselage.
Access to the servo is through the rear baggage area.
a.
Remove the attaching screws in aft panel of rear baggage compartment and remove panel.
b.
c.
d.
Remove the bolts, washers and nuts securing the servo to the mounting brackets and remove the
e.
3-85. INSTALLATION OF PITCH SERVO. (PA-32-260 and PA-32-300, S/N 32-7540001 to 7840222)
a.
Wrap the bridle cable one-half turn each direction around the capstan from the bridle cable pin.
b.
Adjust the cable guard on the servo to provide a gap of
c.
guard.
Position the pitch servo on the mounting bracket located in the area beneath the floor aft of the main
d.
spar and secure with bolts, washers and nuts previously removed.
.031
REFER TO FIGURE 3-9 AND CHECK THAT THE CONTROL CABLE TENSION (z) IS
e.
I ADJUSTED TO405 POUNDS PRIOR TO ATTACHING THE BRIDLE CABLE CLAMPS. Ascertain
area on cable where clamp attaches is clean, dry and free of all lubricants and anti-corrosive
additives. Attach
the bridle cable to the stabilator control cable. The bridle cable is drawn to the right stabilator control cable
and attach with clamps at the previously painted locations on the control cable. The longest portion of the
bridle cable or the end with the red ball extends aft. (Refer to Figure 3-28.) (Should the balance cable not be
painted, position the control wheel full forward and with the servo disengaged, position the capstan pulley so
that the bridle cable pin is aligned as shown in Figure 3-28.) Adjust the bridle cable clamps so the cable tension
(y) is equal to the control cable tension between the bridle cable clamps (x) without increasing the control
cable tension from the bridle cable clamps outward. At no time shall the bridle cable tension be greater than
the control cable tension between the clamps. Adjusting the bridle cable tension will lower the control cable
tension between the two bridle cable clamps. Torque the bridle cable clamp bolts to 55 5 inch pounds.
f.
3-52

REVISED:
11/30/79
PIPER ALTIMATIC
IIIC SERVICE MANUAL
CAUTION
electrically by rotating the pitch command disc full up and full
down. Examine the bridle cable to verify the clamps and pin do not
change position. The clutch will slip during these operations.
g.
Install the floor panel, seat belts and seats.
3-86. INSTALLATION OF PITCH SERVO. (PA-32-300, S/N 32-7940001 and up; PA-32R-300; PA-32RT300; PA-32RT-300T; PA-32-301; PA-32-301T; PA-32R-301 and PA-32R-301T) (Refer to Figure 3-28.)
Install bridle cable pin in capstan with the longest portion of the bridle cable or the end with the red
a.
terminal down and tighten bridle cable pin lock screw.
b.
Wrap the end of the bridle cable with the red terminal one-half turn counterclockwise from the
bridle cable pin on the upper capstan grooves and the other end of the bridle cable three-quarters
of a turn
clockwise from the bridle cable pin on the lower capstan grooves.
c.
guard.
Position the pitch servo on the mounting brackets located on the lower fuselage aft of the rear
d.
baggage area and secure with bolts, washers and nuts previously removed.
e.
ADJUSTED TO4015 POUNDS PRIOR TO ATTACHING THE BRIDLE CABLE CLAMPS. Ascertain
the bridle cable to the stabilator control cable. The bridle cable is drawn to the right stabilator control cable
and attached with clamps at the previously painted locations on the control cable. The longest portion of the
bridle cable or the end with the red ball extends aft. (Refer to Figure 3-28.) (Should the balance cable not be
that the bridle cable pin is aligned as shown in Figure 3-28.) Adjust the bridle cable clamps so the bridle cable
tension (Y) equals 15 + 0-5 lbs. tension between the bridle cable clamps (X) without increasing the control
cable tension from the bridle cable clamps outward. At no time shall the bridle cable tension be greater than
the control cable tension between the clamps. Adjusting the bridle cable tension will lower the control cable
tension between the two bridle cable clamps. Torque the bridle cable clamp bolts to 555 inch-pounds.
f.
.031
CAUTION
command disc centered, place the roll engage rocker switch and the
clamps and pin do not change position. Next, operate the servo
g.
Install aft panel in rear baggage compartment

REVISED: 10/16/81.
and secure with appropriate
screws.
3-53
30
O
BRIDLE CABLE
CLAMP
BRIDLE CABLE PIN
BRIDLE CABLE
CLAMP
CABLE GUARD
RED BALL
PA-32-260 and PA-32-300
oog
CABLE
BRIDCLLE
UP
t
AFT
BRIDLE CABLE PIN
ARLDES
G
PA-32R-300, PA-32RT-300,
PA-32R-301, PA-32R-301T,
PA-32RT-300T, PA-32-301, PA-32-301T,

PA-28RT-201, PA-28RT-201T and PA-44-180.
Figure 3-28. Pitch Servo Installation

3-54

REVISED: 11/30/79
PIPER ALTIMATIC
IIIC SERVICE MANUAL
3-87. REMOVAL OF PITCH TRIM SERVO. (PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32R-300, PA-32RT-300,

32RT-300T, PA-32-301, PA-32-301T, PA-32R-301 and PA-32R-301T.)
The pitch trim servo is located aft of the rear baggage area on the lower fuselage.
a.
b.
PA-
NOTE
installation of the trim servo, it is recommended that a service aid be
fabricated from shop material such as two bridle cable clamps and a
short length of cable or two blocks of wood pre-drilled with a bolt
and nut inserted to maintain cable routing.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Loosen trim cable turnbuckles to release cable tension.

Disconnect the electrical connector from the trim servo.
Remove the four mounting bolts securing the trim servo to-the mounting
bracket.
3-88, INSTALLATION OF PITCH TRIM SERVO. (PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32R-300, PA-32RT-300.

PA-32RT-300T, PA-32-301, PA-32-301T, PA-32R-301 and PA-32R-301T) (Refer to Figure 3-29.)
a.
b.
Position trim servo on mounting brackets and secure with mounting bolts.
Route the trim cable from the forward part of the airplane around the aft inboard idler pulley, then
around the bottom capstan groove and around the aft outboard idler pulley continuing around the forward
outboard idler pulley and around the top capstan groove to the forward inboard idler pulley, to the aft section
of the airplane.
c.
Tighten the trim cable to obtain
10 2 pounds cable tension.

Connect the electrical connector to the trim servo.
f.
PA-32-300. PA-32R-300.
3-89. REMOVAL
(PA-32-260,
AMPLIFlER.
OF GYRO SLAVING
PA-32RT-300 and PA-32RT-300T). The gyro slaving amplifier is located behind the left instrument panel on
a mounting bracket above the left rudder pedal.
a.
Access to the amplifier is from beneath the left instrument panel.
b.
Remove the screws securing the amplifier to the mounting bracket.
c.
d.
d.
e.
3-90. INSTALLATlON
(PA-32-260, PA-32-300. PA-32R-300.
OF GYRO SLAVING AMPLIFlER.
PA-32RT-300 and PA-32RT-300T) (Refer to Figure 3-19.)
a.
Position the amplifier on the mounting bracket located behind the left instrument panel and
secure with appropriate
screws.
b.
c.

ADDED: 10/ 16/81
3-55
PIPER ALTIMATIC
IIIC SERVICE MANUAL
3-91. REMOVAL OF FLUX DETECTOR. (PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32RT-300 and PA-32RT-300T).

The flux detector is located aft of the rear baggage area on a mounting bracket on the right side of the
fuselage.
a.
Access to the flux detector is through the rear baggage area.
Remove the access plate in lower right side of aft panel in the rear baggage area by turning the
b.
screw type fasteners to release the access plate.
c.
d.
e.
f.
3-92. INSTALLATlON OF FLUX DETECTOR. (PA-32-260, PA-32-300, PA-32R-300, PA-32RT-300 and
PA-32RT-300T) (Refer to Figure 3-20.)
a.
forward. and secure with original screws.
b.
c.
d.
Install access plate in lower right side of aft panel in the rear baggage area and turn screw type
fasteners to secure access plate.
3-93. REMOVAL OF NAV CONVERTER (lC707) (PA-32-260, PA-32-300. PA-32R-300, PA-32RT-300
and PA-32RT-300T)
The NAV Converter is located on a mounting tray under the left side of the instrument panel directlv
forward of the console.
a.
Access to the converter is from beneath the left instrument panel.
b.
Disconnect the electrical connection from the NAV Converter.
Remove the three screws and nuts securing the NAV Converter to the mounting tray.
c.
Remove the NAV Converter from the airplane.
d.
3-94. INSTALLATION
OF NAV CONVERTER
(IC707) (PA-32-260, PA-32-300. PA-32R-300.
PA-32RT-300 and PA-32RT-300T) (Refer to Figure 3-21.)
a.
Place the NAV Converter on the mounting tray behind the left instrument panel directly forward
of the console and secure with appropriate screws and nuts.
Connect the electrical connection to the NAV Converter.
b.
c.
Check NAV Converter operation. (Refer to Section V.)
3-56
REMOVAL
AND INSTALLATION
ADDED: 10/16/81
PIPER ALTIMATIC
PA-32-260,
PA-32-300,
PA-32R-300,
PA-32RT-300.
PA-32-301,
PA-32-301T, PA-32R-301
PA-32RT-300T,
PA-32R-301T
PA-28RT-201
IIIC SERVICE MANUAL
and PA-28RT-201T
and
Figure 3-29. Pitch Trim Servo Installation,

3-95. REMOVAL OF CONSOLE. (PA-34-200T)
The console is located in the lower left side of the instrument panel.
a.
b.
c.
console.
d.
e.
3-96. INSTALLATION OF CONSOLE. (PA-34-20T) (Refer to Figure 3-10.)

a.
b.
spring clip on CD-20 is secure.)
c.
d.
e.
3-97. REMOVAL OF AUTOPILOT AMPLIFIER. (PA-34200T)
The autopilot amplifier is located on the right side of the bulkhead aft of the main spar beneath the
floor panel under the right seat.
a.
Remove the center seats from the airplane.
b.
Remove the floor panel directly behind the main spar by removing the seat belts and screws.
Remove the floor panel from the airplane.
c.
d.
Unfasten the two fasteners that secure the amplifier to the mounting bracket and remove the
amplifier from the airplane.
REVISED: 11/30/79
3-57
3-58
LEFT LNK
REMOVAL
AND INSTALLATION
ADDED: 8/10/78

3-98. INSTALLATION OF AUTOPILOT AMPLIFIER. (PA-34-200T) (Refer to Figure 3-11.)
a.
With the large thirty pin receptacle pointing inboard, place the amplifier on the mounting bracket
located on the bulkhead aft of the main spar and secure with fasteners.
b.
With the cables from the harness fanning upward, connect the harness to the amplifier by
securing with the two screws previously removed from the receptacle.
c.
d.
3-99. REMOVAL OF ELECTRONIC TRIM AMPLIFIER. (PA-34-200T)
The electronic trim amplifier is located on a mounting bracket in the center of the fuselage beneath
the floor panel directly aft of the main spar.
a.
Remove the floor panel directly behind the main spar by removing the seat belts and screws.
b.
Remove the floor panel from the airplane.
c.
Disconnect the electrical connections from the amplifier.
d.
e.
3-100. INSTALLATION OF ELECTRONIC TRIM AMPLIFIER. (PA-34-200T) (Refer to Figure 3-11.)
a.
Place the electronic trim amplifier on the mounting bracket with the CD-16 connectors pointing
aft and secure with appropriate screws.
b.
Connect the electrical connections to the amplifier.
c.
d.
3-101. REMOVAL OF ATTITUDE GYRO. (PA-34-200T)
a.
b.
c.
instrument ports.
d.
3-102. INSTALLATION OF ATTITUDE GYRO. (PA-34-200T) (Refer to Figure 3-12.)

a.
Position the instrument i.n its proper panel cutout and secure with appropriate screws.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
3-103.
SITUATION
HORIZONTAL
REMOVAL
OF
AND/OR
DIRECTIONAL
GYRO
INDICATOR. (PA-34-200T)
a.
b.
c.
instrument ports.
d.

ADDED: 8/10/78
3-59
3-104.
INSTALLATION
HORIZONTAL
OF DIRECTIONAL GYRO AND/OR
SITUATION
INDICATOR. (PA-3+200T) (Refer to Figure 3-13.)
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
3-105. REMOVAL OF ALTITUDE HOLD UNIT. (PA-34-200T, Serial Nos. 34-7570001 to 34-7770185
incl., 34-7770187 to 34-7770263 incl.)
The altitude hold unit is located behind the left instrument panel directly forward of the console. The
unit is secured to a mounting bracket with strap clamps which in turn is shock mounted to the fuselage,
a.
Access to the unit is from beneath the left instrument panel.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3-106. INSTALLATION
HOLD UNIT. (PA-34-200T, Serial Nos. 34-7570001 to
OF ALTITUDE
34-7770185 incl., 34-7770187 to 34-7770263 incl.) (Refer to Figure 3-14.)
a.
Position the altitude hold unit on the mounting bracket located behind the left instrument panel
directly forward of the console. Position unit so static port is pointing inboard and tighten clamp screws to
5 1 inch-pounds.
b.
c.
Connect the hose from the rate of climb indicator to the port marked static on the unit and
secure with clamp.
d.
e.
3-107. REMOVAL OF ALTITUDE HOLD UNIT. (PA-34-206T, Serial Nos. 34-7770186, 34-7770264 and
up.)
The altitude hold unit is loacted behind the right instrument panel directly forward of the circuit
breaker panel. The unit is complete with its own mounting bracket and shock mounts which in turn are
secured to a frame mounted bracket.
a.
Access to the unit is from beneath the right instrument panel.
b.
c.
Disconnect the static hose be releasing the clamp and sliding the hose off the port. To prevent
d
e.
3-108. INSTALLATION
OF ALTITUDE
HOLD UNIT. (PA-34-200T, Serial Nos. 34-7770186,
34-7770264 and up.) (Refer to Figure 3-33.)
a.
Position the altitude hold unit on the mounting bracket located behind the right instrument
panel directly forward of the circuit breaker panel. Position the unit so the static port is pointing outward
and secure by tightening clamp screws to 5 l inch pounds.
b.
c.
Connect the hose from the rate of climb indicator to the port mark static on the unit and secure
with clamp.
3-60
REMOVAL
AND INSTALLATION
ADDED: 8/10/78

d.
e.

3-109. REMOVAL OF RELAY BOX. (PA-34-200T)

The relay box is located on a mounting bracket located behind the left instrument
a.
b.
Remove the screws securing the relay box to the mounting bracket.
c.
d.
panel directly
3-110. INSTALLATION OF RELAY BOX. (PA-34-200T) (Refer to Figure 3-14.)

a.
Position the relay box on the mounting bracket located behind the left instrument panel directly
forward of the console. With electrical connector pointing aft, secure relay box with appropriate screws.
b.
c.
3-111. REMOVAL OF ROLL SERVO. (PA-34-200T)

The roll servo is located beneath the floor panel under the center set of seats on the left side of the
fuselage.
a.
b.
Remove the floor panel directly behind the main spar by removing seat belts and screws securing
the panel. Remove the floor panel from the airplane.
c.
d.
Paint the aileron balance cable where the bridle cable clamps are located and then remove the
e.
f.

ADDED: 8/10/78
3-61
3-62
LEFT BLANK
REMOVAL
AND INSTALLATION
ADDED: 8/10/78
BRIDLE CABLE PIN

RED BALL
BRIDLE CABLE
CLAMP
BRIDLE CABLE
CLAMP
CABLE
30
GUARDS
Figure 3-30. Roll Servo Installation, PA-34-200T and PA-44-180
3-112. INSTALLATION OF ROLL SERVO. (PA-34-200T) (Refer to Figure 3-30.)

a.
b.
c.
.031
guard.
d. Position the servo on the mounting bracket located in the area beneath the floor aft of the main
spar. Secure the servo with the bolts, washers and nuts previously removed.
e.
REFER TO FIGURE 3-8 AND CHECK THAT CONTROL CABLE TENSION (Z) IS ADJUSTED
TO 40 + 5 O POUNDS PRIOR TO ATTACHING THE BRIDLE CABLE CLAMPS. Ascertain area on cable
where clamps attaches is clean, dry and free of all lubricants and anti-corrosive additives. Attach the bridle
cable to the aileron balance cable. The bridle cable is drawn to the balance cable and attached with clamps
at the previously painted locations on the balance cable. The longest portion of the bridle cable or the end
with the red ball extends outboard toward the left side of the airplane. (Refer to Figure 3-30.) (Should the
balance cable not be painted, position the control wheel in neutral and align the bridle cable pin, installed
in the capstan, as shown in Figure 3-30.) Adjust the bridle cable clamps so the bridle cable tension (Y) is
equal to the control cable tension +0
15% between the bridle cable clamps (X) as shown in Figure 3-8
without increasing the control cable tension from the bridle cable clamps outward. At no time shall the
bridle cable tension be greater than the control cable tension between the clamps. Adjusting the bridle cable
tension will lower the control cable tension between the two bridle cable clamps. Torque the bridle cable
clamp bolts to 55 5 inch-pounds.
f.
-

ADDED: 8/10/78
3-63
CAUTION
Check security of bridle cable clamps and the bridle cable pin. To
do this, turn on the master switch and with the roll command
knob centered place the roll engage rocker switch in the ON
position to engage the roll servo. Turn the control wheel manually
to the extreme left and right positions to ascertain the clamps and
pin do not change position. Next operate the servo electrically by
the roll command knob to its extreme left and right
rotating
position. Examine the bridle cable to verify the clamps and pin do
g.
3-113. REMOVALOF PITCH SERVO. (PA-34-200T)

The pitch servo is located beneath the floor panel under the center set of seats.
a.
Remove the floor panel directly behind the main spar by removing seat belts and screws securing
b.
the panel. Remove the floor panel from the airplane.
c.
Open access door in aft panel of rear baggage area and disconnect down springs.
d.
e.
Paint the stabilator control cable where the bridle cable clamps are located and then remove the
f.
Remove the four bolts and nuts that secure the pitch servo to the mounting bracket.
g.
3-114. INSTALLATION OF PITCH SERVO. (PA-34-200T) (Refer to Figure 3-31.)

a.
b.
Wrap the bridle cable one half turn each direction around the capstan from the bridle cable pin.
c.
Adjust the cable guard on the servo to provide a gap of
.031
guard.
d.
Position the pitch servo on the mounting bracket located in the area beneath the floor aft of the
main spar. Secure the servo with the bolts and nuts previously removed.
e.
ADJUSTED TO 40 + 5
0 POUNDS (WITH DOWN SPRINGS DISCONNECTED) PRIOR TO
ATTACHING THE BRIDLE CABLE CLAMPS. Ascertain area on cable where clamp attaches is clean, dry
and free of all lubricants and anti-conosive additives. Attach the bridle cable to the stabilator control cable.
The bridle cable is drawn to the right stabilator control cable and attached with clamps at the previously
painted locations on the control cable. The longest portion of the bridle cable or the end with the red ball
extends aft. (Refer to Figure 3-31.) (Should the balance cable not be painted, position the control wheel
full forward and with the servo disengaged, position the capstan pulley so that the bridle cable pin is aligned
as shown in Figure 3-31.) Adjust the bridle cable clamps so the bridle cable tension (Y) is equal to the
control cable tension +0
15% between the bridle cable clamps (X) as shown in Figure 3-9 without
increasing the control cable tension from the bridle cable clamps outward. At no time shall the bridle cable
-
3-64

ADDED: 8/10/78
'O
O
BRIDLE CABLE
CLAMP
BRIDLE CABLE PIN
BRIDLE CABLE
CLAMP
RED BALL
CABLE GUARD-
Figure 3-3 1. Pitch Servo Installation, PA-34-200T
tension be greater than the control cable tension between the clamps. Adjusting the bridle cable tension will
lower the control cable tension between the two bridle cable clamps. Torque the bridle cable clamp bolts to
55
_+
5 inch-pounds.
f.
g.
Connect down springs to control cables.
CAUTION
down. Examine the bridle cable to verify the clamps and pin do
h.
3-115. REMOVAL OF PITCH TRIM SERVO. (PA-34-200T)

The pitch trim servo is located aft of the rear baggage area on the lower fuselage.
a.
b.
Remove the access plate in lower right side of the aft panel in rear baggage area by turning the

ADDED: 8/10/78
3-65
Figure 3-32. Pitch Trim Servo Installation, PA-34-200T
NOTE
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.

Disconnect the electrical connection from the trim servo.
Remove the four bolts securing the trim servo to the mounting bracket.
3-1 16. INSTALLATION OF PITCH TRIM SERVO. (PA-34-200T) (Refer to Figure 3-32.)
a.
Position trim servo oh mounting brackets and secure with mounting bolts.
b.
Route the trim cable from the forward part of the airplane around the aft inboard idler pulley,
then around the bottom capstan groove and around the aft outboard idler pulley continuing around the
forward outboard idler pulley and around the top capstan groove to the forward inboard idler pulley, to the
aft section of the airplane.
c.
Tighten the trim cable to obtain 10 + 2 pounds cable tension.
d.
e.
f.
Install access plate in lower right side of aft panel in rear baggage area and turn screw type
3-66

ADDED: 8/10/78

3-117. REMOVAL OF GYRO SLAVING AMPLIFIER. (PA-34-20f)
The gyro slaving amplifier is located behind the left instrument panel on a mounting bracket above the
left rudder pedal.
Access to the amplifier is from beneath the left instrument panel.
a.
b.
c.
d.
3-118. INSTALLATION OF GYRO SLAVING AMPLIFR. (PA-34-200T) (Refer to Figure 3-19.)

a.
Position the amplifier on the mounting bracket located behind the left instrument panel and
secure with appropriate screws.
b.
c.
3-119. REMOVALOF FLUX DETECTOR. (PA-34-200T)
The flux detector is located aft of the rear baggage area on a mounting bracket on the right side of the
fuselage.
a.
Access to the flux detector is through the rear baggage area.
Remove the access plate in lower right side of aft panel in the rear baggage area by turning the
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
3-120. INSTALLATION OF FLUX DETECTOR. (PA-34200T) (Refer to Figure 3-20.)

a.
b.
c.
d.
Install access plate in lower right side of aft panel in the rear baggage area and turn screw type
3-121. REMOVAL OF NAV CONVERTER (lC707) (PA-34-200T)
The NAV Converter is located on a mounting tray under the left side of the instrument panel directly
Access to the converter is from beneath the left instrument panel.
a.
Disconnect the electrical connection from the NAV Converter.
b.
Remove the three screws and nuts securing the NAV Converter to the mounting tray.
c.
Remove the NAV Converter from the airplane.
d.
3-122. lNSTALLATION OF NAV CONVERTER (1C707). (PA-34-200T) (Refer to Figure 3-21.)
Place the NAV Converter on the mounting tray behind the left instrument panel directly forward
a.
of the console and secure with appropriate screws and nuts,
Connect the electrical connection to the NAV Converter.
b.
Check NAV Converter operation. (Refer to Section V.)
c.

ADDED:
10/16/81
3-67
3-123. REMOVAL OF CONSOLE. (PA-44-180)

The console is located in the lower left side of the instrument panel.
a.
b.
c.
console.
d.
e.
Remote the console from the airplane.
3-124. INSTALLATION OF CONSOLE. (PA-44-180) (Refer to Figure 3-10.)
a.
b.
spring clip on CD-20 is secure.)
c.
d.
e.
3-125. REMOVAL OF AUTOPILOT AMPLIFIER. (PA-44-180)
The autopilot amplifier is located on the forward side of the bulkhead at STA. 47.65 on the right side of
the airplane.
Release the latches on the nose cone and swing it down out of the way to gain access to the amplifier.
a.
b.
c.
Release the two fasteners that secure the amplifier to the mounting bracket and remove the amplifier
from the airplane.
3-126. INSTALLATION OF AUTOPILOT AMPLIFIER. (PA-44-180) (Refer to Figure 3-11.)
a.
With the large thirty pin receptacle pointing downward, place the amplifier on the mounting bracket
located on the right, forward side of the bulkhead at STA. 47.65 and secure with fasteners.
Connect the electrical harness to the amplifier by securing with the two screws previously removed
b.
from the receptacle.
c.
d.
Swing the nose cone back to its proper position and fasten latches.
3-127. REMOVAL OF ELECTRONIC TRIM AMPLIFIER. (PA-44-180)
The electronic trim amplifier is located on a mounting bracket approximately in the center and on the
forward side of the bulkhead at STA. 47.65.
Release the latches on the nose cone and swing it down out of the way to gain access to the trim
a.
amplifier.
Disconnect the electrical connectors from the amplifier.
b.
c.
d.
3-128. INSTALLATION OF ELECTRONIC TRIM AMPLIFIER. (PA-44-180) (Refer to Figure 3-11.)
a.
Place the electronic trim amplifier on the mounting bracket with the CD-16 connector pointing
outboard on the co-pilot's side and secure with appropriate screws.
b.
Connect the electrical connectors to the amplifier.
c.
d.
Swing the nose cone back to its proper position and fasten latches.
3-68
REMOVAL
AND INSTALLATION
ADDED: 8/10/78
PIPER ALTIMATIC
IIIC SERVICE MANUAL
3-129. REMOVAL OF ATTITUDE GYRO. (PA-44-180)

a.
b.
c.
Disconnect the vacuum line and the relief line from the instrument. Identify hoses to facilitate reinstallation. To prevent contamination, place protective covers over the ends of the hoses and the instrument
ports.
Remove the screws securing the attitude gyro to the instrument panel and remove gyro.
d.
3-130. INSTALLATION OF ATTITUDE GYRO. (PA-44-180) (Refer to Figure 3-12.)
a.
Remove any caps which were placed over the hoses and instrument ports.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
3-131. REMOVAL OF DIRECTIONAL GYRO AND|OR HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR.
(PA-44-180)
a.
b.
c.
Disconnect the vacuum line and the relief line from the instrument. Identify hoses to facilitate reinstallation. To prevent contamination, place protective covers over the ends of the hoses and the instrument
ports.
d.
3-132. INSTALLATION
SITUATION
HORIZONTAL
OF DIRECTIONAL
GYRO AND/OR
INDICATOR. (PA-44-180) (Refer to Figure 3-13.)
a.
b.
c.
Connect hoses to the proper ports of the instrument.
d.
e.
f.
Install the face panel and secure it with the appropriate screws.
3-133. REMOVAL OF ALTITUDE HOLD UNIT. (PA-44-180)
The altitude hold unit is located on the forward side of the bulkhead at STA. 47.65 approximately in the
center.
a.
Release the latches on the nose cone and swing it down out of the way to gain access to the altitude
hold unit.
Disconnect the electrical connector from the unit.
b.
Disconnect the static hose by releasing the clamp and sliding the hose off of the port. To prevent
c.
place protective covers over the end of the hose and the instrument port.
contamination,
d.
e.

ADDED: 8/10/78
3-69
PIPER ALTIMATIC
IIIC SERVICE MANUAL
Figure 3-33. Altitude Hold Unit Installlation (lC725)
3-134. INSTALLATION OF ALTITUDE HOLD UNIT. (PA-44-180) (Refer to Figure 3-33.)

Position the altitude hold unit on the shock mounts so the static port is pointing toward the center
a.
of the bulkhead and tighten clamp screws to 5 l inch-pounds.
b.
c.
with clamp.
d.
e.
f.
Swing nose cone back to its proper position and fasten the latches.
3-135. REMOVAL OF RELAY BOX. (PA-44-180)
The relay box is located on the forward side of the bulkhead at STA. 47.65 on the pilot's side of the
aircraft.
a.
Release the latches on the nose cone and swing it down out of the way to gain access to the relay box.
b.
c.
d.
3-136. INSTALLATION OF RELAY BOX. (PA-44-180) (Refer to Figure 3-34.)
Position the relay box on the mounting bracket located on the forward side of the bulkhead at
a.
STA. 47.65 on the pilot's side.
With the electrical connector pointing aft, secure relay box with appropriate screws.
b.
c.
d.
3-70
REMOVAL
AND INSTALLATION
ADDED: 8/10/78
PIPER ALTIMATIC
IIIC SERVICE MANUAL
Figure 3-34. Relay Box Installation

3-137. REMOVAL OF ROLL SERVO. (PA-44-180)
The roll servo is located beneath the back seat on the pilot's side of the aircraft.
Remove the third and fourth seats from the airplane.
a.
Remove the center floorboard aft of the main spar by removing seat belts and screws securing the
b.
panel. Remove the floor panel from the airplane.
Disconnect the electrical connector from the roll servo.
c.
d.
reinstallation.)
e.
f.
3-138. INSTALLATION OF ROLL SERVO. (PA-44-180) (Refer to Figure 3-30.)

a.
b.
c.
guard.
d.
Position the servo on the mounting bracket located in the area beneath the floor aft of the main
spar. Secure the servo with the bolts, washers and nuts previously removed.
e.
REFER TO FIGURE 3-7 AND CHECK THAT CONTROL CABLE TENSION (Z) IS
ADJUSTED TO 40 x 5 POUNDS PRIOR TO ATTACHING THE BRIDLE CABLE CLAMPS. Ascertain
area on cable where clamps attach is clean, dry and free of all lubricants and anti-corrosive additives. Attach
clamps at the previously painted locations on the balance cable. The longest portion of the bridle cable or the
end with the red ball extends outboard toward the left side of the airplane. (Refer to Figure 3-30.) (Should the
balance cable not be painted, position the control wheel in neutral and align the bridle cable pin, installed in the
capstan, as shown in Figure 3-30.) Adjust the bridle cable clamps so the bridle cable tension (Y) is equal to the
control cable tension between the bridle cable clamps (X) +0
as shown in Figure 3-8. This should be done
without increasing the control cable tension from the bridle cable clamps outward and without exceeding
25 +0
pounds of tension on the bridle cable. At no time shall the bridle cable tension be greater than the
control cable tension between the clamps. Adjusting the bridle cable tension will lower the control cable
tension between the two bridle cable clamps. Torque the bridle cable clamp bolts to 55 5 inch-pounds.
.031
-20%,
-5

REVISED: 11/30/79
3-71
PIPER ALTIMATIC
f.
IIIC SERVICE MANUAL
Connect the electrical
connector
to the servo.
CAUTION
Check security of bridle cable clamps and the bridle cable pin. To do
this, turn on the master switch and with the roll command knob
centered place the roll engage rocker switch in the ON position to
engage the roll servo. Turn the control wheel manually to the
extreme left and right positions to ascertain the clamps and pin do
not change position. Next, operate the servo electrically by rotating
the roll command knob to its extreme left and right position.
Examine the bridle cable to verify the clamps and pin do not change
position. The clutch will slip during these operations.
g.
3-139. REMOVAL OF PITCH SERVO. (PA-44-180)

The pitch servo is located in the aft section of the fuselage at STA. 247.125 and in the approximate center
of the aircraft.
Remove the round inspection plate on the right side of the fuselage at STA. 259.7.
a.
Remove the aft baggage partition at STA. 187.8.
b.
c.
The two piece plastic tail cone may also be removed for ease in removing the servo.
d.
e.
f.
3-140. INSTALLATION OF PITCH SERVO. (PA-44-180) (Refer to Figure 3-28.)
Install bridle cable pin in capstan with the longest portion of the bridle cable or the end with the red
a.
terminal down and tighten bridle cable pin lock screw.
b.
Wrap the end of the bridle cable with the red terminal one-half turn counterclockwise from the
bridle cable pin on the upper capstan grooves and the other end of the bridle cable three-quarters
of a turn
clockwise from the bridle cable pin on the lower capstan grooves.
c.
guard.
d.
e.
ADJUSTED TO 40 5 POUNDS PRIOR TO ATTACHING THE BRIDAL CABLE CLAMPS. Ascertain
the bridle cable to the stabilator control cables. The bridle cable is drawn to the stabilator control cables and
attached with clamps at the previously painted locations. The longest portion of the bridle cable or the end
with the red ball attaches to the upper stabilator control cable. (Refer to Figure 3-28.)(Should the balance
cable not be painted, position the control wheel full forward and with the servo disengaged, position the
capstan pulley so that the bridle cable pin is aligned as shown in Figure 3-28.) Adjust the bridle cable clamps
so that the bridle cable tension (Y) as shown in Figure 3-9 is 15 +0
pounds. Check the control cable tension
forward of the bridle cable clamps and adjust, if necessary, to obtain 40 5 pounds. If the control cables require
adjustment, it will be necessary to readjust the bridle cable tension to 15 +0
pounds. Torque the bridle cable
clamp bolts to 55 5 inch-pounds.
.031
-5
-5
3-72
REMOVAL
AND INSTALLATION
ADDED: 8/10/78
PIPER ALTIMATIC
IIIC SERVICE MANUAL
VIEWED
FROMBELOW
Figure 3-35. Pitch Trim Servo Installation, PA-44-180
f.

CAUTION
g.
Install aft panel in rear baggage compartment
and secure with appropriate
screws.
3-14l. REMOVAL OF PITCH TRIM SERVO. (PA-44-180)

The pitch trim servo is located directly aft of F.S. 156.00 on the lower fuselage.
a.
Remove the partition between the baggage compartment and aft section of the aircraft.
b.
NOTE
fabricated from shop material such as two bridle cable clamps and
a short length of cable or two blocks of wood pre-drilled with a
bolt and nut inserted to maintain cable routing.

ADDED: 8/10/78
3-73
PIPER ALTIMATIC
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
IIIC SERVICE MANUAL

Disconnect the electrical connector from the trim servo.
Remove the four bolts securing the trim servo to the mounting bracket.
3-142. INSTALLATION OF PITCH TRIM SERVO. (PA-44-180) (Refer to Figure 3-35.)

a.
b.
Route the trim cable from the forward part of the airplane around the aft inboard idler pulley, then
around the bottom capstan groove and around the aft outboard idler pulley continuing around the forward
outboard idler pulley and around the top capstan groove to the forward inboard idler pulley, to the aft section
of the airplane.
c.
Tighten the trim cable to obtain 10 l pounds cable tension.
d.
e.
Replace and secure the partition between the baggage compartment and aft section of the aircraft.
f.
3-143. REMOVAL OF CONSOLE. (PA-28RT-201 and PA-28RT-201T)
a.
b.
c.
console.
d.
e.
3-144. INSTALLATION OF CONSOLE. (PA-28RT-201 and PA-28RT-201T) (Refer to Figure 3-10.)

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3-145. REMOVAL OF AUTOPILOT
AMPLIFIER.
(PA-28RT-20l
and PA-28RT-201T)
NOTE
The Electronic Trim Amplifier for the AltiMatic IIIC is located on a
mounting bracket which is secured to the top of the autopilot
amplifier. Therefore, the Electronic Trim Amplifier and Autopilot
Amplifier are removed from the airplane as one assembly.
The amplifier is located in the aft section of the fuselage, behind the battery, just forward of Sta. 191.0.
Access to the amplifier may be gained by removing the aft baggage partition.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
To remove the electronic trim amplifier and mounting bracket from the autopilot amplifier, simply
remove screws and lockwashers securing the mounting bracket to the autopilot amplifier.
,
3-74
REMOVAL
AND INSTALLATION
REVISED: 11/30/79
PIPER ALTIMATIC
IIIC SERVICE MANUAL
3-146. REMOVAL OF ELECTRONIC TRIM AMPLIFIER. (PA-28RT-201 and PA-28RT-201T)

The electronic trim amplifier is located in the aft section of the fuselage, behind the battery, just forward
of STA. 191.0.
a.
Access to the amplifier may be gained by removing the aft baggage partition.
b.
Remove the four screws securing the electronic trim amplifier to the mounting bracket and remove
c.
amplifier from mounting bracket.
3-147. INSTALLATION OF ELECTRONIC TRIM AMPLIFIER. (PA-28RT-201 and PA-28RT-201T)
a.
b.
Place the mounting bracket with trim amplifier attached on the autopilot amplifier and secure with
appropriate
c.
screws.
Install autopilot amplifier as per the instructions
in the following paragraph.
3-148. INSTALLATION OF AUTOPILOT AMPLIFIER. (PA-28RT-201 and PA-28RT-201T) (Refer to

Figure 3-11.)
With the large thirty pin receptacle pointing outboard, place the amplifier on the mounting bracket
a.
located in the aft section of the fuselage behind the battery, just forward of STA. 191.0 and secure with
fasteners.
Connect the harness to the autopilot amplifier by securing with the two screws previously removed
b.
from the receptacle.
c.
d.
3-149. REMOVAL OF ATTITUDE GYRO. (PA-28RT-20l and PA-28RT-20IT)
a.
Disconnect the electrical connector from the instrument,
b.
c.
reinstallation.
To prevent contamination, place protective covers over the ends of the hoses and the instrument
ports.
3-150. INSTALLATION OF ATTITUDE GYRO. (PA-28RT-201 and PA-28RT-201T) (Refer to Figure
3-12.)
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
3-151. REMOVAL OF DIRECTIONAL GYRO AND/OR HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR.
(PA-28RT-20I and PA-28RT-201T)
The directional gyro is located in the left instrument panel.
a.
b.
c.
reinstallation.
To prevent contamination, place protective covers over the ends of the hoses and the instrument
ports.
d.

REVISED: 11/30/79
3-75
PIPER ALTIMATIC
IIIC SERVICE MANUAL
3-152. INSTALLATION
OF DIRECTIONAL
GYRO AND/OR
HORIZONTAL
SITUATION
INDICATOR. (PA-28RT-201 and PA-28RT-201T) (Refer to Figure 3-13.)
Position the instrument in its proper panel cut out and secure with appropriate screws.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
3-153. REMOVAL OF ALTITUDE HOLD UNIT (PA-28RT-201 and PA-28RT-201T)
The altitude hold unit is located in the aft section of the fuselage, behind the battery, just forward of STA.
191.0. The unit is complete with its own mounting bracket and shock mounts which in turn are secured to a
frame mounted bracket.
Access may be gained to the unit by removing the aft baggage partition.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3-154. INSTALLATION
OF ALTITUDE HOLD UNIT. (PA-28RT-201 and PA-28RT-201T) (Refer to
Figure 3-33.)
Position the altitude hold unit on the mounting bracket located in the aft section of the fuselage just
a.
forward of STA. 191.0.Position unit so static port is pointing aft and secure by tightening clamp screws to 5 i l
inch pounds.
b.
c.
with clamp.
d.
e.
3-155. REMOVAL OF RELAY BOX. (PA-28RT-201 and PA-28RT-201T)
The relay box is attached to a mounting bracket located behind the right instrument panel along the right
side of the fuselage.
Access to the relay box is from beneath the right instrument panel.
a.
b.
c.
d.
3-156. INSTALLATION OF RELAY BOX. (PA-28RT-201 and PA-28RT-201T) (Refer to Figure 3-34.)
Position the relay box on the bracket located behind the right instrument panel along the right side
a.
of the fuselage and secure with appropriate screws.
b.
c.
3-157. REMOVAL OF ROLL SERVO. (PA-28RT-201 and PA-28RT-201T)
The roll servo is located beneath the back seat on the pilot's side of the aircraft.
a.
Remove the third and fourth seats and center floor panel to gain access to this area.
b.
c.
reinstallation.)
d.
e.
3-76
REMOVAL
AND INSTALLATION
REVISED: 11/30/79
PIPER ALTIMATIC
IIIC SERVICE MANUAL
31-158. INSTALLATION OF ROLL SERVO. (PA-28RT-201 and PA-28RT-201T) (Refer to Figure 3-27.)
a.
b.
c.
Adjust the cable guards on the servo to provide a gap of.031 of an inch between the cable and guard.
d.
Position the servo on the mounting bracket located in the area beneath the floor aft of the main spar.
Secure the servo with the bolts, washers and nuts previously removed.
e.
ADJUSTED TO 40 5 POUNDS, PRIOR TO ATTACHING THE BRIDLE CABLE CLAMPS. Ascertain
clamps at the previously painted locations on the balance cable. The longest portion of the bridle cable, or the
end with the red ball, extends outboard toward the left side of the airplane.(Refer to Figure 3-27.) (Should the
balance cable not be painted, position the control wheelin neutral and align the bridle cable pin, installed in the
capstan, as shown in Figure 3-27.) Adjust the bridle cable clamps so the bridle cable tension (Y) is equal to 25 +
0 5 pounds. Recheck the control cable tension from the bridle cable clamps outward and adjust, if necessary,
If aileron cables require adjustment, it may be necessary to readjust the bridle cable tension. Torque the bridle
cable clamp bolts to 55 5 inch pounds.
f.
-
CAUTION
pin. To do this, turn on the master swich and with the roll command
knob centered place the roll engage rocker switch in the ON position
to engage the roll servo. Turn the control wheel manually to the
extreme left and right positions to ascertain the clamps and pin do
not change position. Next operate the servo electrically by rotating
the roll command knob to its extreme left and right position.
Examine the bridle cable to verify the clamps and pin do not change
position. The clutch will slip during these operations.
g.
3-159. REMOVAL OF PITCH SERVO. (PA-28RT-20l and PA-28RT-20lT)

The pitch servo is located in the aft section of the fuselage behind STA. 247.125 in the approximate center
of the aircraft.
a.
To gain access to this area remove the aft baggage partition and the round inspection plates on both
sides of the fuselage at STA 259.7.
b.
c.
d.
3-160. INSTALLATION OF PITCH SERVO. (PA-28RT-201 and PA-28RT-201T) (Refer to Figure 3-28.)
a.
Install bridle cable pin in capstan with the longest portion of the bridle cable down and tighten bridle
cable pin lock screw.
b.
Wrap the long end of the bridle cable one-half turn counterclockwise from the bridle cable pin on the
upper capstan grooves and the other end of the bridle cable three-quarters of a turn clockwise from the bridle
cable pin on the lower capstan grooves,
c.
guard.
.031

ADDED: 11/30/79
3-77
PIPER ALTIMATIC
IIIC SERVICE MANUAL
d.
e.
ADJUSTED TO40 t5 POUNDS PRIOR TO ATTACHING THE BRIDLE CABLE CLAMPS. Ascertain
area on cable where clamp attaches is clean, dry and free of all tubricantsand anti-corrosive additives. Attach
the bridle cable to the stabilator control cables. The bridle cable is drawn to the stabilator control cables and
attached with clamps at the previously painted locations. The longest portion of the bridle cable or the end
with the red ball attaches to the upper stabilator. (Refer to Figure 3-28.) (Should the balance cable not be
that the bridle cable pin is aligned as shown in Figure 3-28.) Adjust the bridle cable clamps so that the bridle
cable tension (Y) as shown in Figure 3-9 is 15 + 0 5 pounds. Check the control cable tension forward of the
bridle cable clamps and adjust if necessary to obtain 40 t 5 pounds. If the control cables require adjustment, it
will be necessary to readjust the bridle cable tension to 15 + 0 5 pounds. Torque the bridle cable clamps bolts
to 55 t 5 inch-pounds.
f.
-
CAUTION
pin. To do this, turn on the master switch and with the pitch command disc centered place the roll engage rocker switch and the
Install the aft panel in rear baggage compartment
g.
appropriate screws.
and the round inspection plates and secure with
3-161. REMOVAL OF PITCH TRIM SERVO. (PA-28RT-201 and PA-28RT-201T)

The pitch trim servo is located directly aft of STA. 156.00 on the lower fuselage.
a.
Remove the partition between the baggage compartment and aft section of the aircraft.
b.
NOTE
fabricated from shop material such as two bridle cable clamps and a
short length of cable or two blocks of wood pre-drilled with a bolt
and nut inserted to maintain cable routing.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
3-78

Remove the four mounting bolts securing the trim servo to the mounting bracket.
REMOVAL
AND INSTALLATION
ADDED: 11/30/79
PIPER ALTIMATIC
3-162. INSTALLATION
3-29.)
OF PITCH TRIM SERVO.(PA-28RT-201
IIIC SERVICE MANUAL
and PA-28RT-201T) (Refer to Figure
Route the trim cable from the forward part of the airplane around the bottom capstan groove to the
forward idler pulley and around it, continue around the aft idler pulley and then around the top capstan groove
to the aft section of the airplane.
c.
Tighten the trim cable to obtain 10 t i pounds cable tension.
Connect the electrical connector to the trim servo.
d.
e.
f.
a.
b.
3-163. REMOVAL OF NAV FLAG ADAPTER. (PA-23-250 Six Place, S/N 27-7554001, 7554074 to
7754127; PA-31, S/ N 31-7512023 to 7712064; PA-31-350, S/ N 31-7552054 to 7752100, 31-7752102 to 7752113
and PA-31P, S/N 31P-7630014 to 7730012)
The NAV Flag Adapter is located behind the left instrument panel, mounted on the left outboard fuselage
nose channel for the PA-23-250 (six place) and on the radio support bracket for the PA-31-310;
and
PA-31P.
-350
-325;
NOTE
The NAV Flag Adapter is used only in certain NSD-360 Compass
systems that do not use the Edo-Aire Mitchell AK-423, IC707 or
I C707-1 VOR/ Localizer converters. Compass systems using the
above converters do not require the NAV Flag Adapter.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Access to the NAV Flag Adapter is from beneath the instrument panel.
Disconnect the electrical connector from the NAV Flag Adapter.
Remove the screws securing the NAV Flag Adapter to its mounting location.
Remove the NAV Flag Adapter from the airplane.
3-164. INSTALLATION OF NAV FLAG ADAPTER. (PA-23-250 Six Place, S/N 27-7554001, 7554074 to
7754127; PA-31, S/ N 31-7512023 to 7712064; PA-31-350, S/ N 31-7552054to 7752100, 31-7752102to 7752113
and PA-31P, S/N 31P-7630014 to 7730012) (Refer to Figure 3-36.)
a.
Position the NAV Flag Adapter at its mounting location behind the instrument panel and secure
Connect the electrical connector to the NAV Flaa Adaoter.
b.
Remove the screws securing the NAV Flag Adapter to the nose channel and or support bracket.
c.
3-165. REMOVAL OF NAV FLAG ADAPTER. (PA-32-260, S/N 32-7600001 to 7700017; PA-32-300,
SN 32-7640001 to 7740075; PA-32R-300, S/N 32R-7680001 to 7780350 and PA-34-200T, S/ N 34-7670001 to
7770261)
The NAV Flag Adapter is located behind the right instrument panel on the firewall mounted on the
existing hat.
NOTE
The NAV Flag Adapter is used only in certain NSD-360 Compass
systems that do not use the Edo-Aire Mitchell AK-423, IC707 or
IC707-1 VOR/Localizer converters. Compass systems using the
above converters do not require NAV Flag Adapter.

ADDED: 11/30/79
3-79
PIPER ALTIMATC IIIC SERVICE MANUAL
Figure 3-36. NAV Flag Adapter Installation

a.
b.
c.
d.
Access to the NAV Flag Adapter is from beneath the instrument panel.
Disconnect the electrical connector from the NAV Flag Adapter.
Remove the screws securing the NAV Flag Adapter to its mounting location.
Remove the NAV Flag Adapter from the airplane.
3-166. INSTALLATION OF NAV FLAG ADAPTER.(PA-32-260,

S/ N 32-7600001 to7700017; PA-32-300,
32-764000
32R-7680001
PA-32R-300,
to7780350 and PA-34-200T, S/ N 34-7670001to
I to 7740075;
S/ N
S/ N
(Refer
3-36.)
to
Figure
7770261)
a.
Position the NAV Flag Adapter at its mounting location on the firewall and secure with appropriate
screws.
Connect the electrical connector to the NAV Flag Adapter.
b.
Check operation of the NAV Flag Adapter (Refer to Section V.)
c.
3-167. REMOVAL OF KA-52 AUTOPILOT ADAPTER.
The KA-52 autopilot adapter is located on a mounting bracket behind the left instrument
panel.
NOTE
The only installation incorporating the KA-52 autopilot adapter is
the King KC5-55 Compass System. The EDO-AIRE Mitchell
Compass System does not require the KA-52 autopilot adapter.
a.
b.
c.
d.
3-80
Access to the KA-52 autopilot adapter is from beneath the instrument panel.
Disconnect the electrical connector from the KA-52 adapter.
Remove the screws securing the KA-52 adapter to the mounting bracket.
Remove the KA-52 adapter from the airplane.
REMOVAL
AND INSTALLATION
ADDED: 11/30/79
PIPER ALTIMATIC
IIIC SERVICE MANUAL
HEADING ADJUSTMENT
POTENTIOMETER
COURSE
ADJUSTMENT
POTENTIOMETER
Figure 3-37. KA-52 Autopilot Adapter Installation

3-168. INSTALLATION OF KA-52 AUTOPILOT ADAPTER. (Refer to Figure 3-37.)
Position the KA-52 adapter on the mounting bracket located behind the instrument panel and
a.
with
appropriate screws.
secure
Connect the electrical connector to the KA-52 adapter.
b.
Check operation of KA-52 adapter. (Refer to Section V.)
c.

ADDED: 11/30/79
3-81
SECTION
IV
TESTEQUIPMENT
Page
Paragraph
4-1.
4-2.
4-3.
4-4.
4-5.
4-6.
4-7.
4-8.
Introduction
Test Equipment Requirements.
PiperP/N753439(66D141)
66Dl41-lGyroSubstitute
66D141-2PowerSection
66DI41-3ConsoleSubstitute
AutoPilot Test Kit,

4-1
4-1
4-1
4-2
4-4
4-4
....................................
......................................
.......................................
.....................................
66D141-4RadioCouplerTester
66D141TestKitandCables......................................
...................................
Troubleshooting
.........4-4
......................;............
Checking Servo Motor Current Drain (No Load)
ISSUED: 11/25/74
4-7
iv-i
SECTION IV
TEST EQUIPMENT
4-1. INTRODUCTION
TEST EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS. AUTOPILOT TEST KIT, PIPER P/N 753
439 (66DI41).
a.
The 66D141 Test Kit is designed to facilitate testing the AltiMatic IIIC Autopilot System on a
substitution basis. Provisions are made to substitute into an operating system any major component except
the amplifier. Each piece of test equipment can be used for various tests, not limited to what is given in this
description.
b.
The Test Kit consists of four major sections plus necessary connecting cables. These sections are
listed as follows:
1. 66D l41-1 Directional and Attitude Gyro Substitute.
66Dl41-2 Power Section.
2.
664141-3 Console Substitute.
3.
66D141-4 Radio Coupler Tester.
4.
-
4-2. 66D141-1 GYRO SUBSTITUTE. (Refer to Figure 4-1.)

With this section, both the directional gyro and the artificial horizon can be replaced
a.
(simultaneously) with substitute signal sources. The directional gyro signal is variable in steps to provide
outputs corresponding to 0, 10 and 45 degrees left and right. The zero position is used to provide an
accurate zero signal so that the roll centering adjustment can be accurately set or checked for range of
control. The 10 outputs are used to check the heading sensitivity of the amplifier command channel and,
by means of comparison, to determine whether or not the directional gyro in question provides a signal
usable for operation with the system. The 45 outputs are provided for the purpose of checking radio
coupler intercept angles and can be used to simulate the course selector of the directional gyro being moved
to a new heading.
A large vernier knob, marked attitude gyro with a dual scale marked roll degrees and pitch
degrees, is provided to give a measurement in degrees of deviation from straight and level flight in the roll or
pitch mode of operation.
4-3. 66DI41-2 POWER SECTION. (Refer to Figure 4-2.)
a.
With this equipment, amplifier output and servo performance can be observed. Two connectors
are provided so the cable to either servo can be intercepted. A pilot light is provided to indicate the
presence of solenoid voltage. A voltmeter is provided to monitor the signal actually being applied to the
servo motor. A five position selector switch is provided to select various modes of servo operation. These
are: Two positions on the left side marked "BAT," which will allow the operator to apply a full signal
directly to the servo motor to check operation in either direction. Two positions on the right side marked
"AMPL." One is marked "RES." and serves to apply a resistive load to the amplifier in the event the servo
motor is not available to the technician. The other position in this mode is marked "MTR.," and measures
the signal being applied to the servo motor.
TEST EQUIPMENT
ISSUED: 11/25/74
4-1
CD 8
O
Ooo
oo
CD-33
SOLENOID
SERVO
AMPLIFIER
PH
DG
GYRO SUBSTITUTE
28V
660141-1
Figure 4-1. Gyro Substitute
SELECTOR
POWERSECTION
INPUT
VOLTAGE
66D141.2
Figure 4-2. Power Section
4-4. 66D141-3 CONSOLE SUBSTITUTE.(Refer to Figure 4-3.)

a.
Electrically, this console is interchangeable with the standard autopilot console for test purposes.
Using the substitute console, it is possible to determine rapidly if the combination of signal sources and
amplifier can be brought within usable limits by means of the adjustments provided on the standard
console. Also, it serves as a substitute to aid in determining whether or not the installed console or altitude
selector is defective.
b.
An OFF-ON power switch and 4 two-positionslide switches are provided. These are:
1. Selector switch for autopilot operating voltage.
2.
Directional gyro or manual selector switch corresponding to the roll and HDG push button
switches on the console.
3.
Altitude control or manual selector switch corresponding to the pitch and altitude push
button switches on the console.
4.
Minimum and maximum limit selector switch, equivalent to Min. (Full CCW) and Max. (Full
CW) positions of limit potentiometers on the console.
c.
There are five adjustments provided. These are:
1. Roll manual knob corresponding to the roll manual control on the console.
2.
Pitch manual knob corresponding to the pitch manual control on the console.
3.
Roll trim knob corresponding to the roll centering adjustment potentiometer
on the
console.
4.
Pitch trim knob corresponding
to the pitch centering adjustment
potentiometer
on the
console.
5.
Altitude control knob simulating the altitude hold on the console.
The connector from the console is plugged into the CD-20 receptacle.
replaces the altitude hold for bench or in-airplane tests.
d.
4-2
The CD-10 receptacle
TEST EQUIPMENT
ISSUED: 11/25/74
o
/
z
O
Figure 4-3. Console Substitute

TEST EQUIPMENT
ISSUED: 11/25/74
4-3

4-5. 66Dl41-4 RADIO COUPLER TESTER. (Refer to Figure 4-4.)
a.
The coupler tester contains a simulated radio signal source and intercepts the coupler output to
provide direct monitoring of coupler performance. When used with the directional gyro signal source
described in paragraph 4-2, and with an autopilot amplifier as a source of power, a complete static testing
of coupler performance is possible. The radio coupler tester consists of the following functions:
1. Output meter to measure the output of the radio coupler.
2.
Simulated OMNI meter to simulate an OMNI signal applied to the system or to measure the
actual OMNI output signal from the airplane radio.
3.
Three connectors, two of which are to intercept the lead from the amplifier to the Radio
Coupler (CD-33) and the third (CD-34) to either apply a simulated radio signal or check the actual signal
from the OBI to the Radio Coupler.
4.
Radio signal substitute knob which corresponds to the OBS on the OBI.
5.
A two position slide switch to select a corresponding autopilot operating voltage.
6.
A MIC key push button corresponding to the MIC key in the airplane.
7.
A push to null button is not used with the III Series Autopilots.
8. Two DC input connectors for power to operate the MIC Rey portion of the tester and to
supply power for the face plate lights of the coupler.
NOTE
The radio signal substitute portion of the tester has an internal
power supply consisting of one 9V battery. When full deflection
of the simulated OMNI signal can not be obtained under load,
replace battery.
CAUTION
Do not attempt to troubleshoot a IC-388-2 radio coupler thru

by-passing it. By connecting the A/ P harness connector directly
CD-33 plug, the computer/amplifier
into the NSD-360/360A
oscillator will probably burn out. (A 1C-388 coupler may be
by-passed directly to a 52D54 D.G. with "bug," but the same
procedure will not work with an NSD.)
4-6. 66D141 TEST KIT AND CABLES.
a.
Shown in Figure 4-5 is a block diagram of the complete test kit instruments and cable storage
area. Each test kit has a serial number. Make sure the equipment in the kit has the correct serial number.
When referring to the factory for service or calibration of any instrument, give serial number of the
equipment.
The 66D I41 Test Kit contains a set of test cables. They are marked with the number which
b.
corresponds with either the test equipment or the piece being tested. Refer to Section VI for Wiring
Diagrams of the AltiMatic IIIC Autopilot System.
4-7. TROUBLESHOOTING.
By determining in advance from symptoms described by the pilot, the serviceman may decide
a.
which section of the autopilot may be causing the trouble and isolate the defective unit rapidly by a logical
substitution method. Refer to Table IV-I before attempting to troubleshoot the Autopilot System. Isolate
the trouble into one of three groups. The first group corresponds to the inputs of the autopilot listed under
the term input in the trouble isolation diagram. It is recommended that the technician, by use of the
appropriate test equipment, reproduce the input signals of the forward group and observe the autopilot
responds either correctly or incorrectly. The reason for this is that this group is the easiest group to work
TEST EQUIPMENT
REVISED:
8/10/78
on. If, with the correct inputs, the autopilot still does not respond correctly (by noting the servo motor
of the airplane control system) the component called out in the middle group should be removed,
set up and monitored on the bench as outlined in Section V. If all inputs are correct and the components of
the middle group are functioning properly, only then should the airplane control system, as given in the
output group, be referred to for troubleshooting. Refer to Section III for proper cable tension and bridle
cable installation.
For proper cable tensions and correct bridle cable positioning, refer to the appropriate paragraph
b.
in Section III for the unit and airplane being serviced.
The Clutch Adjustment Procedure is not authorized in the field at this time on copper/carbon
c.
rotation
OU
UT
AMPLIFIER
COUPLER
RADIO
DC
INPUT
28 Y
RADIOSIGNAL
SUBSTITUTE
PUSH
'a
MIT
BELL
RADIO
COUPLER
% RADIO
SIGNAL
TO NULL
PUSH
MIC KEY
PUSH OFF
COUPLER TESTER
66D141-4
Figure 4-4. Radio Coupler Tester

TEST EQUIPMENT
REVISED:
8/10/78
4-5
POWER
SECTION
RADIO COUPLER TESTER
66D141-4
660141.2
CABLE
STORAGE
POCKET
GYRO
SUBSTITUTE
66D141.1
CONSOLE SUBSTITUTE
66D141-3
Figure 4-5. Block Diagram of 66D141 Test Kit

type clutches as per manufacturer, EDO-AIRE MITCHELLd.
The servo motor current drain test is outlined in the following paragraph.
e.
For electronic troubleshooting of the AltiMatic IIIC, refer to the appropriate
Procedure in Section V.
Bench Set-up
4-8. CHECKING SERVO MOTOR CURRENT DRAIN (NO LOAD).

The servo motor may be checked in the, airplane for current drain using a standard ammeter (or
equivalent) in series with the motor. The following procedure will facilitate this check.
NOTE
If the servo motor current drain is over one-half amp, it must be
replaced.
a.
b.
c.
d.
It shall be necessary to improvise an adapter for the CD-16 or CD-47 plug.

Connect the negative side of a 12-volt source to pin "C" on servo motor plug.
Connect pin "D" to one lead of the ammeter.
Connect the remaining ammeter lead to the positive side of the 12-volt source.
CAUTION
Before applying voltage as described in the following steps, note
the initial application of voltage should only be for ONE SECOND
to ascertain there are no shorts which will cause damage to the
meter.
4-6
TEST EQUIPMENT
REVISED: 3/10/78
e.
Apply voltage from the 12-volt source for ONE SECOND to ascertain no shorts exist.
f.
Apply voltage from the 12-volt source and take current reading. Turn off voltage after reading
has been obtained.
g.
To check the motor operation in the opposite direction, reverse connections "C" and "D" on the
servo motor plug and apply voltage and check current reading. If the reading is more than one-half amp, the
servo motor must be replaced.
NOTE
Motor must be tested in both directions.
TABLE IV-I. TROUBLE ISOLATION BLOCK DIAGRAM
INPUT
MtDDLE
OUTPUT
Directional Gyro
Artificial Horizon
Altitude Selector
Coupler
Computer
Amplifier
Console
Cables
Servo Motor
Solenoid
Mechanics
TEST EQUIPMENT
ISSUED: 11/25/74
-----
4-7
V
SECTION
SET-UP
PROCEDURES
Paragraph
Page
5-1.
5-2.
5-1
Introduction...............................................
Bench Set-Up and Adjustment of AltiMatic IIIC Console and IC515-l/1CS15-3
AmplifierWithoutRadioCoupler
Roll Threshold Adjustment for AltiMatic IIIC
5-1
.................................
5-3.
5-4.
5-5.
5-6.
5-7.
5-8.
PitchBenchSet-UpforAltiMaticIIIC
5-12
5-21
................................
Pitch Threshold Adjustment for AltiMatic IIIC

AltiMatic IIIC Ground Check Without Radio Coupler (Roll)
AltiMatic IIIC Flight Adjustments Without Radio Coupler (Roll)
Bench Set-Up and Adjustments for AltiMatic IIIC Console and 1C515-l/1C515-3
AmplifierWithRadioCoupler
Roll Threshold Adjustment for AltiMatic IIIC
Pitch Bench Set-Up for AltiMatic IIIC
Pitch Threshold Adjustment for AltiMatic IIIC
AltiMatic IIIC Ground Checks With Radio Coupler (Roll)
GroundCheck-Pitch
AltiMatic IIIC Flight Adjustments With Radio Coupler (Roll)
AltiMatic IIIC Flight Adjustment
Pitch
AltiMatic IIIC Ground Check (Optional Yaw Damper)
.
5-14
...................................
5-9.
5-10.
5-11.
5-12.
5-13.
5-14.
5-15.
5-16.
5-17. CheckandAdjustingRadioGain
5-18. Piper Omni/Localizer Coupler Modification (lC388 Series)
5-19. NAV Converter (lC707) Alignment Procedure
5-20. AdjustmentsofSlavingSub-System
5-21. AltiMatic IIIC With Optional King KCS-55 Compass System
AlignmentProcedure.........................................
5-22.
Yaw Damper Ground Check
.
.........................................
5-29
5-30
5-32
5-30
REVISED:
10/16/8
5-33
5-37
.................................
..........................
5-27
...................................
5-23
5-24
5-25
5-26
5-6
5-8
5-10
5-12
5-39
5-42
v-i
SECTION V
SET-UP PROCEDURES
5-1. INTRODUCTION. This section contains information on how to set up the AltiMatic IIIC on the
bench. There is also information on checking the autopilot on the ground. Flight adjustments, which are
the final adjustments, are given in this section also. For the removal and installation of the AltiMatic IIIC
components, refer to Section III, Removal and Installation.
NOTE
It is MANDATORY that the AltiMatic IIIC be set up according to
bench set-up procedures in this section prior to installation in the
airplane.
CAUTION
When the AltiMatic IIIC is being adjusted, excessive turning of the
adjustment potentiometers should be avoided as this may cause
premature failure of the potentiometer.
5-2. BENCH SET-UP AND ADJUSTMENT OF ALTIMATIC IIIC CONSOLE AND 1C515-l/lC515-3
AMPLIFIER WITHOUT RADIO COUPLER.

NOTE
If either the console or the amplifier is replaced, the console must
be set up through its complete adjustment procedure.
a.
The following equipment will be required from the Autopilot Test Kit, Piper P/N 753 439
(66DI41).
1. Gyro Substitute Test Box 66D141-1.
2.
Power Section Test Box 66D141-2.
3.
Console Substitute Box 66D I41-3.
4.
AltiMatic III test harness, identified by a large 30-pin AMP connector feeding through five
connecting cables labeled CD-16, CD-18, CD-20, CD-33 and CD-47. This cable also contains two white
wires, one wire terminating at a Delco fitting labeled CD-27 and the other terminating at a knife connector
labeled CD-26.
5. Servo Extension Cable CD-47/CD-16 with a male CD-47 connector on one end and a female
CD-47 connector on the other end.
b.
BENCH SET-UP AND ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES ARE AS FOLLOWS:
1. Remove the console face plate by removing the roll command knob and four face plate
mounting screws. After removing the face plate, reinstall the roll command knob to facilitate accomplishing
bench set-up adjustments.
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ISSUED: 11/25/74
5-1
Determine that the VOLTAGE SELECTOR SWITCHES, located on top plate of amplifier
2.
and the right side of the console are in the same position (14 or 28-volts DC) as the bench power supply.
This will insure proper autopilot operation and prevent damage to the components.
Hold the AMPLIFIER with 30-pin amplifier board facing you. Plug large 30-pin AMP
3.
connector of the test harness onto the amplifier board with the cable fanning out to your right.
Identification placard on the amplifier should be visible.
4.
Plug AMP connector CD-20 into the CD-20 receptacle located on the rear of the console.
Check that all WHITE ENGAGE SWITCHES are pushed to their "OFF" positions on the
5.
autopilot console.
6. Plug the 4-pin male CD-47 connector into the female &pin receptacle, located on the right
hand side of the Power Section Test Box. This receptacle is labeled AMPLIFIER. On the Power Section
Test Box, find the VOLTAGE SELECTOR SWITCH on the lower left hand corner and insure that this
switch is positioned to match the bench power supply and the amplifier voltage selector switch as in Step 2
(14 or 28-volts DC).
7.
Rotate SELECTOR KNOB on Power Section Test Box to the CENTER or "OFF" position.
8.
Plug the female 7-pin CD-33 connector into the male 5-pin CD-33 connector located on the
bottom left hand corner of the Gyro Substitute Test Box.
9.
Plug the 7-pin female CD-18 connector into the 7-pin male CD-18 connector on the left
hand side of the Gyro Substitute Test Box.
10. Rotate the LARGE VERNIER CONTROL KNOB on the Gyro Substitute Test Box to the
centered ZERO position reading the TOP SCALE labeled ROLL DEGREES.
11. Immediately below the large vernier knob, find a ROLL or PITCH SELECTOR SLIDE
SWITCH. Move this switch to the "ROLL" position.
I 2. Immediately to the right of the slide swtich, find a DIRECTIONAL GYRO SELECTOR
KNOB. Rotate this knob to ZERO or straight "UP" position.
13. Set aside the remaining cables labeled CD-16 and CD-10. Connect a ground lead to the
bottom mounting flange of the AltiMatic IIIC amplifier.
CAUTION
DO NOT place the ground lead near the output transistors located
between the cooling fins along the side of the amplifier.
14. Connect the face plate to the console face plate lighting connector with servo extension
cable CD-47/CD-16 (with large hole Pin A on connector matching blank on console). Find two WHITE
WIRES originating at AMP connector CD-20 on rear of console, one wire terminating in a Delco fitting and
one white wire terminating in a KNIFE connector. Connect the white wire CD-26 terminating in a knife
connector to a positive 14 or 28-volt supply, whichever is applicable, and observe all face plate lights glow.
NOTE
Console translucent material glows very dimly, shield from
external light source. If some lights do not glow, replace bulbs
and/or console face plate as required. If none of the lights glow,
check DC power source and fuse.
15. Disconnect A+ lead from the knife connector and remove the servo extension cable
CD-47/CD-16 from the face plate and the console face plate lighting connector.
16. Attach the DELCO fitting from the remaining white wire to the positive side of the power
supply.
5-2
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ISSUED: 11/25/74

17. Push the ROLL ENGAGE SWITCH, located on the autopilot console, to the "ON" position
and observe that SOLENOID light located on the face of the Power Section Test Box glows.
NOTE
If solenoid light glows, proceed to Step 18. If solenoid light DOES

NOT glow, recheck power supply voltage and wiring harness for
correct connections. If solenoid light still does not glow with
cables properly connected and proper voltage applied, turn off
power supply and proceed to Step 21.
18. Disconnect A+ lead. The roll engage switch should disengage.
19. Connect A+ lead. Push ALL switches to the ON position. Ascertain that the Roll, Heading,
Pitch and ALT Switches engage. If switches fail to engage, replace console.
20. Push all console switches to the OFF position except the ROLL ENGAGE SWITCH and
proceed to Step 26.
21. Find CONSOLE SUBSTITUTE TEST BOX. Place the POWER SELECTOR SWITCH,
located on the lower left hand corner of the Console Substitute Test Box, to the DOWN or "OFF"
position.
22. Remove AMP connector CD-20 from the rear of the console and plug it into the CD-20
receptacle located on the top left corner of the Console Substitute Test Box.
23. Immediately to the right of the CD-20 AMP connector, find a 14 or 28-volt SLIDE
SWITCH. Place this switch in the proper voltage position to agree with VOLTAGE SELECTOR SWITCH on
top plate of amplifier, also the selector switch on the lower left hand corner of the Power Section Test Box.
24. Reapply voltage from power supply and place POWER SELECTOR SWITCH on lower left hand
side of Console Substitute Box to the "ON" position. Observe SOLENOID LIGHT now glows on Power
Section Test Box.
NOTE
If light DOES GLOW, replace autopilot CONSOLE. If light DOES
NOT glow, replace autopilot AMPLIFIER. If component is
replaced return to beginning of test sequence.
25. Disconnect AMP connector CD-20 from Console Substitute Test Box and connect it to the
console.
26. Depress RED BUTTON on lower right corner of Power Section Test Box labeled INPUT
VOLTAGE. Test box needle should deflect to the right and read 12-14 volts DC or 24-28 volts DC.
27. Rotate SELECTOR KNOB, lower center of Power Section Test Box, CLOCKWISE to the
full right position labeled "RES."
28. Rotate the ROLL COMMAND KNOB, located on left side of the console, full left and
observe voltmeter on Power Section Test Box points LEFT to read approximately 12-volts.
29. Rotate ROLL COMMAND KNOB full right and observe voltmeter on Power Section Test
Box indicates right approximately 12 volts. Proceed to Step 31 if correct indication is recorded.
NOTE
If voltmeter does not deflect when rotating roll command knob,
recheck that heading switch on the console is pushed to the
"OFF" position.
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ISSUED: 11/25/74
5-3

30. If needle of voltmeter on Power Section Test Box still does not respond to the roll
command knob rotation, substitute the console with the Console Substitute Box. Remove the CD-20 plug
from the rear of console and plug it into the CD-20 receptacle on the Console Substitute Box. Place the
DIRECTIONAL GYRO MANUAL SLIDE SWITCH IN THE MANUAL POSITION. Make sure the POWER
SWITCH is in the "ON" position. Rotate the roll manual knob full RIGHT and observe if voltmeter on
Power Section Test Box points right. Rotate the roll manual knob full LEFT, observe if voltmeter on Power
Section Test Box points LEFT. If NEEDLE on voltmeter now MOVES, REPLACE the CONSOLE. If not,
replace the AMPLIFIER.
31. Make sure large vernier knob on Gyro Substitute Test Box is centered and points to ZERO
on TOP SCALE labeled ROLL DEGREES.
32. Push HEADING SWITCH on the console to the "ON" position. Rotate the roll command
knob on the console full right and left and observe there is NO movement of the needle on the Power
Section Test Box. If the needle moves, check that HEADING SWITCH is in the "ON" position. If needle
still moves, console MUST be replaced. If there is no needle movement, proceed with next step.
33. Find six adjustment potentiometers located on the front of the console and directly under
the trim meter. (Refer to Figure 5-1.) Insert SMALL slot head screwdriver in SECOND HOLE FROM LEFT
and adjust the roll centering adjustment until needle of voltmeter of Power Section Test Box centers and
holds on ZERO. If unable to adjust needle to ZERO by rotating the adjustment screw, replace console.
CAUTION
When making any adjustment
on the AltiMatic IIIC, it is
MANDATORY to wait a minimum of 30 seconds before taking
any readings until the computer has time to digest any new
information.
34. With needle holding ZERO on Power Section Test Box, push the HEADING SWITCH, on
the console, to the "OFF" position and observe needle on Power Section Test Box. If needle DEFLECTS
off of zero, carefully adjust it back to zero by ROTATING the ROLL COMMAND KNOB on the console,
again waiting for the computer to digest the new command.
35. After the needle holds zero by adjusting the roll command knob, press HEADING SWITCH,
on the console, to the "ON" position and observe NO CHANGE occurs on the Test Box Needle Indication.
NOTE
If needle does change, repeat Steps 33 thru 35.
36. With needle holding zero in each mode, observe the physical position of the roll command
knob on the autopilot console is straight up approximately 3 degrees. If ROLL COMMAND KNOB is out
of tolerance, replace console.
37. Press HEADING SWITCH,on the console, to the "ON" position.
38. Place DIRECTIONAL GYRO SELECTOR CONTROL KNOB, located on the lower right
hand corner of the Gyro Substitute Test Box, to the right hand 45 degree position or full CLOCKWISE.
Observe needle deflects RIGHT on the Power Section Test Box.
39. Rotate LARGE VERNIER KNOB on Gyro Substitute Test Box CLOCKWISE to the right
hand 20 degree position reading the TOP SCALE labeled ROLL DEGREES.
NOTE
Large increments represent
54
5 degrees each.
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ISSUED: 11/25/74
PITCH COMMANDKNOB
ROLL
HDG
ALT
PITCH
......-TRIM
B
A
B
C
D
E
F
LEFT BANK ADJUSTMENT

ROLL CENTERING ADJUSTMENT
RIGHT BANK ADJUSTMENT
DOWN LIMIT ADJUSTMENT
PITCH CENTERING ADJUSTMENT
UP LIMIT ADJUSTMENT
INDICATOR
D
E
ROLL
PITCH
Figure 5-1. AltiMatic IIIC Console

40. With small slot head screwdriver, adjust the potentiometer located inside the THIRD HOLE
from the left DIRECTLY below the trim meter on the console to center the needle on the Power Section
Test Box to zero. If unable to adjust to zero, replace console.
41. Leaving the HEADING SWITCH "ON", rotate the DIRECTIONAL GYRO SELECTOR
CONTROL KNOB, located on lower right hand corner of the Gyro Substitute Test Box, to the LEFT
HAND 45 degree position or full COUNTERCLOCKWISE. Observe needle on Power Section Test Box
deflects far left on scale.
42. Rotate LARGE VERNIER KNOB ON Gyro Substitute Test Box COUNTERCLOCKWISE
to the LEFT HAND 20 degree position, reading the TOP SCALE labeled ROLL DEGREES. With small slot
head screwdriver, adjust the POTENTIOMETER inside the LEFT HAND HOLE below the trim meter on
the console to center the needle on the Power Section Test Box to zero. If unable to adjust to zero, replace
console.
43. Rotate DIRECTIONAL GYRO SELECTOR KNOB, located on lower right hand corner of
Gyro Substitute Test Box to the LEFT HAND 10 degree position. Observe needle on Power Section Test
Box moves to the RIGHT.
44. Rotate
the LARGE VERNIER KNOB on the Gyro Substitute
Test Box
CLOCKWISE to center the needle on Power Section Test Box, again waiting for the computer to digest the
new information until the needle stays centered after at least a 30 second wait.
45. Read the degree of bank in the Gyro Substitute Test Box from the TOP SCALE labeled
ROLL DEGREES. The pointer must be between 8 and 13 degrees of bank angle. IF OUT OF
TOLERANCE, REPLACE AMPLIFIER.
46. Rotate the DIRECTIONAL GYRO SELECTOR KNOB, located at the lower right hand
corner of the Gyro Substitute Test Box, to the RIGHT HAND 10 degree position. Observe needle of Power
Section Test Box deflects to the RIGHT.
47. Rotate the LARGE VERNIER KNOB, located on the Gyro Substitute Test Box,
CLOCKWISE to center the needle of the Power Section Test Box. Again wait for the computer to digest
the new information until the needle stays centered after at least a 30 second wait.
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ISSUED:
11/25/74
5-5
48. Read the degree of bank on the Gyro Substitute Test Box from the TOP SCALE labeled
ROLL DEGREES. The pointer
must be between 8 and 13 degrees of bank angle. IF OUT OF
TOLERANCE, REPLACE AMPLIFIER.
49. Push the HEADING SWITCH, on the console, to the "OFF" position. Rotate the ROLL
COMMAND KNOB full right. Observe needle on Power Section Test Box indicates right.
50. Rotate the LARGE VERNIER KNOB on the Gyro Substitute Test Box CLOCKWISE to
center the needle on Power Section Test Box, again waiting for the computer to digest the new information
until the needle stays centered after at least a 30 second wait.
51. Read the degree of bank on the Gyro Substitute Test Box TOP SCALE labeled ROLL
DEGREES. Bank MUST be 28 degrees 3 degrees. IF OUT OF TOLERANCE, REPLACE CONSOLE.
52. Rotate the ROLL COMMAND KNOB full LEFT. Rotate the LARGE VERNIER KNOB on
the Gyro Substitute Test Box COUNTERCLOCKWISE to center the needle on the Power Section Test Box.
53. Read the degree of bank on the Gyro Substitute Test Box on the TOP SCALE labeled
ROLL DEGREES. Bank MUST be 28 degrees 3 degrees. IF OUT OF TOLERANCE, REPLACE
CONSOLE.
54. Recenter ROLL COMMAND KNOB to the center position. Rotate the POWER SECTION
TEST BOX SELECTOR KNOB, turning COUNTERCLOCKWISE to the CENTER or "OFF" position.
Rotate the DIRECTIONAL GYRO SELECTOR KNOB, located on lower right hand corner of Gyro
Substitute Test Box, to the ZERO or straight "UP" position.
55. Push ROLL ENGAGE SWITCHto the "OFF" position.
56. Refer to the following paragraph for Roll Threshold Adjustment Procedure.
5-3. ROLL THRESHOLD ADJUSTMENT FOR ALTIMATIC IIIC.
Remove the base plate from the bottom of the amplifier
adjustment potentiometer. (Refer to Figure 5-2.)
to gain access to the roll threshold
CAUTION
Threshold adjustments are to be accomplished with a 12-volt
calibrated bench set-up. When adjusting 28-volt systems, convert
bench set-up to 12-volt configuration until threshold adjustment
procedure is completed. Verify all switches are returned to the
28-volt position prior to reinstallation in 28-volt aircraft. Setting
of the large vernier control knob on the Gyro Substitute Test Box
is critical when doing this adjustment procedure.
1. Disconnect the AMP connector
CD-20 from the rear of the console and set the console
aside.
position.
3. Plug the AMP connector CD-20 into the receptacle, located on the top left corner of the
Console Substitute Test Box.
4. Immediately to the right of the AMP connector CD-20 on the Console Substitute Test Box,
find the (14 or 28-volt) SLIDE SWITCH.Place this switch in the 14-volt position.
5. Place the DIRECTIONAL GYRO slide switch, located on lower left of Console Substitute
Test Box, in the UP or D.G. position.
"RES" position.
7. Ascertain the DIRECTIONAL GYRO SELECTOR KNOB, located on lower right hand
corner of Gyro Substitute Test Box, is in the ZERO or straight "UP" position.
54
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ISSUED:
11/25/74
PITCH
TMRESHOLD
POTENTIOMETER
ADJUSTMENT
ROLL
THRESHOLD
POTENTIOMETER
ADJUSTMENT
Figure 5-2. AltiMatic IIIC, IC515-1/lC515-3 Amplifier

Threshold Adjustment Potentiometers
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ISSUED:
11/25/74
5-7
8. Rotate the LARGE VERNIER CONTROL KNOB on Gyro Substitute Test Box to the
9. Place the POWER SELECTOR SWITCH on lower left hand side of Console Substitute Test
Box to the "ON" position. Observe SOLENOID LIGHT now glows on Power Section Test Box.
10. Rotate the ROLL TRIM KNOB on Console Substitute Test Box as required to center the
needle on the Power Section Test Box to ZERO.
l1. Rotate the LARGE VERNIER CONTROL
KNOB on Gyro Substitute Test Box
CLOCKWISEfor a one (1) degree right bank.
12. Observe voltmeter on Power Section Test Box and record meter reading. (Refer to Figure
5-3 for enlarged view of voltmeter.)
13. Rotate the LARGE VERNIER CONTROL KNOB on Gyro Substitute Test Box,
COUNTERCLOCKWISE for a one (1) degree left bank.
14. Observe voltmeter on Power Section Test Box and record meter reading. Average the meter
readings obtained and refer to Table V-I for correct voltage settings.
15. If voltage setting is correct proceed to next step. If voltage setting is incorrect find the Roll
Threshold Adjustment Potentiometer, located on the lower section of the amplifier printed circuit board
(refer to Figure 5-2), and adjust to obtain an average of the voltage settings listed in Table V-I by repeating
Steps 11 thru 14.
16. Rotate the Power Section Test Box Selector Knob COUNTERCLOCKWISEto the center or
"OFF" position.
Box to the "OFF" position.
18. Refer to the following paragraph for the Pitch Bench Set-up.
5-4. PITCH BENCH SET-UP FOR ALTIMATIC IIIC.
1. Disconnect AMP connector CD-20 from the Console Substitute Test Box and connect it to
the console.
2. Unplug CD-47 connector attached to the face of the Power Section Test Box Amplifier
receptacle. Set aside the CD-47 that was removed and in its place install the 4-pin male CD-16 connector.
3. Plug the 5-pin female CD-10 connector into the 5-pin male connector on right hand side of
the Console Substitute Box.
4. Rotate the LARGE VERNIER CONTROL KNOB on the Gyro Substitute Test Box to read
zero on the BOTTOM SCALE labeled PITCH DEGREES.
5. Immediately below the vernier control knob, find a SLIDE SWITCH labeled ROLL and
PITCH. Place this switch in the "DOWN" or PITCH position.
6. Ascertain that the VOLTAGE SELECTOR SWITCHES of all the components are in the
same position (14 or 28-volts DC) as the bench power supply. This will insure proper autopilot operation
and prevent damage to the components.
7. Engage the ALTIMATIC IIIC by pushing the ROLL ENGAGE SWITCH, on the console, to
the "ON" position. DO NOT EXPECT SOLENOID LIGHT TO GLOW.
8. Push PITCH ENGAGE SWITCH, on the console, to the "ON" position and observe solenoid
light, located on the face of the Power Section Test Box, glows. If light glows, proceed with Step 15.
a.
If solenoid light does not glow, recheck that CD-16 connector is installed in the
receptacle on the face of the Power Section Test Box labeled Amplifier.
b.
If solenoid light does not glow, recheck power supply voltage and wiring harness for
correct connections.
If solenoid light still does not glow with cables properly connected and proper voltage
c.
applied, turn off power supply and proceed with next step.
54
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ISSUED: 11/25/74

9. Place the POWER SELECTOR SWITCH, located on the lower left hand corner of the
Console Substitute Box to the DOWN or "OFF" position.
10. Remove the AMP connector CD-20 from the rear of the console and plug it into the CD-20
receptacle located on the top left corner of Console Substitute Test Box.
I 1. Immediately to the right of the CD-20 AMP connector, find a 14 or 28-volt SLIDE
SWITCH. Ascertain the switch is in the proper voltage position to agree with both the voltage selector
switch on top plate of amplifier and the selector switch on the lower left corner of the Power Section Test
Box.
12. Reapply voltage from power supply and place power selector switch on lower left hand side
of Console Substitute Test Box to the UP or "ON" position. Observe solenoid light now glows on Power
Section Test Box.
NOTE
If light DOES glow, replace autopilot CONSOLE. If light DOES
NOT glow, replace autopilot AMPLIFIER.
14. Unplug the AMP connector CD-20 attached to the Console Substitute Test Box and connect
it to the CD-20 receptacle on the rear of the console.
15. Rotate the selector knob, 'located on the face of the Power Section Test Box, full
CLOCKWISE to the "RES" position.
16. Make sure LARGE VERNIER CONTROL KNOB on Gyro Substitute Test Box is reading
ZERO on the BOTTOM SCALE labeled PITCH DEGREES.
17. Rotate the PITCH COMMANDDISC up on AltiMatic Console, for a full DOWN command
and observe needle of Power Section Test Box deflects LEFT.
18. Rotate the PITCH COMMAND DISC down for a full UP command and observe needle of
Power Section Test Box deflects to the RIGHT.
19. Recenter PITCH COMMAND DISC so that the indice calls for a level attitude.
20. With a small slot head screwdriver adjust the FIFTH POTENTIOMETER from the left,
located directly below the trim meter on the console, to center the needle on the Power Section Test Box
to ZERO. (Refer to Figure 5-1.)
NOTE
Keep in mind you MUST WAIT 30 SECONDS for the autopilot to
digest any new information.
21. Rotate the LARGE VERNIER CONTROL KNOB on Gyro Substitute Test Box
COUNTERCLOCKWISE to indicate 7 degrees nose down, reading BOTTOM SCALE labeled PITCH
DEGREES.
22. Rotate PITCH COMMANDDISC up for a full "DOWN" command.
23. With a small slot head screwdriver adjust the FOURTH POTENTIOMETER from the left,
to ZERO. If unable to adjust to zero, replace console.
CLOCKWISEto indicate 10 degrees nose up reading BOTTOM SCALE labeled PITCH DEGREES.
25. Rotate PITCH COMMANDDISC down for a full "UP" command.
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ISSUED: 11/25/74
5-9
26. With a small slot head screwdriver adjust the SIXTH POTENTIOMETER from the left,
27. Push the ALT ENGAGE SWITCH, on the console, to the "ON" position.
COUNTERCLOCKWISEuntil the needle of the Power Section Test Box returns to ZERO.
29. Rotate PITCH COMMAND DISC down for a full "UP" command and then up for a full
"DOWN" command and note little change occurs on Power Section Test Box meter. Should a large amount
of needle movement be present during Pitch Command Disc movement recheck ALT ENGAGE SWITCH,
located on the console, is in the "ON" position. (If a large amount of needle movement is still present
during Pitch Command Disc movement, replace console.) Recenter Pitch Command Disc.
30. Push all console switches to the "OFF" position.
31. Refer to the following paragraph for Pitch Threshold Adjustment Procedure.
5-5. PITCH THRESHOLD ADJUSTMENT FOR ALTIMATIC IIIC.
Remove the cover plate from the top of the amplifier to gain access to the Pitch Threshold
Adjustment Potentiometer. (Refer to Figure 5-2.)
CAUTION
are to be accomplished with a 12-volt
bench set-up to 12-volt configuration until threshold adjustment
procedure is completed. Verify all switches are returned to the
Threshold adjustments
aside.
position.
find the (14 or 28-volt) SLIDE SWITCH. Place this switch in the 14-volt position.
5. Place the ALT. CONTROL slide switch, located on lower left of Console Substitute Test
Box, in the UP or Alt. Control position.
6. Place the ALTITUDE CONTROL KNOB, located on upper right of Console Substitute Test
Box, to the straight up or 12 o'clock position.
7. Rotate the SELECTOR KNOB, lower center of Power Section Test Box, CLOCKWISE to
the "RES" position.
ZERO position on the BOTTOM SCALE labeled PITCH DEGREES.
9. Immediately below the large vernier control knob on Gyro Substitute Test Box, find a
SLIDE SWITCH labeled ROLL and PITCH. Place this switch in the "DOWN" or PITCH position.
5-10
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ISSUED:
11/25/74
11. Rotate the PITCH TRIM KNOB on Console Substitute Test Box as required to center the
to ZERO.
12. Rotate
LARGE VERNIER CONTROL KNOB on Gyro Substitute Test Box
COUNTERCLOCKWISE to indicate three-quarters (3/4) degree nose down, reading BOTTOM SCALE
labeled PITCH DEGREES.
14. Rotate the LARGE VERNIER CONTROL
KNOB on Gyro Substitute Test Box
CLOCKWISE to indicate three<iuarters (3/4) degree nose up, reading BOTTOM SCALE labeled PITCH
needle on Power Section Test Box
DEGREES.
obtained and refer to Table V-II for correct voltage settings.
16. If voltage setting is correct proceed to next step. If voltage setting is incorrect find the Pitch
Threshold Adjustment Potentiometer, located on upper section of amplifier printed circuit board, (refer to
Figure 5-2) and adjust to obtain an average of the voltage setting listed in Table V-II by repeating Steps 12
thru 15.
17. Place the POWER SELECTOR SWITCH on Console Substitute Test Box to the "OFF"
position.
18. Disconnect test equipment and associated cables and reinstall the components in the
airplane.
19. Proceed with ground checks and flight adjustments.
TABLE V-l. ROLL THRESHOLD
readings
AIRCRAFT
MODEL
NOMINAL THRESHOLD VOLTAGE
PA-23-250
PA-28RT-201;-20tT
PA-31-310:-325
PA-31-350
PA-31P
PA-32-260;-300, PA-32R-300
& PA-32RT-300;-300T
PA-32-301;-301T
& PA-32R-301:-301T
PA-34-200T
PA-44-180
PA-44-180T
3.0 volts
2.5 volts
2.5 volts
2.5 volts
2.5 volts
2.5 volts
2.5 volts
2.5 volts
2.5 volts
2.5
volts
TABLE V-II. PITCH THRESHOLD

AIRCRAFT MODEL
PA-23-250
PA-28RT-201:-201T
PA-31-310
PA-31-325
PA-31-350
PA-3\P
PA-32-260;-300
PA-32R-300 & PA-32RT-300;-300T
PA-32-30 1:-30 IT
& PA-32R-301:-301T
PA-34-200T
PA-44-180
PA-44-180T
SEI'-UP PROCEDURES
REVISEDi 10/16/81
THRESHOLD
4.0
4.0
3.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
VOLTAGE
volts
volts
volts
volts
volts
volts
3.5 volts
4.0 volts
4.0 volts
4.0 volts
4.1 volts
4.1 volts
5-11

5-6. ALTIMATIC IIIC GROUND CHECK WITHOUT RADIO COUPLER (ROLL).
1. Remove the console face plate by removing the roll command knob and the four face plate
in-flight adjustments.
2. Center the roll command knob and position HDG and ROLL engage switches to the "OFF"
position.
3. Start airplane engine to obtain gyro stability.

4. Place the airplane control wheel to approximately neutral aileron or level flight position.
Push roll engage switch to the "ON" position. Move control wheel right and left to check for servo
engagement.
5. Rotate the roll command knob to the right and to the left and observe that the airplane
control wheel moves in the correct direction.
NOTE
The airplane control wheel can be stopped in any position and will
not return to level position by centering the roll command knob.
The airplane control wheel will remain stationary at the time the
roll command knob is approximately
electrical output position.
centered
or at its zero
6. Center the Heading Bug of the Directional Gyro or Horizontal Situation Indicator and push
console HDG SWITCH "ON." WITH CONSOLE HEADING SWITCHPUSHED TO THE "ON" POSITION,
THE ROLL COMMAND KNOB ON THE CONSOLE BECOMESINOPERATIVE.
7. Set the Heading Bug for a heading change to the right, observe control wheel should turn
right. Make same check to the left. Return the Heading Bug to existing aircraft heading.
8. Push ROLL ENGAGE SWITCH TO THE "OFF" position. Rotate the CONTROL WHEEL
right and left and observe servo disengaged.
9. Refer to paragraph 5-13 and proceed with AltiMatic IIIC Pitch Ground Check.
5-7. ALTIMATIC IIIC FLIGHT ADJUSTMENTS
WITHOUT RADIO COUPLER (ROLL).
1. The aircraft shall be loaded to or near it's AFT-C.G. LIMIT for flight set-up to assure all flight
profiles are met. Consult AIRCRAFT WEIGHT AND BALANCE DATA TO ENSURE FUEL BURN
DURING FLIGHT SET-UP DOES NOT PLACE AIRCRAFT OUTSIDE THE C.G. ENVELOPE.
Previous Altimatic series Autopilots do not require this loading. (Refer to Flight Manual for proper power
settings.)
NOTE
For adjusting descent, 19 inches of mercury manifold pressure

must be used on all airplanes except the PA-31-310, PA-31-325
and PA-31-350 which must be adjusted at 20 inches of mercury
and the PA-31P which must be adjusted at 25 inches of mercury.
2. MAKE CERTAIN RUDDER TRIM IS ADJUSTED TO CENTER THE BALL. IF RUDDER
IS INCORRECTLY TRIMMED, THE ALTIMATIC WILL FLY THE AIRPLANE WITH A WING LOW TO
COMPENSATE FOR THE OUT OF TRIM RUDDER.
NOTE
SMOOTH AIR IS REQUIRED.

3. Push console HDG ENGAGE SWITCH to the "ON" position. Set the HEADING BUG to
the aircraft heading.

5-12
SET-UP PROCEDURES
REVISIII: 10/16181
V0lTS
a,
NOTE
METER
0.6-voLTS
1.2
VOLT5
INCREMENTS
IS-v0LT
ON
ON
30
vokT
ARE
SCALE
SCALE
SOLENOID
SERVO
28V
AMPLIFIER
SELECTOR
POWERSECTION
INPUT
VOLTAGE
66D1412
Figure 5-3. Power Section Test Box
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ISSUED: 11/25/74
5-13

4. Push ROLL ENGAGE SWITCH to the "ON" position. If the airplane does not maintain the
selected heading, adjust roll centering adjustment as necessary so that airplane remains on selected heading.
5. Set the HEADING BUG 150 degrees to the left of heading and observe the angle of bank on
the artificial horizon. Adjust the left bank screw of the console to obtain 20 degree bank. Rotating the
adjustment
screw clockwise will increase the bank angle.
CAUTION
Make certain HEADING BUG does not get within 25 degrees of
the airplane's heading until the adjustment is completed.
6. Set the HEADING BUG 150 degrees to the RIGHT and observe the angle of bank. Adjust
the right bank adjustment screw of the console to obtain a 20 degree bank. Rotating adjustment screw
CLOCKWISEINCREASES bank angle.
CAUTION
Make certain HEADING BUG does not get within 25 degrees of
the airplane's heading until the adjustment is completed.
7. Allow the airplane to become established on the selected heading. Observe that autopilot
maintains a selected heading within 2 degrees. If not, repeat Step 4.
NOTE
Always recheck bank settings after adjusting roll centering.
8. Make certain roll knob is centered. Push console HDG ENGAGE SWITCH to the "OFF"
that the airplane flies wings level within 2 degrees.
the roll command knob full LEFT and observe that airplane banks LEFT 28 3
position and observe

9. Turn
degrees.
10. Turn
degrees.
11. Refer
the roll command knob full RIGHT and observe that airplane banks RIGHT 28 3
to paragraph 5-15 and proceed with AltiMatic HIC Pitch Flight Check Adjustments.
5-8. BENCH SET-UP AND ADJUSTMENTS

AMPLIFIER WITH RADIO COUPLER.
FOR ALTIMATIC IIIC CONSOLE AND 1C515-l/lC515-3

NOTE
If either the console or the amplifier is replaced, the console must

be set up through its complete adjustment procedure.
a.
The
(66Dl41).
1.
2.
3.
4.
5-14
following equipment
will be required
from the Autopilot
Test Kit, Piper P/N 753 439
Gyro Substitute Test Box 66D l41-l.

Power Section Test Box 66D141-2.
Console Substitute Box 66D141-3.
Radio Coupler Tester 66D141-4.
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ISSUED:
11/25/74
CD-47
CD-47/CD-16
CD-47
Figure 54. Extension Test Cables

5. AltiMatic III test harness, identified by a large 30-pin AMP connector feeding through five
connecting cables labeled CD-16, CD-18, CD-20, CD-33 and CD-47. This cable also contains two white
wires, one wire terminating at a Delco fitting labeled CD-27 and the other terminating at a knife connector
labeled CD-26.
6. Servo Extension Cable CD-47/CD-16 with a male CD-47 connector on one end and a female
CD-47 connector on the other end.
7. One radio extension cable approximately 3 feet long with a female 9-pin connector labeled
CD-34 on each end.
8. Two amplifier extension cables, approximately 3 feet long, with a female 7-pin connector
labeled CD-33 on one end and a male 7-pin connector also labeled CD-33 at the other end.
9. One Coupler Test Box power cable, approximately 3 feet long, with a RED and BLACK
alligator clip on one end and a red and black male plug on the other end.
BENCH SET-UP AND ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES ARE AS FOLLOWS:
bench set-up adjustments.
2. Determine that the VOLTAGE SELECTOR SWITCHES, located on top plate of amplifier
and the right side of the console are in the same position (14 or 28-volts DC) as the bench power supply.
This will insure proper autopilot operation and prevent damage to the components.
3. Hold the AMPLIFIER with 3 pin amplifier board facing you. Plug large 30-pin AMP
connector of the test harness onto the amplifier board with the cable fanning out to your right.
Identification placard on the amplifier should be visible.
4. Plug AMP connector CD-20 from the test harness onto the CD-20 receptacle located on the
rear of the console.
5. Check that all WHITE ENGAGE SWITCHES are pushed to their "OFF" positions on the
autopilot console.
b.
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ISSUED: 11/25/74
5-15
ALLIGATOR CLIP (BLACK)
TIP PIN (BLACK)
ALLIGATOR CLIP (RED)
TIP PIN (RED)
Figure 5-5. Radio Coupler Power Cable

6. Plug the 4-pin male CD-47 connector from the test harness into the female 4-pin receptacle
located on the right hand side of the Power Section Test Box. This receptacle is labeled AMPLIFIER. On
the Power Section Test Box, find the VOLTAGE SELECTOR SWITCH on the lower left hand corner and
insure that this switch is positioned to match the bench power supply and the amplifier voltage selector
switch in Step 2. (14 or 28-volts DC).
7. Rotate SELECTOR KNOB on Power Section Test Box to the CENTER or "OFF" position.
8. Connect the CD-33 CABLE coming from the large AMP connector of the amplifier, into the
male 7-pin connector located on the face of the Radio Coupler Test Box at the upper left hand corner
(LABELED AMPLIFIER).
9. Find the RADIO SIGNAL SUBSTITUTE KNOB located on the RADIO COUPLER TEST
BOX, immediately to the right of the bottom omni meter. MAKE SURE THIS RADIO SIGNAL KNOB IS
IN THE "IN" POSITION.
10. Find the VOLTAGE SELECTOR SWITCH located immediately to the left of the Red and
Black DC input terminals on the face of the Radio Coupler Test Box. Place this VOLTAGE SELECTOR
SWITCHin the proper voltage position.
11. Connect one of the two CD-33 EXTENSION CABLES to the 7-pin female connector
LABELED COUPLER, located on the face of the Radio Coupler Test Box.
12. Connect the 7-pin female connector at the other end of the CD-33 cable to the 7-pin male
connector located on the rear of the radio coupler LABELED CD-33.
13. Find the CD-34 EXTENSION CABLE with female connectors at both ends. Connect one
end of this cable to the male 9-pin connector located on the rear of the radio coupler LABELED CD-34.
Connect the other female 9-pin connector CD-34 on this cable to the male 9-pin connector located on the
face of the Radio Coupler Test Box, LABELED RADIO, CD-34.
14. Connect the short cable coming from inside the radio coupler with a 5-pin female connector
LABELED CD-33 on the end to the 5-pin male connector located on the face of the Gyro Substitute Test
Box.
15. Connect the CD-18 cable coming from the large AMP plug at the amplifier to the 7-pin male
connector located on the face of the Gyro Substitute Test Box LABELED CD-18.
16. Rotate LARGE VERNIER CONTROL KNOB on face of Gyro Substitute Test Box to the
CENTER or "ZERO" position on the TOP SCALE labeled ROLL DEGREES.
17. Below the large vernier knob on the Gyro Substitute Box, find a SLIDE SWITCH labeled
"ROLL" and "PITCH." Place this slide switch in the "UP" or "ROLL" position.
18. Immediately to the right of the slide switch, find a DIRECTIONAL GYRO SELECTOR
KNOB.
5-16
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ISSUED: 11/25/74

19. Place this DIRECTIONAL GYRO SELECTOR KNOB to the CENTER or "ZERO" position.
20. Find the RADIO COUPLER POWER CABLE with the RED and BLACK alligator clips on
one end. (Refer to Figure 5-5.) Plug the RED and BLACK MALE PLUGS of the Coupler Test Box Power
Cable into the red and black female receptacles located on the face of the Radio Coupler Test Box
LABELED DC INPUT.
21. Connect the RED and BLACK ALLIGATOR CLIPS to a 14 or 28-volt DC power supply,
whichever is applicable, FUSED at 3 AMPSUSED TO CHECK COUPLER LIGHTS ONLY.
CAUTION
OBSERVE POLARITY.
Make sure all white buttons on the console are PUSHED to their "OFF" position.
Set aside the remaining cables labeled CD-16 and CD-10. Connect a ground lead to the
bottom mounting flange of the AltiMatic IIIC amplifier.
22.
23.
CAUTION
DO NOT place the ground lead near the output transistors located
between the cooling fins along the side of the amplifier.
24. Connect the face plate to the console face plate lighting connector with servo extension
cable CD-47/CD-16 (with large hole Pin A on connector matching blank on console). Find two WHITE
WIRES originating at AMP connector CD-20 on rear of console, one wire terminating in a Delco fitting and
one white wire terminating in a knife connector. Connect the white wire CD-26 terminating in a knife
connector to a positive 14 or 28-volt supply, whichever is applicable, and observe all face plate lights glow.
NOTE
Console translucent material
glows very dimly, shield from

external light source. If some lights do not glow, replace bulbs
and/or console face plate as required. If none of the lights glow,
check DC power source and fuse.
25. Disconnect A+ lead from the knife connector and remove the servo extension cable
CD-47/CD-16 from the face plate and the console face plate lighting connector.
26. Attach the DELCO fitting from the remaining white wire to the positive side of the power
supply.
27. Push the ROLL ENGAGE SWITCH, located on the autopilot console, to the "ON" position
and observe that SOLENOID light located on the face of the Power Section Test Box glows.
NOTE
If solenoid light glows, proceed to Step 28. If solenoid light DOES
NOT glow, recheck power supply voltage and wiring harness for
correct connections. If solenoid light still does not glow with
cables properly connected and proper voltage applied, turn off
Power Supply and proceed to Step 31.
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ISSUED: 11/25/74
5-17
28. Disconnect A+ lead. The roll engage switch should disengage.

29. Connect A+ lead. Push ALL console switches to the ON position. Ascertain that the Roll,
Heading, Pitch and ALT Switches engage. If switches fail to engage, replace console.
30. Push all console switches to the OFF position except the ROLL ENGAGE SWITCH and
proceed to Step 36.
position.
32. Remove AMP connector CD-20 from the rear of the console and plug it into the CD-20
receptacle located on the top left corner of the Console Substitute Test Box.
33. Immediately to the right of the AMP connector CD-20 find a 14 or 28-volt SLIDE SWITCH.
Place this switch to the proper voltage position to agree with VOLTAGE SELECTOR SWITCH on the top
plate of the amplifier, also the selector switch on the lower left hand corner of the Power Section Test Box.
34. Reapply voltage from power supply and place POWER SELECTOR SWITCH on lower left
hand side of Console Substitute Box to the "ON" position. Observe SOLENOID LIGHT now glows on
Power Section Test Box.
NOTE
NOT glow, replace autopilot AMPLIFIER. If component is
replaced return to beginning of test sequence.
35.
Disconnect AMP connector CD-20 from Console Substitute Test Box and connect it to the
console.
36. Depress RED BUTTON on lower right corner of Power Section Test Box labeled INPUT
VOLTAGE. Test box needle should deflect to the right and read 12-14 volts DC or 24-28 volts DC.
full right position labeled "RES."
38. Rotate the ROLL COMMAND KNOB, located on left side of the console, full left and
observe voltmeter on Power Section Test Box points LEFT to read approximately 12-volts.
39. Rotate ROLL COMMAND KNOB full right and observe voltmeter on Power Section Test
Box indicates right approximately 12-volts. Proceed to Step 41 if correct indication is recorded.
NOTE
If voltmeter DOES NOT deflect when rotating roll command
knob, recheck that heading switch, on the console, is pushed to
the "OFF" position.
40. If needle of voltmeter on Power Section Test Box still does not respond to the roll
command knob rotation, substitute the console with Console Substitute Box. Remove the CD-20 plug from
the rear of console and plug it into the CD-20 receptacle on the Console Substitute Box. Place the
DIRECTIONAL GYRO MANUAL SLIDE SWITCH in the MANUAL POSITION. Make sure the POWER
SWITCH is in the "ON" position. Rotate the roll manual knob full RIGHT and observe if voltmeter on
Power Section Test Box points RIGHT. Rotate the roll manual knob full LEFT. Observe if voltmeter on
Power Section Test Box points LEFT. If needle on voltmeter now MOVES, REPLACE the CONSOLE. If
not, replace the AMPLIFIER.
41. Make sure the large vernier knob on Gyro Substitute Test Box is centered and points to
ZERO on TOP SCALE labeled ROLL DEGREES.
5-18
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ISSUED: 11/25/74

42. Place radio coupler SELECTOR SWITCH to the LOC/NORM mode and push HDG
ENGAGE SWITCH to "ON" position.
43. Depress the RED BUTTON on rear of the radio coupler.
44. Find six adjustment potentiometers located on the front of the console and directly under
the trim meter. (Refer to Figure 5-5.) While holding IN the RED BUTTON on rear of radio coupler, insert
small slot head screwdriver in SECOND HOLE FROM LEFT and adjust roll centering adjutment until
needle of voltmeter of Power Section Test -Box centers and holds on ZERO. If unable to adjust needle to
ZERO by rotating the adjustment screw, replace console.
CAUTION
When making any adjustment on the AltiMatic IIIC, it is
MANDATORY to wait a minimum of 30 seconds before taking
any readings until the computer has time to digest any new
information.
Push the HDG SWITCH, on the console, to the "OFF" position.
Carefully adjust the ROLL COMMAND KNOB on the console to center the needle of the
Power Section Test Box to ZERO. Remember to wait at least 30 seconds before taking any readings.
47. Push in the HDG SWITCH, on the console, to the "ON" position and also press in RED
BUTTON on rear of radio coupler to observe the needle of the Power Section Test Box recenters on ZERO.
a.
If needle does not recenter on ZERO, repeat Steps 41 thru 47 until centering is
accomplished.
48. Push HDG SWTICH, on the console, to the "OFF" position.
49. Observe the physical position of the roll command knob on the console. Make sure the knob
is straight up approximately 3 degrees. If ROLL COMMAND KNOB is out of folerance, replace console.
50. Press HDG SWITCH, on the console, to the "ON" position.
51. Place radio coupler SELECTOR
SWITCH to the HEADING mode. Place the
DIRECTIONAL GYRO SELECTOR CONTROL KNOB, located on the lower right hand corner of the
Gyro Substitute Test Box, to the RIGHT HAND 45 degree position or full CLOCKWISE. Observe needle
deflects RIGHT on the Power Section Box.
52. Rotate LARGE VERNIER KNOB on Gyro Substitute Test Box CLOCKWISE to the
RIGHT HAND 20 degree position, reading the TOP SCALE labeled ROLL DEGREES.
45.
46.
NOTE
Large increments represent 5 degrees each.
53. With small slot head screwdriver, adjust the POTENTIOMETER inside the THIRD HOLE
from the LEFT directly below the trim meter on the console to center the needle on the Power Section
Test Box to zero. If unable to adjust to zero, replace console.
54. Observe NEEDLE OF OUTPUT METER, located on Radio Coupler Test Box, indicates
RIGHT.
55. Leaving HEADING SWITCH "ON," rotate DIRECTIONAL GYRO SELECTOR CONTROL
KNOB, located on lower right hand corner of the Gyro Substitute Test Box, to the LEFT HAND 45 degree
position or full COUNTERCLOCKWISE.Observe needle deflects LEFT on Power Section Test Box.
56. Rotate LARGE VERNIER KNOB on Gyro Substitute Test Box COUNTERCLOCKWISE to
the LEFT HAND 20 degree position, reading the TOP SCALE labeled ROLL DEGREES. With a small slot
head screwdriver, adjust the POTENTIOMETER inside the LEFT HAND HOLE below the trim meter on
the console to center the needle on the Power Section Test Box to zero. Wait a minimum of 30 seconds for
the computer to digest the information.
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ISSUED: 11/25/74
5-19
57. Observe the NEEDLE OF THE OUTPUT METER, located on Radio Coupler Test Box,
indicates LEFT.
corner of the Gyro Substitute Test Box, to the LEFT HAND 10 degree position. Observe needle on Power
Section Test Box moves to the RIGHT.
59. Observe the NEEDLE of the Output Meter on Coupler Test Box indicates LEFT.
center the needle on Power Section Test Box, again waiting for computer to digest the new information.
61. Read the degree of bank on the Gyro Substitute Test Box from the TOP SCALE labeled
ROLL DEGREES. The pointer must be between 8 and 13 degrees of bank angle.
NOTE
If out of tolerance, replace amplifier.
corner of the Gyro Substitute Test Box, to the RIGHT HAND 10 degree position. Observe the needle of
Power Section Test Box moves to the RIGHT.
63. Observe the NEEDLE of Output Meter on Coupler Test Box indicates RIGHT.
64. Rotate LARGE VERNIER KNOB, located on the Gyro Substitute Test Box CLOCKWISE
to center the needle on the Power Section Test Box, again waiting for the computer to digest the new
information.
65. Read the DEGREE OF BANK on the Gyro Substitute Test Box from the TOP SCALE
labeled ROLL DEGREES. The pointer must be between 8 and 13 degrees of bank angle.
NOTE
If out of tolerance, replace amplifier.
66. Rotate LARGE VERNIER KNOB, located on Gyro Substitute Test Box, back to the ZERO
DEGREE position on the TOP SCALE labeled ROLL DEGREES.
67. Rotate DIRECTIONAL GYRO SELECTOR KNOB, located on lower right hand corner of
the Gyro Substitute Test Box, COUNTERCLOCKWISEto the ZERO DEGREE position.
68. Push the HEADING SWITCH, on the console, to the "OFF" position.
69. Rotate the ROLL COMMANDKNOB full right. Observe needle on Power Section Test Box
indicates right.
center the needle on Power Section Test Box, again waiting for the computer to digest the new information
until the needle stays centered after at least a 30 second wait.
71. Read the degree of bank on the Gyro Substitute Test Box TOP SCALE labeled ROLL
DEGREES. Bank must be 28 degrees 3 degrees.
NOTE
If out of tolerance, replace console.
72. Rotate the ROLL COMMAND KNOB full LEFT.
73. Rotate LARGE VERNIER KNOB on Gyro Substitute Test Box COUNTERCLOCKWISEto
center the needle on Power Section Test Box.
74. On the Gyro Substitute Test Box, read the degree of bank on the TOP SCALE labeled
ROLL DEGREES. Bank must be 28 degrees 3 degrees.
5-20
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ISSUED: 11/25/74
NOTE
If out of tolerance, replace console.
75. Recenter ROLL COMMAND KNOB to CENTER position. Recenter LARGE VERNIER
KNOB on Gyro Substitute Test Box back to ZERO on TOP SCALE labeled ROLL DEGREES.
76. Push the HEADING SWITCH to the "ON" position.
77. Place the radio coupler SELECTOR SWITCH to the LOC/NORM mode and while holding
IN the RED BUTTON on the rear of the coupler, observe needle on the Power Section Test Box points to
zero 2 divisions and the needle on the Output Meter on the Radio Coupler Test Box also reads zero 2
small divisions.
78. Place the radio coupler SELECTOR SWITCHto the OMNI mode.
79. On the Radio Coupler Test Box, find RADIO SIGNAL SUBSTITUTE KNOB immediately
to the right of the lower Omni Meter. Pull this KNOB to the OUT or "ON" position.
80. Rotate the RADIO SIGNAL KNOB to deflect lower OMNI METER to the RIGHT 100%
POSITION. Observe needle of upper OUTPUT METER deflects RIGHT,
8 1. Rotate DIRECTIONAL GYRO SELECTOR KNOB on Gyro Substitute Test Box to the
LEFT HAND 45 degree position full COUNTERCLOCKWISE.
82. WAIT 90 SECONDS. After waiting the required minimum 90 seconds of time, adjust the
right INTERCEFT POTENTIOMETER SCREW located on the side of the radio coupler to center the
needle of the Power Section Test Box to ZERO.
83. With OUTPUT METER of Power Section Test Box adjusted to ZERO, observe OUTPUT
METER NEEDLE of Radio Coupler Test Box also indicates ZERO.
CAUTION
REMEMBER TO WAIT A MINIMUM OF 30 SECONDS AFTER
MAKING ANY INTERCEPT ADJUSTMENTS.
84. Rotate RADIO SIGNAL KNOB on Radio Coupler Test Box to place the needle of the lower
Omni Meter to the LEFT HAND 100%POSITION.
85. Rotate the DIRECTIONAL GYRO SELECTOR KNOB on Gyro Substitute Test Box
CLOCKWISE to the RIGHT HAND 45 DEGREE POSITION. WAIT 90 SECONDS.
86. Adjust the LEFT INTERCEPT POTENTIOMETER SCREW, located on the side of the radio
coupler, to center the needle of the Power Section Test Box to indicate ZERO.
CAUTION
REMEMBER TO WAIT AT LEAST 30 SECONDS BEFORE

TAKING ANY READINGS AFTER MAKING INTERCEPT
ADJUSTMENTS.
87. After needle of Power Section Test Box indicates ZERO, observe that upper OUTPUT
METER of Radio Coupler Test Box indicates ZERO.
88. Refer to Paragraph 5-17 and set radio gain of coupler as outlined in Paragraph 5-17, Page
5-30 of this manual prior to completing the Roll Threshold Adjustment Procedure in the following
paragraph.
5-9. ROLL THRESHOLD ADJUSTMENT FOR ALTIMATIC IIIC.
Remove the base plate from the bottom of the amplifier to gain access to the roll threshold
adjustment potentiometer.
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ISSUED:
11/25/74
5-21
CAUTION
bench set-up to 12-volt configuration until Threshold Adjustment
Procedure is completed. Verify all switches are returned to the
1. Disconnect
the AMP connector CD-20 from the rear of the console and set the console
aside.
position.
find the (14 or 28-volt) SLIDE SWITCH.Place this switch in the 14-volt position.
5. Place the DIRECTIONAL GYRO slide switch, located on lower left of Console Substitute
Test Box, in the UP or D.G. position.
"RES" position.
7. Ascertain the DIRECTIONAL GYRO SELECTOR KNOB, located on lower right hand
corner of Gyro Substitute Test Box, is in the ZERO or straight "UP" position.
10. Rotate the ROLL TRIM KNOB on Console Substitute Test Box as required to center the
needle on the Power Section Test Box to ZERO.
CLOCKWISE for a one (1) degree right bank.
13. Rotate the LARGE VERNIER CONTROL KNOB on Gyro Substitute Test Box,
COUNTERCLOCKWISEfor a one (1) degree left bank.
readings obtained and refer to Table V-I for correct voltage settings.
15. If voltage setting is correct proceed to next step. If voltage setting is incorrect find the Roll
Threshold Adjustment Potentiometer, located on the lower section of the amplifier printed circuit board
(refer to Figure 5-2), and adjust to obtain an average of the voltage settings listed in Table V-I by repeating
Steps 11 thru 14.
16. Rotate the Power Section Test Box Selector Knob COUNTERCLOCKWISE to the center or
"OFF" position.
Box to the "OFF" position.
18. Refer to the following paragraph for the Pitch Bench Set-up.
5-22
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ISSUED: 11/25/74

5-10. PITCH BENCH SET-UP FOR ALTIMATIC IIIC.
1. Disconnect the AMP connector CD-20 from the Console Substitute Test Box and connect it
to the console.
2. Unplug CD-47 connector attached to the face of the Power Section Test Box Amplifier
receptacle. Set aside the CD-47 that was removed and in its place install the 4-pin male CD-16 connector.
3. Plug the 5-pin female CD-10 connector into the 5-pin male connector on right hand side of
the Console Substitute Test Box.
4. Rotate the LARGE VERNIER CONTROL KNOB on the Gyro Substitute Test Box to read
zero on the BOTTOM SCALE labeled PITCH DEGREES.
5. Immediately below the vernier control knob, find a SLIDE SWITCH labeled ROLL and
PITCH. Place this switch in the "DOWN" or PITCH position.
6. Ascertain that the VOLTAGE SELECTOR SWITCHES of all the components are in the
same position (14 or 28-volts DC) as the bench power supply. This will insure proper autopilot operation
and prevent damage to the components.
7. Engage the ALTIMATIC IIIC by pushing the ROLL ENGAGE SWITCH, on the console, to
the "ON" position. DO NOT EXPECT SOLENOID LIGHT TO GLOW.
8. Push PITCH ENGAGE SWITCH, located on the console, to the "ON" position and observe
solenoid light, located on the face of the Power Section Test Box, glows. If light glows, proceed with Step
15.
a.
If solenoid light does not glow, recheck that CD-16 connector is installed in the
receptacle on the face of the Power Section Test Box labeled Amplifier.
b.
If solenoid light does not glow, recheck power supply voltage and wiring harness for
correct connections.
c.
If solenoid light still does not glow with cables properly connected and proper voltage
applied, turn off power supply and proceed with next step.
10. Remove the AMP connector CD-20 from the rear of the console and plug it into the CD-20
receptacle located on the top left corner of Console Substitute Test Box.
11. Immediately to the right of the AMP connector CD-20 find a 14 or 28-volt SLIDE SWITCH.
Ascertain the switch is in the proper voltage position to agree with both the voltage selector switch on top
plate of amplifier and the selector switch on the lower left corner of the Power Section Test Box.
12. Reapply voltage from power supply and place power selector switch on lower left hand side
of Console Substitute Test Box to the UP or "ON" position. Observe solenoid light now glows on Power
Section Test Box.
NOTE
NOT glow, replace autopilot AMPLIFIER.
l 3. Place the POWER SELECTOR SWITCH, located on the lower left hand corner of the
14. Unplug the AMP connector CD-20 attached to the Console Substitute Test Box and connect
it to the CD-20 receptacle on the rear of the console.
15. Rotate the selector knob, located on the face of the Power Section Test Box, full
CLOCKWISE to the "RES" position.
16. Make sure LARGE VERNIER CONTROL KNOB on Gyro Substitute Test Box is reading
ZERO on the BOTTOM SCALE labeled PITCH DEGREES.
17. Rotate the PITCH COMMAND DISC up on AltiMatic Console, for a full DOWN command
and observe needle of Power Section Test Box deflects LEFT.
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ISSUED: 11/25/74
5-23
18. Rotate the PITCH COMMAND DISC down for a full UP command and observe needle of
Power Section Test Box deflects to the RIGHT.
19. Recenter PITCH COMMAND DISC so that the indice calls for a level attitude.
20. With small slot head screwdriver, adjust the FIFTH POTENTIOMETER from the left and
located directly below the trim meter on the console to center the needle on the Power Section Test Box to
ZERO. (Refer to Figure 5-1.)
NOTE
Keep in mind you MUST WAIT 30 SECONDS for the autopilot to
digest any new information.
COUNTERCLOCKWISE to indicate 7 degrees nose down, reading BOTTOM SCALE labeled PITCH
DEGREES.
22. Rotate PITCH COMMANDDISC UP for a full "DOWN" command.
23. With a small slot head screwdriver adjust the FOURTH POTENTIOMETER from the left,
CLOCKWISE to indicate 10 degrees nose up reading BOTTOM SCALE labeled PITCH DEGREES.
25. Rotate PITCH COMMANDDISC down for a full "UP" command.
26. With a small slot head screwdriver adjust the SIXTH POTENTIOMETER from the left,
27. Push the ALT engage switch, on the console, to the "ON" position.
COUNTERCLOCKWISE until the needle of the Power Section Test Box returns to ZERO.
29. Rotate PITCH COMMAND DISC down for a full "UP" command and then UP for a full
lage
"DOWN" command and note little change occurs on Power Section Test Box meter. Should a
amount
of needle movement be present during pitch command disc movement recheck ALT ENGAGE SWITCH,
located on the console, is in the ON position. (If a large amount of needle movement is still present during
pitch command disc movement, replace console.) Recenter pitch command disc.
30. Push all console switches to the "OFF" position.
31. Refer to the following paragraph for Pitch Threshold Adjustment Procedure.
5-11. PITCH THRESHOLD ADJUSTMENT FOR ALTIMATIC IIIC.
Remove the cover plate from the top of the amplifier to gain access to the Pitch Threshold
Adjustment Potentiometer. (Refer to Figure 5-2.)
CAUTION
bench set-up to 12-volt configuration until Threshold Adjustment
Procedure is completed. Verify all switches are returned to the
5-24
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ISSUED:
11/25/74

aside.
position.
find the (14 or 28-volt) SLIDE SWITCH. Place this switch in the 14-volt position.
5. Place the ALT CONTROL slide switch located on lower left of Console Substitute Test
box, in the UP or Alt Control position.
6. Place the ALTITUDE CONTROL KNOB, located on upper right of Console Substitute Test
Box, to the straight up or 12 o'clock position.
7. Rotate the SELECTOR KNOB, lower center of Power Section Test Box, CLOCKWISE to
the "RES" position.
ZERO position on the BOTTOM SCALE labeled PITCH DEGREES.
9. Immediagely below the large vernier control knob on Gyro Substitute Test Box, find a
SLIDE SWITCH labeled ROLL and PITCH. Place this switch in the "DOWN" or PITCH position.
l 1. Rotate the PITCH TRIM KNOB on Console Substitute Test Box as required to center the
needle on Power Section Test Box to ZERO.
12. Rotate
LARG VERNIER CONTROL KNOB on Gyro Substitute Test Box
COUNTERCLOCKWISE to indicate three-quarters (3/4) degree nose down, reading BOTTOM SCALE
labeled PITCH DEGREES.
14. Rotate the LARGE VERNIER CONTROL KNOB on Console Substitute Test Box
CLOCKWISE to indicate three-quarters (3/4) degree nose up, reading BOTTOM SCALE labeled PITCH
DEGREES.
15. Observe voltmeter on Power Section Test Box and record meter readine. Average the meter
readings obtained and refer to Table V-Il for correct voltage settings.
16. If voltage setting is correct proceed to next step. If voltage setting is incorrect find the Pitch
Threshold Adjustment Potentiometer, located on upper section of amplifier printed circuit board, (refer to
Figure 5-2) and adjust to obtain an average of the voltage setting listed in Table V-II by repeating Steps 12
thru 15.
17. Place the POWER SELECTOR SWITCH on Console Substitute Test Box to the "OFF"
position.
18. Disconnect test equipment and associated cables and reinstall the components
in the
airplane.
19. Proceed with ground checks.and flight adjustments.

5-12. ALTIMATIC IIIC GROUND CHECKS WITH RADIO COUPLER (ROLL).
in-flight adjustments.
2. Center the roll command knob and position HDG and ROLL engage switches to the "OFF"
position.
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ISSUED: 11/25/74
5-25
4. Place the airplane control wheel to approximately neutral aileron or level flight position.
Push ROLL engage switch to the "ON" position. Move control wheel right and left to check for servo
engagement.
5. Rotate the Roll Command Knob to the right and to the left and observe that the airplane
control wheel moves in the correct direction. (The airplane control wheel can be stopped in any position
and will not return to level position by centering the roll command knob. The airplane wheel will remain
stationary at the time the roll command knob is approximately centered or at its zero electrical output
position.)
6. Center the heading bug of the directional gyro or horizontal situation indicator and push
console HDG SWITCH "ON." WITH THE CONSOLE HDG SWITCH PUSHED TO THE "ON" POSITION,
THE ROLL COMMAND KNOB ON THE CONSOLE BECOMESINOPERATIVE.
7. Set the heading bug for a heading change to the right, observe control wheel should turn
right. Make same check to the left. Return the heading bug to existing aircraft heading.
8. Turn on number one (1) NAV receiver and tune in a local OMNI station.
9. Observe warning flag on face of OMNI converter or HSI retracts from view. (If flag does not
fully retract, this indicates an unusable OMNI signal is present.) Before proceeding, a usuable OMNI signal
must be present or utilize an approved OMNI simulator.
10. Rotate the OBS knob (or the CRS knob of the HSI) to center the CDI needle and provide
an on course signal with a "TO" indication.
NOTE
On installations incorporating the DG-360 the A/P Radio Course

Arrow is placed on the heading corresponding to the radial
selected by the OBS.
11. Place radio coupler in omni mode. Rotate OBS knob (or the CRS knob of the HSI) to cause
the course deviation indicator to move to the right and to the left and observe that the control wheel moves
to the same side as the Course Deviation Needle.
12. Repeat Steps 8 thru 11 with number two (2) NAV receiver on systems incorporating the
standard DG or the DG-360.
13. Push ROLL ENGAGE SWITCH to the "OFF" position. Rotate the control wheel right and
'
left and observe that the servo disengaged.
5-13. GROUND CHECK PITCH.
1. Plug the CD-18 lead from attitude horizon into the CD-18 plug of the Gyro Substitute Test
Box.
2. Place the roll pitch selector switch on Gyro Substitute Test Box to the PITCH position.
3. Rotate the large vernier control knob on Gyro Substitute Test Box to read ZERO on
BOTTOM SCALE labeled PITCH DEGREES.
4. Pull AUTOMATIC PITCH TRIM CIRCUIT BREAKER and/or place panel mounted trim
switch to the OUT position.
5. Turn ON airplane Master Switch.
6. Push roll engage switch "ON" and stop control wheel rotation by adjusting ROLL
COMMAND KNOB.
7. Center trim meter on console by rotating pitch command disc.
8 Push pitch engage switch ON. Move control column fore and aft and note that pitch servo
engaged. Listen for audible sound.
9. Rotate PITCH COMMAND full up and observe control column moves aft.
10. Rotate PITCH COMMANDDISC full down and observe control column moves forward.
-
5-26
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ISSUED:
11/25/74

NOTE
On the PA-31 series airplane, when checking the pitch portion of
the autopilot on the ground, due to the weight of the elevator and
the down spring in the elevator control system, with the pitch
servo engaged, the pitch servo clutch will slip instead of moving
the elevator.
11. Rotate PITCH COMMANDDISC to center position.
12. Push pitch engage switch OFF. Move control column fore and aft and note that pitch servo
disengaged.
13. Push TRIM CIRCUIT BREAKER and/or the panel mounted trim switch to the IN or ON
position.
14. Push the roll engage switch and the pitch engage switch ON.
15. Rotate pitch command disc for full NOSE UP command and hold control wheel from
moving aft. Pitch trim should trim nose UP after a slight delay and trim ineter should deflect up.
16. Rotate pitch command disc for full NOSE DOWN command and hold control wheel from
moving forward. Pitch trim should trim nose DOWN after a slight delay and trim meter should deflect
down.
17. Recenter pitch command disc.
18. Depress the disengage button incorporated in the trim switch and move the trim switch
forward. Autopilot should disengage and pitch trim should trim nose DOWN.
19. With the disengage button depressed move the switch aft. Pitch trim should trim nose UP.
20. The trim switch should be inoperative in both directions if the disengage button is not
depressed.
21. Disconnect the CD-18 lead from the Gyro Substitute Test Box and connect it to the
artificial horizon.
NOTE
PA-31 series airplanes ONLY. In the event it cannot be determined
by an audible sound that the pitch servo motor is running in
response to pitch signals from the pitch command disc, it will be
necessary to remove the center floor panel. When removing panel
on PA-31P airplanes, handle panel carefully to avoid damaging
panel sealing gasket. Ascertain panel sealing gasket is clean and
undamaged prior to installation to prevent cabin pressure leaks.
Connect the CD-16 connector to the amplifier connector on the
Power Section Test Box and the CD-16 extension to the servo and
the servo connector also on the Power Section Test Box. Place the
selector switch on the Power Section Test Box to the MTR
position. Check for pitch amplifier output on the meter of the
Power Section Test Box and verify the servo motor is operating
when performing Steps 8 thru 12.
SET-UP PROCEDURES
REVISED: 10/16/81
5-27
PIPER ALTIMATIC
IIIC SERVICE MANUAL
5-14. ALTIMATIC IIIC FLIGHT ADJUSTMENTS

WITH RADIO COUPLER (ROLL).
1. The aircraft shall be loaded to or near its AFT-C.G. LIMIT for flight set-up to assure all flight
Previous Altimatic series Autopilots do not require this loading. (Refer to Flight Manual for proper
power settings.)
NOTE
For adjusting descent, 19 inches of mercury manifold pressure
must be used on all airplanes except the PA-31-310, PA-31-325
and PA-31-350 which must be adjusted at 20 inches of mercury
and the PA-31P which must be adjusted at 25 inches of mercury.
2.
MAKE CERTAIN RUDDER TRIM IS ADJUSTED TO CENTER THE BALL. IF
RUDDER IS INCORRECTLY TRIMMED, THE ALTIMATIC WILL FLY THE AIRPLANE WITH A
WING LOW TO COMPENSATE FOR OUT OF TRIM RUDDER.
NOTE
SMOOTH
AIR IS REQUIRED.
Set the coupler selector switch in the OMNI mode.

Set the heading bug to the aircraft heading.
Push roll engage switch "ON." Depress RED BUTTON on rear of coupler and push HDG
engage switch ON. Keep coupler switch depressed during next adjustment.
Allow airplane roll attitude to stabilize and if necessary, adjust for straight and level flight
6.
(wings level and ball centered). To do this, adjust the potentiometer located inside the SECOND HOLE
from the left. After each adjustment, allow the airplane attitude to stabilize and observe it for two minutes
to insure airplane is maintaining level flight. Release coupler adjustment switch.
7.
Place COUPLER SELECTOR SWITCH in the HEADING mode and observe that airplane
maintains selected heading
2 degrees.
8.
Rotate HEADING BUG 150 degrees left and observe airplane bank angle. Adjust left bank
screw of console to obtain 20 degree bank. Rotate ADJUSTMENT SCREW clockwise to increase bank
angle.
3.
4.
5.
NOTE
Keep heading bug at least 25 degrees left of directional
HEADING until adjustment is complete.
gyro
9.
Rotate HEADING BUG 150 degrees right and observe airplane bank angle. Adjust right
bank screw of console to obtain 20 degree bank. Rotate ADJUSTMENT SCREW clockwise to increase bank
angle.
5-28
SET-UP PROCEDURES
REVISED: 10/16/81
PIPER ALTIMATIC
IIIC SERVICE MANUAL
NOTE
Keep heading bug at least 25 degrees right of directional
HEADING until adjustment is complete.
gyro
10. Turn on radio and rotate the OBS knob (or the CRS knob of the HSI) to deflect CDI needle
full left.
NOTE
Full left needle deflection must be maintained until adjustment is
complete. This can be accomplished by being at least 20 miles
from the Omni station and flying approximately to or from the
station.
I1. Push HDG SWITCH "OFF"and set HEADING BUG 45 degrees right of center index. Place
in OMNI mode.
12. Push HDG SWITCH "ON" and allow the airplane heading to stabilize for 90 seconds.
13. Adjust LEFT INTE RCE PT SCREW on side of radio coupler as necessary to stabilize heading
bug 45 degrees right of center index. Turn adjustment screw CLOCKWISE to increase intercept angle.
Allow 90 seconds for HEADING to stabilize after each adjustment.
COUPLER
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ADDED: 10/16/81
5-28a
PIPER ALTIMATIC
IIIC SERVICE MANUAL
5-28b
LEFT BLANK
Left Intercept
Angle
Angle
Right Intercept
Radio Gain
T
T
+
il
MITCHELLINDUSTRIES
MINERAL WELLS,TEXAS BB
RADIOCOUPLER ii
Figure 5-6. Radio Coupler Adjustment Points

14. To adjust right intercept angle, repeat
and heading bug 45 degrees to left of center index.
Steps 10 thru 13 with omni needle deflected full right
15. Center CDI needle on a "TO" bearing and set heading bug to match omni bearing. Allow
airplane to fly to the omni station and observe that CDI needle stays CENTERED. If CDI needle does not
maintain center, adjust ROLL centering toward CDI needle. Repeat Steps 7, 8 and 9.
5-15. ALTIMATIC IIIC FLIGHT ADJUSTMENT
PITCH.
The aircraft shall be loaded to or nearit's AFT-C.G. LIMIT for flight set-up to assure all flight
l.
Previous Altimatic series Autopilots do not require this loading. (Refer to Flight Manual for proper
power settings.)
-
NOTE
SMOOTH
AIR IS REQUIRED.
2.
For adjusting descent, 19 inches of mercury manifold pressure must be used on all airplanes
the PA-31-3l0. PA-31-325 and PA-31-350 which must be adjusted at 20 inches of mercury and the
PA-3\P which must be adjusted at 25 inches of mercury.
Push roll engage switch ON, adjust roll command knob as required for wings level flieht.
3.
4
Rotate pitch command disc as required to center trim meter.
Observe existing altitude and push ALT engage switch ON. Allow aircraft to stabilize and
5.
observe that aircraft is holding the same altitude at which the ALT hold function was engaged. If aircraft
does not hold engage altitude, adjust the FIFTH POTENTIOMETER
from the left, on the console. as
required to maintain existing altitude.
except
Turning potentiometer
NOTE
clockwise will increase altitude.
6. Push pitch engage switch OFF. Observe existing altitude and push ALT engage switch ON
and allow aircraft to stabilize and observe that aircraft is holding the same altitude at which the ALT hold
function was engaged. Repeat Steps 5 and 6 until correct results are obtained.
SET-UP PROCEDURES
REVISED: 10/16/81
5-29
7. Center the pitch command disc and push ALT engage switch OFF.
8. Rotate pitch command disc, if necessary, to maintain level flight. After aircraft is stabilized
in level flight, observe that pitch command disc is centered
1/8".
9. Reduce the power setting per appropriate airplane Flight Manual and rotate the Pitch
Command Disc UP for a full DOWN command. After the aircraft has stabilized in descent, adjust the
FOURTH POTENTIOMETER from the left, on the console, for a 7 degree descent. (5 degrees on PA-32
and PA-34-200T.)
CAUTION
It may be necessary to reduce power to prevent excessive speed.
10. Advance the power setting per appropriate airplane Flight Manual and rotate pitch
command disc DOWN for a full UP command. After the aircraft has stabilized in climb, adjust the SIXTH
POTENTIOMETER from the left, on the console, for a 10 degree climb. (7 degrees on PA-32 and
PA-34-200T.)
11. Recenter the pitch command disc.
12. This completes the Flight Set-up.
5-16. ALTIMATIC IIIC GROUND CHECK (OPTIONAL YAW DAMPER).
1. Level the aircraft laterally using a level or bubble protractor. Refer to appropriate Airframe
Service Manual for leveling instructions.
2. Gain access to yaw damper amplifier and loosen locknut on adjustment potentiometer.
3. Turn ON airplane Master Switch.
4. Push panel mounted yaw damper engage switch ON.
5. Observe system for rudder pedal movement or slowly running rudder servo.
6. Adjust centering potentiometer as required to stop rudder servo movement.
7. Recycle the system two or three times to insure servo movement is completely cancelled.
8. After adjustment is complete secure locknut on potentiometer.
NOTE
Any movement of the aircraft, or moving around in the aircraft
with the yaw system engaged, can cause the rate gyro in the yaw
damper to send a corrective signal to the servo. This signal will
cause the servo to run unintentionally, so during the adjustment
procedure all movement should be kept to a minimum.
9. With the yaw damper system engaged, go to the rear of the aircraft and move the tail of the
aircraft, laterally back and forth. Observe rudder action. The yaw damper should attempt to move the
rudder opposite to the yaw direction.
5-17. CHECK AND ADJUSTING RADIO GAIN.
Although the radio gain on all couplers from the factory is preset, the following procedures are for
bench adjustment of the radio coupler gain. For omni converters with standard ARINC meter outputs, it
will be necessary to set up the autopilot on the bench as per paragraph 5-8 for the AltiMatic IIIC. After the
equipment is connected and functioning, perform the following adjustments and steps.
5-30
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ISSUED: 11/25/74
NOTE
The Piper Omni/Localizer Coupler presents a high impedance load
(greater than 10K ohms) to the radio installation. Therefore, it
will not "load down" the omni converter,
Adjusting Coupler Gain for Standard ARINC.
1. VERY SLOWLYrotate the RADIO SIGNAL SUBSTITUTE KNOB in the direction required
to cause the omni meter needle to move slowly back toward center.
2. While omni meter needle is traveling slowly toward center, observe upper output meter
(directly above omni meter on Coupler Test Box) and note the moment the upper output meter begins to
respond.
3. The instant the upper output meter needle shows response, stop rotation of the RADIO
SIGNAL SUBSTITUTE KNOB.
4. Read the lower omni needle and determine what percentage on the dial was reached when
upper output meter needle shows response.
a.
NOTE
At 100% (+ one meter division) the upper output meter should
just begin to move. Adjust the radio gain screw on the coupler
until the above indication can be obtained.
5. If radio gain has been adjusted, recheck both intercept angles and adjust if necessary.
6. Upon completion of radio gain adjustment, refer to Paragraph 5-9, page 5-21 of this manual
for Roll Threshold Adjustment Procedure.
b.
Adjusting Coupler Gain for unknown Omni Converter: It is necessary to determine the output
signal capabilities of the unknown omni converter as compared to a standard ARINC signal.
1. Remove the airplane cable CD-34 connector from the rear of the radio coupler in the
airplane.
2. Plug this airplane cable CD-34 plug into the CD-34 connector located on the top right
corner of Radio Coupler Test Box labeled "RADIO."
NOTE
The CD-34 extension cable can be used to make this connection.

3. Make sure RADIO SIGNAL SUBSTITUTE
KNOB on Coupler Test Box is in the "IN"
position.
4. Turn on Master Switch.
5. Turn on VOR Radio.
6. Tune in a local OMNI station.
CAUTION
Make sure you are receiving a strong usable OMNI signal before
taking any readings. It is good practice to use an OMNI signal
generator.
7. Center CDI on OMNI set with OBS by rotating
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ISSUED: 11/25/74
OBS with a "TO" reading.
5-31
8. Note OMNI meter needle on Radio Coupler Test Box is centered.

9. Rotate the OBS of the radio enough to drive CDI just to the end of its travel (off scale) to a
full deflection.
10. Read the OMNI meter needle on the Coupler Test Box and note the reading in percent.
11. Turn off airplane Master Switch and remove Coupler Test Box from airplane.
12. Proceed with the following steps if the roll set-up has been completed. If the roll has not
been set up, complete set-up at this time.
13. After completing roll set-up, pull OUT the RADIO SIGNAL SUBSTITUTE KNOB on the
Coupler Test Box.
14. Place the switch on the radio coupler to the LOCALIZER/NORM position.
15. Place roll switch "ON."
16. Place heading switch "OFF."
17. Place DG to "ZERO."
18. Rotate the RADIO SIGNAL SUBSTITUTE KNOB right or left until OMNI meter needle
indicates the same percentage figure as read in the airplane.
19. Wait three minutes to insure Coupler Memory Bank is filled.
20. VERY SLOWLYrotate the RADIO SIGNAL SUBSTITUTE KNOB in the direction required
to cause the OMNI meter needle to move slowly back towards center.
21. While OMNI meter needle is traveling slowly towards center, observe upper output meter
and note the moment the upper output meter needle begins to respond.
22. The instant the upper output meter needle shows response, stop rotation of the radio signal
substitute knob.
23. Read the lower OMNI meter needle and determine what percentage on the dial was reached
when upper output meter needle shows response.
NOTE
Adjust radio gain on coupler so that upper output meter needle
responds within l lower meter division of the percentage as
originally read on airplane radio.
24. If coupler gain has been adjusted, recheck both intercept angles and adjust if necessary.
5-18. PIPER OMNI/LOCALIZER COUPLER MODIFICATION (lC388 SERIES).
The Piper Omni/Localizer Coupler is used in conjunction with various configurations of avionics
equipment. Depending on the type avionics equipment installed in the airplane, the coupler should be
modified as follows:
When the coupler is used in conjunction with the VOA4,
a.
and/or other converters
or
20
where
150 microamps, modify as follows:
1. Identify the IC388 coupler as "F" mod or higher (letter F at end of serial nos.).
2. Remove eight screws and cover of radio coupler.
3. Locate clipped jumper across 10K resistor. (Refer to Figure 5-7.)
4. Using small soldering iron, carefully re-solder jumper. (Exercise extreme caution to prevent
inadvertent damage with soldering iron.)
5. Replace cover and secure with eight screws.
b.
When the coupler is used in conjunction with VOA-40 or VOA-50 and/or other converters where
10
150 millivolts, the jumper is clipped so the 10K resistor is in the circuit.
-8
-5,
-9
5-32
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ISSUED:
11/25/74
Figure 5-7. Piper Omni/Localizer Coupler Modification Detail

SET-UP PROCEDURES
ISSUED: 11/25/74
5-33
TPGROUND
TP-2
TP-COMMON
(R-4)
INPUT
LEVEL
RESOLVER
PHASE
Figure 5-8. NAV Converter (lC707) Adjustment Potentiometers

5-34
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ISSUED:
11/25/74

5-19. NAV CONVERTER (lC707) ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE.
The Navigation Converter (lC707) is designed to accept any VHF radio receiver omni composite signal
VRMS and 3.0 VRMS signal level and any standard ARINC resolver signal level as specified by
between
ARINC Report No. 407-1 for OBS resolvers. The IC707 can provide sufficient output, isolated from
ground but not necessarily from the deviation output circuit, to drive a total of 4 flag alarm movements of
1000 OHMS, 250ua from the VOR/LOC function. The flag alarm output requires no adjustment when
adding one to four loads. The deviation indicator output circuits will provide a suitable signal, isolated from
ground, to drive 5 localizer 1000 OHM 1504)-150 micro ampere deviation indicator movements in parallel
with suitable service adjustments to set proper course sensitivity independently on localizer and VOR
functions, to the particular standardized course width. The TO/FROM circuits of the 1C707 is capable of
delivering 200 micro amperes ( 20%) to each of two paralleled TO/FROM indicators, each of 200 OHMS
15%. No adjustment is required to vary TO/FROM loads.
.3
CAUTION
The EDO-AIRE 1C707 VOR/LOC Converter Maintenance Manual
AK423 should be utilized in conjunction with the Alignment
Procedure outlined in the following paragraphs.
a.
1C707 OMNI/LOCALIZER
CONVERTER SET UP PROCEDURE. (Refer to Figure 5-8.)

NOTE
TIC-12A VOR Simulator Generator

Required Test Equipment
or, IFR-401L VOR Simulator Generator or Equivalent.
-
1. Connect 1C707 Omni Converter to Navigation Receiver and Deviation Indicator.

2. Supply 28/14 VDC to Pin 13 (standard A/C power).
3. With converter connected and all equipment set up for standard VOR operation, apply a
standard VOR test signal from a TIC-T-12A Omni Simulator (or equivalent) to the antenna terminals of the
navigation receiver. (Use simulator operating procedure to accomplish task.)
4. Verify that all equipment is operating before proceeding. (See Note)
CAUTION
Test Point Common is approximately 6 volts above ground. Do
ground the test point with scope or meter
not inadvertently
ground lead.
NOTE
When using VOM set level at 1.41 VRMS between TP-1 or TP-2
and Test Point Common.
When using scope set level at 4 VP-P. From TP-ground use either
AC coupling or D.C. coupling. TP-1 and TP-2 have approximately
6 V.D.C. component.
5. With a standard VOR signal applied adjust R-1 VOR receiver (input level) for 4.0 VP-P or
1.41 VRMS at Test Point 1. See Figure 5-8. (See Note)
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ISSUED: 11/25/74
5-35

6. Check for 4 VP-P or 1.41 VRMS 15% at Test Point 2. See Figure 5-8. (See Note)
0"TO"
0.
and resolver to
7. Set generator to
Adjust R + 2 (Omni Centering) for zero on
deviation indicator. Access to omni centering adjustment on side of the converter.
8. Set generator to 0 "FROM." Adjust R-3 (Phase Detector Bal) to correct for 50% of the
error on deviation indicator. Access to phase detector adjustment on side of the converter.
9. Repeat Steps 7 and 8 until the generator can be changed from 0 TO, to 0 FROM with no
error indicated on deviation indicator.
10. Set generator to 90. Set resolver to 90. Adjust R-4 (Resolver 0) to reduce deviation
indicator reading approximately 80%. Access to resolver adjustment on side of the converter.
11. Repeat Steps 7 and 10 until no error is indicated in either step.
12. Recheck Step 5.
0
13. Set generator to
"TO." Set resolver until deviation indicator just reaches full scale
deflection. The resolver should read 11 1 (minor adjustment of input level control may be made to
accomplish above but reading in Step 5 should not vary more than + 20%).
14. Vary resolver from 80 to 280. "TO
FROM" should indicate "TO."
260
100
to
"TO FROM" should indicate "FROM." (The above
a.
Vary resolver from
may also be accomplished by setting the resolver to 0and varying the generator to the
1
same bearings indicated.) Check VOR error. Limit
at any point.
15. Delete 9960 Hz. Check for NAV flag in full view.
a.
Delete 30 Hz. Check for NAV flag in full view.
I 6. Set NAV receiver to localizer frequency.
17. Set up simulator for standard localizer signal as defined by simulator operating manual.
18. With modulation depth control set to 0 db adjust R-5 (90 Hz level) or R-6 (150 Hz level) for
zero deflection on the deviation indicator. Access to the 90 Hz and 150 Hz adjustment can be found on the
side of the converter box.
19. Set modulation depth control to + 4 db. Deviation indicator should deflect 60%.
20. If deflection exceeds 60%, set modulation depth control to zero db and simultaneously
decrease R-5 (90 Hz level) and R-6 (150 Hz level) 2 or 3 turns to maintain zero deviation on indicator. (If
less than 60% increase 90 and 150 Hz.)
21. Repeat Steps 19 and 20 until 4 db modulation depth gives 60% deflection.
22.
DB modulation depth should give 60% right deflection. Set modulation depth to zero.
23. "TO FROM" should indicate "TO."
24. Delete 90 Hz; NAV Flag should be in full view, "TO FROM" should be out of view and
full left deflection.
25. Delete 150 Hz. Indications same as Step 24, except with full right deflection.
26. Set modulation depth control to +4 db. "TO FROM" should start to indicate "TO."
27. Decrease the simulator signal level until 4 db modulation depth gives 30% deflection. NAV
Flag should be in partial view.
-
-4
NOTE
When OBS is 180 out of phase with the deviation test signal
reverse pins 20 and 2 on converter connector CD-112.
5-36
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ISSUED: 11/25/74

5-20. ADJUSTMENTS OF SLAVING SUB-SYSTEM.
The following adjustments of the slaving sub-system must be made any time a component is replaced
in the system or if large heading errors exist in the system. A compass rose must be available to accurately
determine the actual airplane heading or a Master Sighting Compass may be used. Make duplicates of the
sample charts in Figure 5-9 to record pertinent information required during the following adjustment
procedures.
CAUTION
All Flux Sensor mounting hardware and other hardware within
one to two feet of the Flux Sensor must be of non-magnetic
material to reduce the stray magnetic fields in the area of the Flux
Sensor.
NOTE
serviceman must gain access to the Flux Sensor and
North-South/East-West Corrector as outlined in Section III of this
manual, Removal and Installation, for the type of airplane being
The
serviced.
1. Taxi the airplane to the compass rose and align the airplane on 0 degrees heading, utilizing
the compass rose or a Master Sighting Compass to arrive at the heading.
2. Record the actual magnetic heading on the deviation chart.
3. Record the Horizontal Situation Indicator azimuth card reading on the deviation chart.
4. Determine and record the deviation between the actual magnetic reading and the azimuth
card reading. If the azimuth card reads high, the deviation is plus.
5. Taxi the airplane for an East Heading, utilizing the compass rose or a Master Sighting
Compass to arrive at the heading.
9. Taxi the airplane for a South Heading, utilizing the compass rose or a Master Sighting
13. Taxi the airplane for a West Heading, utilizing the compass rose or a Master Sighting
17. Plot the deviations on the initial deviation graph.
18. If the deviation pattern is not centered around zero, rotate the Flux Sensor clockwise for
minus deviations or counterclockwise for plus deviations. Plot final deviations on the Final Deviation
Graph.
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ISSUED: 11/25/74
5-37
19. Taxi the airplane for a 0 degree heading, utilizing the compass rose or a Master Sighting
20. Adjust the North-South Corrector Adjustment (refer to Figure 5-10) by rotating the
potentiometer (clockwise for minus or counterclockwise for plus deviations) in the correct direction for
one half the difference between North and South deviations. Record the new deviation for North and
South on the Final Deviation Graph.
21. Taxi the airplane for an East Heading, utilizing the compass rose or a Master Sighting
22. Adjust the East-West Corrector Adjustment (refer to Figure 5-10) by rotating the
potentiometer (clockwise for minus or counterclockwise for plus deviations) in the correct direction for
one half the difference between East and West deviations. Record the new deviation for East and West on
the Final Deviation Graph.
23. Taxi the airplane for a South Heading, utilizing the compass rose or a Master Sighting
Compass to arrive at the heading. Record new deviation on Final Deviation Graph.
24. Taxi the airplane for a West Heading, utilizing the compass rose or a Master Sighting
Compass to arrive at the heading. Record new deviation on Final Deviation Graph.
25. The deviations should now center around the zero reference line of the Final Deviation
Graph. If the error exceeds 2 degrees, the complete procedure must be reaccomplished.
DEVIATION CHART
APPROX MAG.
HEADING
ACTUAL MAG.
HEADING
AZIMUTH CARD
DEVIATION
READING
mm
NORTH
EAST
SOUTH
WEST
GRAPH
EAST SOUTH WEST
FINAL DEVIATION GRAPH

EAST SOUTH WEST
INITIAL DEVIATION
NORTH
NORTH
+10
+
+ 4
...
....--
----
----
--
*2
0
-
2
4
-10
Figure 5-9. Sample Deviation Charts

5-38
SET-UP PROCEDURES
REVISED: 4/15/77
COMPENSATOR
(REMOVE COVER FROM 1C714 AND/OR DUST
PLUGS FROM 1C722 SLAVING AMPLIFIER
FOR ACCESS TO COMPENSATOR POTENTIOMETERS)
Figure 5-10. Slaving Amplifier, N-S/E-W Corrector Adjustment Potentiometers

5-21. ALTIMATIC IIIC WITH OPTIONAL KING KCS-55 COMPASS SYSTEM ALIGNMENT
PROCEDURE.
The AltiMatic IIIC may incorporate the optional KCS-55 compass system in lieu of the EDO-AIRE
Mitchell compass system. The KCS-55 compass system utilizes a KA-52 autopilot adapter which requires
special adjustment to obtain correct bank and intercept angles. The following paragraphs provide the
information to accomplish the required adjustment procedures.
The 1C388-3 Radio Coupler is utilized with this system as it will couple any ARINC compass system
to the autopilot. Should the KA-52 autopilot adapter require replacement this procedure must be
accomplished. If the KA-52 is not adjusted properly, on existing systems, the bank and intercept angles will
be something less than the recommended setting. Therefore, this procedure should be utilized prior to
setting the bank and intercept angles of the autopilot.
a.
KA-52 AUTOPILOT ADAPTER ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE. (Refer to Figure 5-12.)

NOTE
Required Test Equipment
Precision Voltmeter and a locally
fabricated In-Line Test Box as shown in Figure 5-11.
-
1. Disconnect the compass system harness connector CD-33 from the radio coupler pigtail
connector CD-33.
2. Install the In-Une Test Box by connecting it in series with the compass system harness
connector CD-33 and the radio coupler pigtail connector CD-33.
3. Position the In-Une Test Box so it is accessible for making voltage measurements.
SET-UP PROCEDURES
REVISED: 4/15/77
5-39

4. Gain access to the KA-52 autopilot adapter as outlined in Section III of this manual,
Removal and Installation, for the type of airplane being serviced.
5. Remove cover from KA-52 autopilot adapter (refer to Figure 5-12) to gain access to the
adjustment potentiometers.
6. Center the roll command knob on the autopilot console and place the Roll engage and HDG
switches
engage
in the "OFF" position.
8. Rotate HDG knob as required to align heading bug with lubber line at top of HSI
(Horizontal Situation Indicator).
9. Rotate CRS knob as required to align the course arrow with lubber line at top of HSI.
10. Place radio coupler selector switch in the HDG mode.
1 1. Push Roll engage and HDG engage switches to the "ON" position.
12. Rotate HDG knob clockwise to displace heading bug 35 degrees to right of lubber line (to
reach maximum signal saturation) on HSI.
13. Connect Precision Voltmeter leads to In-Line Test Box (positive lead to pin A and negative
lead to pin F). Observe, AC voltage reading should be 7.0 volts AC. If voltage reading is incorrect adjust
HDG potentiometer of KA-52 autopilot adapter to obtain correct voltage setting.
14. Rotate HDG knob counterclockwise to displace heading bug 35 degrees to left of lubber line
(to reach maximum signal saturation) on HSI.
15. With Precision Voltmeter still connected to In-Line Test Box as outlined in step 13.
Observe, AC voltage reading should be 7.0 volts AC. If voltage reading is correct proceed to next step.
If voltage reading is incorrect adjust HDG potentiometer of KA-52 autopilot adapter to obtain correct
voltage setting.
16. Rotate HDG knob as required to align heading bug with lubber line at top of HSI and
remove voltmeter leads from In-Line Test Box.
17. Rotate CRS knob as required to displace course arrow at least 90 degrees to the right of the
on course heading.
18. Connect Precision Voltmeter leads to In-Line Test Box (positive lead to pin B and negative
lead to pin C). Observe, AC voltage reading should be 7.0 .2 volts AC. If voltage reading is incorrect adjust
CRS potentiometer of KA-52 autopilot adapter to obtain correct voltage setting.
19. Rotate CRS knob as required to displace course arrow at least 90 degrees to the left of the
on course heading.
20. With Precision Voltmeter still connected to In-Line Test Box as outlined in step 18.
Observe, AC voltage reading should be 7.0
volts AC. If voltage is correct proceed to next step. If
voltage reading is incorrect adjust CRS potentiometer of KA-52 autopilot adapter to obtain correct voltage
setting.
21. This completes the alignment procedure for the KA-52 autopilot adapter.
22. Disengage autopilot and shut down airplane engine.
23. Disconnect Precision Voltmeter leads from In-Line Test Box and remove In-Line Test Box
from airplane.
24. Connect KCS-55 harness connector CD-33 to radio coupler pigtail connector CD-33.
25. Install cover on KA-52 autopilot adapter and secure.
26. Refer to paragraph 5-14 for AltiMatic IIIC Flight Adjustment Procedure with Radio Coupler
(Roll).
.2
.2
.2
540
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ADDED: 6/13/75
MALE PINS
MALE CONN.
(AMP)
MALE PINS
e
(B)
(A) (F)COMM.
HDG.
FEMALE CONN
(C)COMA
CRS.
(AMP)
OH
MALE PINS
CD-33
(D) (E)
ROLL
EXCITATION
7 PIN CONN.
(AMP)
CD-33
CD-33
7 PIN CONN.
(AMP)
22
22
22
22
D CD-33
22
22
22
(A) (F)COMM.
HDG.
(D) (E)
ROLL
EXCI TAT ION
(8) (C)COMM
CRS
Figure 5-11. In-Line Test Box (Locally Fabricated)

SET-UP PROCEDURES
ADDED: 6/13/75
5-41
PIPER ALTIMATICIRC SERVICE MANUAL
HEADING ADJUSTMENT
POTENTIOMETER
COURSE
ADJUSTMENT
POTENTIOMETER
Figure 5-12. KA-52 Autopilot Adapter

5-22. YAW DAMPER GROUND CHECK.
The Yaw Damper consists of four components: the Yaw Damper Amplifier (which contains the rate
gyro, electrolytic potentiometer, and the servo amplifier); the Rudder Servo; the Yaw Damper ON-OFF
Switch and Control Wheel disconnect switching; and the interconnecting wiring harness.
The Logic Chart is designed to help locate and isolate, an in-aircraft system problem without
dismantling the system. (Refer to Fig. 5-13 and Fig. 5-14 for Bench Test hook-up and wiring diagrams in
Section VI.)
5-42
SET-UP PROCEDURES
REVISED: 10/16/81
PIPER ALTIMATIC
TABLE V-III. TROUBLE
IIIC SERVICE MANUAL
BLOCK DIAGRAM
ISOLATION
IN AIACRAFT TROUBLESHOOTING
LOGIC CHART
1 Level the aircraft rn roli

2 Obtain access to the Yaw Damper.
3 Turn on atrcraft master switch
4 Press YD annuncl310r Switch
On
If the annunciator
check:
1
1.
2.
1.
Check rudder servo engaged

See note:
Rot
hg
does
for croDer
not
stay on
connechoes
and
Check solenoid engage voilage CD-10 3 gan

bground or use a 660141-2 power section
2. Check wiring per figure 3-6
1. Listen to the unit, you should be able to hear

the Yaw Damper rate gyro running.
hec
1r0A
vo age on the Yaw Damper
flYawnDaamper orr n
serve the rudder for movement

position to the turns
Circuit breaker
TOST the Swi
switch
2.
m op
3. Check Yaw Damoer servo outout CD-"Q3 0;n

C to D. IJse a 66D141-2 aower section test
box set to RES position.
NOTE: Because of nose wheel steering/rudder mterconnect in

to observe me rudder
some aircraft, it may be necessary
servo while it is engaged to be sure it is operating
properly.
saendrn en'tinpsperewsn Yaw Dam-
Titt Yaw Damper to the right

(approx. 5 roll 1.
Yaw Damper applies right rudder.
Press Yaw Damper annunciator

Damper disengage.
Yaw
1.
Don't rotate it in Yaw.

Yaw Damper applies left rudder.
off
Check servo output.
use 660141-2.
2. Check rudder servo.
11 possible
1. See above.
level aircraft and null output to Yaw Damper.

in only one direction,
servo
3. If the
drives
Yaw Damper defective.
Check switen
2. Check centering,
per
figure
3-6 wiring schemattc.
With the airciait leveled in roll; adjus11he pot on the iront of the
1C651-(
Ior a zero output to me Yaw servo motor. Use a
66D141-2 power section or equivalent meter to monitor servo
motor voltage
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ADDED: 10/16/81
5-43
PIPER ALTIMATIC
IIIC SERVICE MANUAL
GND.
TO 66DI41-2
AMPLIFIER INPUT
CD-104
4-PIN PLUG
(AMPHENOLNO.126-215)
----
5-PlN RECEPTACLE
( AMPHENOL NO.126-223)
Figure 5-13. Bench Test Wiring Harness

Yaw Damper
28VDC POWER SUPPLY
8 OO
'
'
O
POWER SECTION
(66DI4l-2)
(BENCH TEST WIRING HARNESS)
IC65\-0
YAW DAMPER
Figure 5-14. Test Equipment Hook-Up

Yaw Damper
5-44
SET-UP PROCEDURES
ADDED: 10/16/81
SECTION
VI
WIRING
DIAGRAMS
Paragraph
Page
6-1.
6-1
Introduction...............................................
ISSUED: 11/25/74
vi-i
SECTION VI
WIRING DIAGRAMS
6-1. INTRODUCTION. This section of the manual consists of wiring diagrams of the electrical harnesses
and mating connectors of the AltiMatic IIIC Autopilot. The wiring diagrams should be utilized for
troubleshooting the system for defective wiring and mating connectors. A continuity test of the system can
be performed with an ohmmeter. This test will clarify the harness is good and capable of carrying current.
Should any wire or connector fail to produce a reading on the ohmmeter, they are defective and must be
replaced. Refer to the following pages for the Wiring Diagrams for the AltiMatic IIIC installations on the
various Piper airplanes.
WIRING DIAGRAMS
ISSUED: 11/25/74
6-1
AS
FDG 14
FDG 5
MAGNETIC
FLUX
DETECTOR
15647-8
HS
I
CT
SLAVE
SwlTCH
CO
A TH
OUDE
CRAUDILER
PN
DG
DO 360
COUPLER
GLIDE SLOPE
GYRO
ATTITUDE
CONSOLE
ALTIMATICit
GS
GS
DN
UP
LAC
C WIRE TO INSTRUMENT
LIGHT HARNESS
D
FT
BREAKER
CD27
RELAY
CD76
- -
--
CD43
GRE)(WHifE
CD44
----
TO INSTRUMENT
LIGHT HARNESS
CIWASTER
TRIM CIRCUIT
B EAKERUS
I C
TRIM
D3
YELL
'
4
5
C
ONO
LD
TRIM INTERRUP S
AUTOPILOT DISCONN
SWITCH
AMPLIFIER
AMPLIFIER
ELECTRIC
TRIM SWITCH
--
TRIM
SERVO
00
---
R397
R398
--
G 14
sw
FDGIS
MAGNETIC
FLUX
DETECTOR
15647-8
BUS
lA
TSOR
UDILOER
LR
ATH LTU
OD
GYRO
ATTITUDE
ALTIMATICI
CONSOL
GIS LIGHT
WIRE TO INSTRUMENT
LIGHT HARNESS
CD26
BREAKER
D62
eox
RELAY
CD42
CD39
eus
NOISE
FILTER
TOINSTRUMENT
LIGHT HAANESS
TRIM MASTER
SWITCH
sa
TRIM CIRCUIT
BREAKER
TR
AM
ESW
TRIM
3D7
3016
SERVO
CD36
T
NTE
PT S
AUTOPILOT DISCONN
SWITCH
PITCH
SERVO
PLIFIER
IFMIER
00
54572-5
NAvl
IT
PA
SS
FCPl6
IONS
RSIO
VCH
ORiiS ii KING G
CROWN RADIOS ONLY
LLVER
PROTECTOR
FCP30 FCP30
FCPl6
NR
CONVERTER
lHANR
E
I
L
R310
NAV
HARNESS
--
AMPLIFIEN
SLGAVRING
CDII5
MAGNETIC
FLUX
DETECTOR
HSI
TUDE
(OPTIONAL)
AT TLUDDE
RAOlO
COUPLER
Af
ALTIMATIC
IIIC
CONSOLE
ER
BRRECA
ACCESSORY
---
RE TO INSTRuMENT
LIGHT HARNESS
- -
BREAKER
CIRCUIT
C--
DUS
40
RELAY
BOX
CD7
A+
--
RHEN
NOISE
FILTER
STNREUMENT
CIRCUIT
TRIM MASTER
TRIM
ER
-"
IIM
AUTO
TAPED B TIED BACK

YAWSD
R
UFHENN
AMPLIFIER
AMPLIF
LECTRIC
TR M SWITCH
NC
ROLL
SERVO
CDMISCONN.
RtPT &
ONO
NC
(It
No
54572
-O
FDG
NAvl
8310
wifH
(FC
NR
30
PI6
OD
FCP30
FCPI6
0Li
i
L
ONSOSNLYVER
PROTECTOR
VCEH
MCUASS
SS
K NG
S
CROWN RADIOS ONLY
NRA IS
WITH
CONVERTER
NAV
HARNESS
AMPLIFlER
SLAVRING
CDil5
R397
3gg
--
TLUDDE
(OPTIONAL)
AT
----
RADIO
COUPLER
HS
GLIDESLOFE
COUPLER
ATTITUDE
GYRO
ALTIMATIC
IIIC
C 3
SA
US
GISL
ACCESSORy
RECAU
R
IRE TO INSTRUMENT
LIGHT HARNESS
BREAKER
ILOT
CIRCUIT
60
RELAY
BOX
CD76
083
IRHE N
CIRCUlT
MASTER
BL
FILTER
NOISE
REUMENT
SWITCH
TRIM
TRIM
C 36
TRIM \
UTOPILOT
TIEDBACK
WHEN YAW DAMPER
IS NOT INSTALLEO
TAPED 8
ELECTRIC
TRIM SWITCH
NC
AMPLIFIER
AMPLFER
SR
CK
DISCONN
NC
HE
oo o
18882-A
FCPl6
14
rceso (verso
FCPi6
FDGIS
SS
KIN SLVEi 8
CROWN AADIOS ONLY
_H
ANR
ES
R3gy
R390
DE
MAGNETIC
VCH
TLUDO
PD
DG360
AT
HSi
(USE
ATTITUDE
GYRO
IS
NOT INSTALLED
WAHENANOW AMPAEC
SA
BUS
CEUSSORY
6
8
3 3
2 2
BREAKER
TISEBAECM)
IRE TO INSTRUMENT
LIGHT HARNESS
CD33
D33
SA
TAPEANDTIE BACK
IN ALL CASES
(OPTIONAL)
BUS
AUTCO/PILOT
CS
ATIC
CONSOLE
ALT
--
CD49
CDi27
- --
TAPE ANDTIE BACK

lUSED ON SERVOED ALT
CD76
RELAY
BOX
---
3
0039
CD 2
6;gir
BUS
43
SWITCH
TRIM MASTER
FDP 8
ROLL
F ER
ELECTRIC
TRIM SWITCH
NO
AUTOPILOT
DISCONN
SWITCH
TRIM INTERRUPT S
EOA
AMPLIFIER
AMPL
TRIM
SERVO
SERVO
PLER
HOLO
ATTITUDE
DG
ATTITUDE D
GYRO
6
ALT
GS
RIGHT
GS UP
+L
R TO tNSTRUMENT
LIGHT HARNESS
BREAKER
AUTORLOT
CIRCUIT
FT
-N----
TO DiMMER
,..a
CIRCUIT
NOISE
FILTER
TO
I
ST
UM
TRIM MASTER
SWITCH
sus
BREAKER
TRIM
NO
LECTRIC
SWITCH
TRIM
LL
C
oNC
TRIM INTERRUP
&
DISCONN
AUTOPILOT
SWITCH
IRER
AM
F ER
AMPL
PITCH
sEnvo
00
CD
Ch
i
00
...
Om
CDTI
R390
DE1ECTOR
FLUX
MAGNETIC
Cu
SLAVE
SWilcH
--
ATTI
DE
COUPLER
RADIO
OPTIONAl
DG
3LIDE SLOPE
C0uPLER
ATTITUDE D
GYRO
g
CONSOL
ALTIMATitti
--
LE
GS
+RIGHT
T
BLA
GS
ON4
RE TO INSTRUMENT
LIGHT HARN S
..
LT
OREAKER
co49
(co
DIMMER
CO39
5
MASTER
BUS
LIGHT HARNESS
TOINSTRUMENT
SWITCH
TRIM
TRIM CIRCUIT
BREAKER
No
TRIM
'
AMPLIFIER
SHi
LD)
SWITCH
TRIM INTERRUPT S
AUTOPRDT
DISCONN
AMPLIFIER
ELECTRIC
TRIM SWITCH
senvo
ROLL
PITCH
SERVO
"O
AMP
R-1
'R-1-H
AR 3 CP 7 4
3
CR3-B
COM
MOTOR
GROOUNO
LLE
D
R-3-H
PITCH COM
PITCH 31G
D. G. SIG
14RS.A
SiO.COM
P-7-2
-i-J
-1-C
B-6
(SH.)
(SHIELD
2 SHIELD
MAND
28 V. CKT
DELCO
ROLL EX
0.0. EX.
LLEE
14 28 Y IN
14 Y 10 AMP (ROLL
?iTCM SOL
BKR
SOL
ROLL EX
OMMAND
L BANK A01
R BANK ADJ
133
- R-3
I-
P-4.A
T4
1 B
R-1-C
D.G
R-3-D
GROUND
NC
T
--T
R-l-N
,
R-1-A
R-)-
D. G. EX
ROLL SOL
ROLL SIG
(SHIELD
R-2-C
14
CONSOLE
P-7
'R-1-0
,R-1-13
,R-i.12
sR-1-8
R-3-A
D. G. SIG
MOT
HOR
R-2
R-1-B
/R-1-C
-1-15
R-S-4_
I H
PfTCH COMMAND
ALT SIG
GROUND
.lGHTS
ENGAGE 14 V.
R-8-D
ROLL SERVO
1
.
PITOCHNDOL
GROUND
PITCN IND
-R-2-H
DD
(SH.)
i MOTOR. ROLL COM

PITCH SERVO
P.7.13
R-1-5
ROLL SOL
O DROLL
P-6-A
OTO
2
(5H)
PITCH EX
PITCM COMMAND
ALT ENGAGE
H COM
P-7-10
14
ALT SEL
R-8
i
AMP
LIGNTS
R-3-A
R-3-C. P-7-4
R-2-A,
R-2-B. R-3-, R-1-5
P-4-D,
R-2-D. R-3-6.
P-4-C
R-3-H (SHIELD)
R-2-C
R-1-A
R-3.B
(SHLD
R-1-D
(SH.)
R-1-D
R-1-L
R-1-J
R-1-C
R-1-F (SH.)
--
WIRINGFOR 300207-2
WIRING FOR 30D207-2
10M195 WIRE TO 9577

RECEPTACLE
R-2
HORIZON
CD-18
WIRES FROM CABLES

DETAIL
DIR GYRO R-3

CD-33
ROLL SERVO
30D207
-.
CD-47
P-A
PITCM
SERVO
CD-l6
P-6
LIGHTS
A
AMPLIF
R-1
LEAD
CONSOLE
P-7
CD-26
CD-27
C
ALT SELECTOR
R-8
Figure 6-8. AltiMatic IIIC Harness
WIRING DIAGRAMS
REVISED: 6/13/75
6-9
PIPER ALTIMATIC
IIIC SERVICE MANUAL
MPULSE
RELAY
oso
3\4\5k
4.
TERMINA
STRlPS
YAW
ON-OFF
DAMPER
CONN
R456
SWITCH
CD-IO4
YAW
00-103
RUDDER
DAMPER
POS T ON
NA'v-I
LTS
LISE
Figure 6-8a. Yaw Damper Block Diagram, PA-3l-310
SS ON
SERVC
PA-31-325 and PA-31-350
YAWDAMPER
ON-0FF
SWi
TCH
IN HSt
MARNESS
RE IN INSTR.
RUDDER SERVO
CD-103
LifES
HARN.
ilLACK
ONTROL WHEEL C0tLEO CORO
Figure 6-8b. Yaw Damper Block Diagram, PA-31P

6-10
WIRING DIAGRAMS
REVISED:
8/10/78
oo
33986
RP1
35
28
19
20
21
22
27
16
3
4
17
r------.
li------
A-----
----------------
li
----
--
i
-
-----
- - -
--
--
AIRFRAMEGND (AN20)
NAV FLAG(-)
NAV FLAG(+)
14/2BY
INPUT (AN20]
-----
--
-2
------------------5
--
--->
---4
---I
TO G/S REC (+UP)
G/S SIG (UP) [AN22 SHLD]
TO 0/5 REC (DN)
G/S SIG (+0N) [AN22 SHLD
OC
NORM
GMIIILOC MODESW INPUT
OMNI LOC MOD SW. INPUT
GND
NAV StG. IN
R310
NAV I
HARNESS
CONN.
LIGHTS
+14V ROLL MOD. SUP. (OUT)
E------------+tdVROLLMDO.SUP.(OUT)
AHOG SIGNAL
8----------COURSE
-l-----
OBS STATOR (E)

AN22
085 STATOR (0)
SHLO
OBS STATOR (G)
085 STATOR (F)
LOC FLAG
LOC FLAG
TO FROM + TO
I FRCH
R
L/RRADIO+
RI
D
GND
--A28V
16
FUNETION
23
24
25
26
31
32
33
CONN. CD-33
G/S COUPLER
HARNESS
CONN. 00-58
085 ROTOR(A)ofyl
085 ROTOR (C)
RADIO
COUPLER
15
CONN. CD-34
CONN. 00-106
1
CDUPLER
NSD-360
11
10707
I
I
I
I
I
17
18
19
21
7
22
3
20
2
15
16
CONN. 00-112
Figure 6-11. Horizontal Situation Indicator Harness (Optional) without lC707
WIRING DIAGRAMS
REVISED:
8/10/78
6-13
CL
as
---
--
----
----
----
---
---
----
GND
FUNCTION
AIRFRAME
NPUT
NAV FLAG (-)

...NAVFLAG(
35
50
---
28
29
(i
--
--\
D
E
A
--
--
H-
19
fl
18
20
21
22
27
i i
17
RADIO LT
RADIO +RT
--+14
---+14
--
-8
G/S FLAG(+)
-GND
SHIELDS
--
---
---
OMNI LOC MODE SW. INPUT
6
4
COURSE
O/S (+UP)
VDC ROLL MOD. SUP.(OUT)

SIGNAL
G/S (+DN)
G/S FLAG (-)
--
-HDG
VDC ROLL MOD. SUP.(OUT)
28VDC
---LIGHTS
GND
L/R
L/R
----
-24
9
21
12
16
(
(r
15
ll
I TO
OBS STATOR (D)

ODS STATOR (G)
OOS STATOR (F)
33
I t 8
13
FCP-16
RNAV
HARNESS
i FROM
()
FCP-30
NAV I
HARNESS
34
26
24
25
---A+
000
---
ROTOR (A) OR (H)
i )
e
A I i
--
ROTOR(C)
STATOR(E)
ODS
--
CD-33
003
i i
HARNESS
CD-58
15
G/S COUPLER
RADIO
COUPLER
16
23
--
CD-34
-
CD-IO6
i
COUPLER
NSD-360
t-
GREEN
WHITE
WHITE
WHITE
CLUTCH COIL
RED
BLACK
D
IMFD-25V
MOTOR
RED
BLACK
SWITCH IN "R"
POSITION
Figure 6-14. Servo Schematic
CD-76
CD
10
A /P
WHITE
DISCONNECT
RELAY
ASS'Y.
--
70E)
SIGNALOUT
YELLOW-
WIRING DIAGRAMS
REVISED: 3/10/78
IN
lA2(>-1
Figure 6-15. Relay Box Schematic
EXCITATION
EXCITATION IN
Figure 6-16. Altitude Hold Unit Schematic

6-17
HORIEON
CD-l8
WHITE
EDEN
Ci
CD-20-2
CI-s
ORANGE
CI-d
SHIELD
BLUE
Ct.e
''
CI-f
308343
8
C
WHiTE
RED
Cl-2
Cl-Y
GREEN
WHITE/BLACK -Ci-W
Cl.v
BLUE
SHIELD
Cl-D
N
P
BROWN
VIOLET
ORANGE
26
S
T
U
GRAY
YELLOW
BLACK
BLUE
26
26
26
26
26
H
J
K
L
CD-20-14
GROUND
CD-20-20
CD-20-t3
CD-20-8
CD-20-4
CD-20-9
CD-20-5
-----
----
CI-)
--
CONSOLE
30-20
i
2
3
4
WHlTE
WHITE/BROWN-CI-A
WHITE/VIOLET--CI-B
Cl-R
ORANGE
YELLOW
GREEN
BLUE
8
9
VIOLET
GRAY Cl-S
10
I i
12
i
14
15
16
17
I
19
20
CD-27
--
20
WHITE/BLACK
GREEN
I
a
RED
CD-33-8
CD-44CD-IS-E
CI-T
CI-H
Cl-J
CI-P
CDIS-F
CD-18-H
BLUE
RED
SHIELD
SHIELC
W
Y
CD-33-A
20
WHITE CD-IO-B
CD-IO-A
WHITECI-C RED
BLACK
GREN
BROWN
RED
CD-20-Il
CD-33-F
-CD-33-E
CD-33-D
CD-33-C
20
WHITE/YELLOW
GREEN
----
Ct-a
26
26
BLACK
WHITE
c.
WHITE/YELLOW
ORANGE
SHIELD,iNTERNAL
BLUE
GREEN
CD-IS-C
CD-18 SHIELD
CD-33
CI-U
CD-lO-H
CI -N
C1-K
220
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
BLACK
20
20
WH
/BLUE
WHITE/AED
WHITE/BLUE
CD-39
-CD-20-17
CD-20-16
CD-20-6
CD-20-7
wHITE/BROWN
WMITElvlOLET
CD-20-3
SHIELD,EXTERNAL(CI-bl
(NOT CONNECTEDTOCD-IS)
CD-33
F
H
PLUG
CI-SIDE
BLACK
A
8
C
E
F
CANNON
26
26
26
28
28
28
28
SHIELD,EXTERNAL
SHIELD
k
m
CD-26 20--WHITE
CD-IO-D
WHITE/BLUE--Cl-F
WHITE/YELLOW-CI-G
CD-IO-E
SHiELD
CD-IO-E CI-MSHIELD
n
CD-tB-D
BLACK
CD-18-A
CD.IS-B
CD92-I
CD-48
CD-92-3
SHIELD(
CD-48-4
30C40s.2
2I
22
4)
RED
u
v
WHtTE (SHIELDED)
SHIELD(CD47-CacD47-D)-
26
26
26
20
20
20
20
WHITE(SHIELDEO)
20
p
r
BLACK
s
r
WHITE
WHITE/8LK/RED
WHITE/BLK/ORN
ALTITUDE SEL.
CD-tO
CD-20-iO
CD-20-9
REC
WHITE
CD-20-I6
CD-20-19
BLACK
SHIELD
GREEN
CD-20-12
annons esom ruociouns som

sotossimo
tsaos
artsp
commacrten ALL Laana
oix ro
De
estrao.TuimmoTTuo
eee
e
H
ese
SHIELD
CD4
START
A
CD33 |
-----
ICpic1
Figure 6-17. AltiMatic IIIC Pressure Bulkhead Connectors (PA-31P)

6-18
WIRING DIAGRAMS
ISSUED: 11/25/74
CANNON PLUG
AMPLIFIER
R
SIG
DG
ROLL EX
ROLL EX
MOTOR/COM
MOTOR
GROUND CD-33
ROLL S1G
DG EX
C2-o
BLACK
C2-R
C2-T
ORANGE
CD-47-D
WHITE
CD-47-C
C2-;
C2-W
BLACK
SHIELD
GREEN
WHLTE/BLACK
O
E
F
H
J
DG
C2.g
L
M
N
C2-Y
GREEN
CD 47-A
C2-A
RED
GROUND
GROUND
ROLL COMMAND----
CD 47-8
LT. BANK ADJ

RT BANK ADJ
PITCH SOL
2
3
GROUND
GROUND
PITCH IND
PITCH SIG
5
6
PITCH MOTOR
UP ADJUST
DOWN ADJ.
PITCH MOTOR/COM
PITCH EX.
GREEN
BLUE
VIOLET
RED (20GA)
SHIELD
SHIELD
8
9
C2-f
CDi6-D
BLUE
WHITE
WHITE/BLUE
10
Il
C2-F
WHITE/YELLOW
BLACK
GRAY
14
IS
C2-U
BLACK
RI-N
WHITE/BROWN
e20
RI-4
-26
RI-I4
WHITE
WHlTE
WHlTE/BLUE
WHITE/RED
WHITE/BLUE
,------20
-20
WHITE
RI-lO
-26
26
26
RI-II
RI-I
RI-2
RL-12
26
26
26
26
26
RI-5
RI-7
RI-3
RI-8
RI-I3
-26
308347<
----26
RED C2-KTSMC2-e
ORN. C2-d
PITCH
RI-4.
RED
SHIELD RI-6
BLACK
SHIELD
CO-20
ORANGE
RI-C
BLUE
RI-J
RI-L
RI-0
RI-A
GREEN
AED
BLACK
Ri-D
WHITE
RI-\3
ORANGE
SHIELD
BLUE
R
S
T
pu
V
WHITE/BLACK
'2
a
.
26
26
26
26
RJ-12
RI-8
RI-H
o
e
d
e
WHITE/YELLOW
---20
GREEN
OPEN
RI-F
CD-20
CD-45
CD-20
BROWN----VIOLET
-28
28
28
26
CD-20
CD-20
CD-20
CD-20
'
GAAY
YELLOW
BLACK
26
RI-l2
RI-C
-28
CD-45
-
GREEN
BLUE
RED
RI-I5
E
G
-26
-28
CD-20
CD-20
CD-45
WHITE/YELLOW
-26
-WHT./VlOC2-8
LCD-20
SHIELD
-20
BROWN
C2-G
CDI6-C
C2-S
C2-C
-I
PITCHEx.
COMMAND---
PITCH
SHIELD
C2
~20
WHITE/BROWN(20GA)-
C2-H
C2-J
C2-P
CDi6-A
C2-M
CDI6-8
C2-N
GAUGE
(RED C2-2
WHT C2-s
BLUE C2-V
RED C2-p
WHT C2-b
YELLOW
EX,
ROLL SOL.
14VD.C.
C2-r
(BLK
----
CD-20
CD-20
CD-20
CD-20
-
CD-20
CD-33
CD-33
CO-33
CD-33
CD-33
CD-33
CD.45
CD- te
CD-:8
CD-18
CD-18
CD- 8
CD-33
SHIELD
OPEN
OPEN
CD-48
CO-48
CD-18
WHITE RI-9
ROLL
RI-M
RED
SHIELO RI-R
BLACK RI-E
WHITE R!-D
30C408-I
26
26
26
20
20
20
20
RI-0
RED
Al-B
BLACK
RI-C
WHITE
CD47-B WMT/BLK
IRED
CD47-A
/ORN
WHTJOLK
CD47-C WHITE (SHIELDED)

CD47-CSD
SHIELD
CD 47-D WHITE(SHIELDED)
CD- IS
CO- IS
CD-92-4
t
u
v
w
CD-48
CD-92-3
CD-92-4
SHIELD
BCD
eeeee
J KL
FCH
eee
see
.
VWY
e o
I m
7
e
a
O
b
O
C
O
SNOW PROCEDURE
ARROWS
FOR
SOLDERING
LEADS
AFTER
CONNECTING
ALL LEADS
orA
TO
GE TIED, THEN POTTED.
r
ST.\RT
A-A
A
A
Figure 6-17. AltiMatic IIIC Pressure Bulkhead Connectors (PA-31P) cont.

WIRING DIAGRAMS
ISSUED: 11/25/74
6-19
CONN.-MRACloPUTCH
UAC.4
stoo2.5-14-345
CONN.-tica-Lif-loOi
CONN.-
(PURCH
(PURCM3
coss, co-41
A
B
C
(
(
L
M
N
P
R
I
S
-115
C.ouN.-t
&<4-2.15
(PURCH
RED
ceNN.coMAP
E
F
H
J
121,
A
B
C
)
)
3
4
coNN,co-M.
cb--IS
coNN,
-----------------------ROLL
-------------
---------------
50L.
-------3ROUND
---------------
---------
-------
----------------
-----MOTOR
ROLL
D--------------------------------------MOTORRou.LoM.
,
---------------------------|-----------------l--------54\E-LD5
A-----
-----(------PtTCH
----
50L
B--------------I-----GROUNO
'
--
--
--
--
---\-
---
0--------
MCffOR P\TC..M
1--------MOTORPtTCMCOM.
---------------------------------------|---------SB\ELOS
( )
(
A
TRif \
0 -----GRoumo
C ------MOTOR
O -------MOTOR
;
|
10
[__11_)
---
--
---
--
---
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
L,
TRim
TRIM
C.OM.
Swt E.LOS
ROL L
SERVO
PLUG
COMM.
CD-4l
C.ONN.
CD-Ma
PITCH TRIM
AMPLIFIEA
CONN,
COMAP
CNN.
CD- 13
CO
Figure 6-18. Servo, ALT IIIC A/P Harness, PA-23-250 (Six Place)
6-20
WIRING DIAGRAMS
REVISED: 4/15/77
HS I
COMMEC'OR-
omo
c.
J-BOX
FUNCTION
o no
s>som
tot.
I
PM5-EDO
.I
12.
4V 2BVIMPUT
----------
is
ROTOR
ROTOR
2022
2Dig
MOG S\GNAL M
BCIS
PMS-EOOll-i-22
Io
2D2l
CD31
LEFT
P1tl3 EOOn-\-22
COURSE
20
2I
2Ct4
2023
53ATOR
STATOR
OM
2D24
3TA10%
2026
184
N
M
2A2
2A3
GS
UP
GS
DM
26
i
23
30
GS FLAG
FLAG +
-
GS
3l
32
33
34
35
To
2 I II LOC MOOL50
-g
raom
14
|
IC
FOR
COWTACTS
ST
ARNina
MS1\.,
NOTUit0kflTM
WinE
HSi
.o-roe
N,SO-3toDA
!BC.
J-BOX
Figure 6-19. HSI Harness, PA-23-250 (Six Place)

WIRING DIAGRAMS
REVISED: 3/10/78
6-21
NVERTER
mencu
eso
5-
J-BOX
FUNCTON
ROTOR
GMA
&ct(
MS-EOOK
P5tOO25-2-SS
OMNI
6
7
---------MTV.R
---------METERt.OAO
---------MENERLOAD
10
I
12.
PM%
EOOL
'
nom
nomon w
,
-22
2f
22
-(
Fi.A4NAV
$14
VOR\.0C
19
PMS-EOOlt-
fi.A
NAv
17
ao
SW-(
At
24
20)&
)
)
---------14/10VOC.A93m
14
t5
16
PMS
igg
LOAO
I4/16VOC
13
EOOl
LOCMOOSW--(
J
-
--.(Erfr
--(I
Er
C"3
ROTOR
L...J
\.E F3
LCI9
Rt0HT
--(
CIO
i
i
24
r,
r-,
ROTOR
23
r---3
FOR C.ONTACT5
wtR
CONVERTER
SEE
MARNE% kNhTL
RGSM
BOy
its
Figure 6-20. Converter Harness, PA-23-250 (Six Place)

6-22
WIRING DIAGRAMS
ADDED: 4/15/77
waa
af.sa
e33
RAD\O
FOR USE WITH HSI

OMNI
COUPLER
UAW
CD-34
CONM.
CONN.
ut.A IN susatAc=1
MARNESS
J-Box
SkilT CH
('
&
A5b
A6b
uso
E
F
LibE
tc5
YOR CONTACTS
SE.1 MARNESS INSTL.
1Macp+
UhB IN FUSELAGE
30
( 2C40
70
9%ok
HAANESS
Wilat
PANEL
060
WilRS. LibE
blIRE CD-SS
(Tape
coup\ar
back
is
not
when
GS
AlpNAvsR.
DN
'nsta.\\e
NAV
J-BOX
COOU
ER
PIN
33
FOR USE WITH STANDARD D.G.

I
Figure 6-21. Radio Coupler Harness, PA-23-250 (Six Place)

WIRING DIAGRAMS
REVISED:
8/10/78
&23
126-19
126-222
LJG
obRC
CT SiaTOR
CT ROTOR
20
23
---------------H--
PLUG
(2)
(H)
REcco
1991-9?
991-9P
f PURCH>
PURCH)
AEc
(AURCH)
=1
=1
-
1-
5HIELD GROUND
SNIELD GROUND
CT ROTOR (H)
'S
=2
SLSVING COIL
SLAvlNO COIL
CT ROTOR (H)
$LAVING COIL
$LvlNG C0tL
5Lav!NG COIL
=2
=2
16
----
----7-
------F
-------E
'
GYRO
SLAVING
AMPLIFIER
------A
------0
-8--
......
---
---i
E
K
cons
co-us
usED
com
Fun
WHEN
RMI
IS INSTALLED.
MAGNETICFLUX
DETECTOR
GNO
s
RE (54-6)
CONN
00-111
llNN
SL AviNG MODE
""
NSD-360
SELECTOR
SWITCH
C/P
510025
I-IF
GREQ
to
Figure 6-22. Gyro Slaving Harness, PA-23-250 (Six Place)

6-24
WIRING DIAGRAMS
REVISED: 3/10/78
KEYWAY
1991-9P
PLUG (PURCH.)
P510025-1-tM
(9R
SWITCH (PURCH
SE FicunE
VIEW
FIGURE 1
WIRING DIAGRAM
NOTE:
W/O
Figure 6-23. Slaving Switch Harness, PA-23-250 (six place), PA-31-310;

WIRING DIAGRAMS
REVISED: 3/10/78
-325;
-350
RMI ONLY
and PA-31P
6-25
5I-LOlaO
co-ita
--
COM
UNC_T\ON
J-BO
--Box
GND
Figure 6-24. RMI Boot Strap Harness, PA-23-250 (Six Place)
'
PLUGM$LS-HISC
PLUG 126-199
(U
(PURCH)
CONN. R398
STA 34
o
E
CHA
CONN. R397
FUNCTION
STATOR
-
ROTOR
PS10025-2-5B
ROTOR
FDG-14
WIRE(FDG-14)
Figure 6-25. Flux Sensor Harness, PA-31-310;

6-26
-325;-350
and PA-31P
WIRING DIAGRAMS
REVISED: 3/10/78
CONN.
57-303b0
E3NN.
PUPEN)
CONN
E,-106
1
COUPLER
COUPLER
126-222
(PURCH)
--
126-211-looo
(PURCH)
PLUG
CD-34
CONN.
-
-.
FUNCTJON
CD-58
CONN.
IC707
PLUG 133i-9P
;PURCH.)(7)PSt0025+gl
CONN. R310
CONN 126-217-1001
(PURCH)
CONN. CD-33
--
NAV I
HARNESS
G/S COUPLER
HoRNES5
RADIO
NS:-360
57-30240
CONN
(PURCH)
16
FLAG()
INPUT [AN20]
14/28v
15
=09
11-
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
13
15
23
24
25
26
31
32
3a
005 ROTOR(A)0g)
npc
RDIOR (C)
OSS STATOR (E) AN21
:"i STATOR(D) SMLD
085 STATOR (0)
OBS STATOR (F)
LOC FLAG
LOC FLAG
16
17
20
2
22
3
4
21
7
1
Fr 14
--
--
--
--
------
-----------.
EA--
20
21
22
27
--
--
--
--
--
'
14V ROLL MOD. SUP. (Ollf)

ROLL MOD. SUP. (OUT) AN2;
HDG SIGNAL
SNLD
COURSE
TO G/S REC (UP)
G/S SIG (UP) [AN22 SHLD)
TO 6/5 REC (ON)
.14v
--
-1
---
28
----LIGWTS
-------
19
19
GNO
h 28V
RP1 1
CO-112
CONN
BIRFRAMEGND [AN20]
FLAG(-)
!
--2
---
--C
35
NOT
RiaUIAEO
NS
WITH
360A
G/S SIG (+DN) [AN22

LOC NORMAL
IlL
DESW N
C
GND
NAV SIG. [N
-
--0--
--
agyA31.HTENED
---
-------LIGHTS
---
----
--
6
UT
-
-3
-----
--
5
17
--4
GNO
--LIGHTS
---
SHLO]
20V.
BOLT LIGHT HARNESS
BlRE L9E
GND.
COUPLER
RADIO
COUPLER
WIRE8060
GND
WIRE RG7C
CO3
C/P
WIRE RP118
bitti(LTS4)
N
IC707
atur. orr
AtNC20FF
SNLD(WIRESig
wtRES
W131.
WIRE
GND.
WIRE RP10C
SNLD
igig6,f
ONO)
310
%6
ind
C/P
OWV
(WIRES 2f(tG)
MA I
HARNESS
G/S COUPLER
NARNESS
WIRE RG7D
Figure 6-26. HSI, EDO AIRE Mitchell Hamess, PA-31-310;-325
WIRING DIAGRAMS
REVISED: 3/10/78
and
-350
6-27
Nov
G/S COUPLER
HARNESS
RADIO
COUPL6R
COUPLER
NSD-360
DNN
20
CONN.CD-33
CONN.CD34
(PURCH
($1 PS10025-1-1F
CONN
FCP-30
CONN.
OBS ROTOR
TO FROM
D
E
a-------A-HDGSIGNAL
20
21
22
(A) OR
+ FROM
COURSE
as...
9
4.flTH
RUIRED
3
16
26
LIGWTS
.+1O V ROLL MOD. SUP. (OUT
+I4V ROLL MOD. SUP. (OUT)
25
35
-Il2f
DiaV
-------
--
CON
fr.RADIO+LT
i in NADIO + RT
..
FCP-Ib
NAV FLAG H
NAV FLAG (+)
14/2BV INPUT
1e
lI
$7-30240
CONN
-AtRFRAMEGND
--------
-----
FUNCTION
CD58
CONN
0425$
08-20659 3MELL
Og$l221-i
$1..A
MARNESS
uty-sqqygg
OS
"JC"
e a
CONN.CD-106
20.,06
agg
HORNESS
CONN.
NSD360A
anam
LOG NORM
namens ne aanny
ve
ety
lassity
I
-l-------------------------LigkTSGND
-----i.teMrs
-------
BOLT LitaNT
MAILNLES
3AE*
RING OFF
5HLD. (WIRES 12,15,16,26
NO
CD-)
000PLER
NAV i
c/P
6 27)
M:iO
RE RL60
28v.
NARMggi
.rcPa
RING OFI $460.
9909
'
witt(LT&+)
14
905-
'
3D
IC707
mo
AING
OFF
SMLD(WIRE
ledI
siRE
UND
RPt3C
C/P
75
COUPLER
NG
ort
(WIRE
NAV 1
HARNESS
2fiL
RING OFF
SHLD (WlRES
13,14
17)
HARNESS
4.r!IK(GND)
RE
8070
Figure 6-27. HSI, EDO AIRE Mitchell Hamess, PA-31-310;

6-28
-325
and
-350
WIRING DIAGRAMS
REVISED: 3/10/78
JNN
CONN
FCP-24
FCP-20
F107.2
.24043-0196
(5UPPLIEC
116-19
W.-H
UNIT)
TALE
SCE
CONN,(PURCW.
(PURCA.)(1
TERM.
'(41064-\
REG
gg
SE C TABLE 2.
'ma<aos
'A
caosantceuRcm3
AS
RE.G.
A%
SwodN
APE
(.PURCM
w\RE(Z)
REL3)
WI
RE(4')
wtAE(S)
wtRE(t.)
'
.
AtNCr
OWF
5t+4ELOS
PLM M
TABLE \
SAUGE
L _ tw\tucEU
SUkME
3
D
4
ANZZ
E
F
5
EM\ELLEO
R
<
L
18
'D-144-01
SOLDER
SLEUVE(PURC.H.)
E(AR21)FDG-tS(G.OOL.)
anoo
LDER
TE.RM.(PURCH.)
FreuRE
5LEVE
ma
\NSTALLATLN
Wik
0
C
D.
REsANL23](1.OOL3(2-1)
R\NG
LutE.LOS
SWowN
2.
.3
AM21
SALELORO
wtRE(t)
\RE(2)
FF
AS
\RE(3)
'0-144-02.
vreune
e
MitErdDWGAU.C=E
SOLOER
SLEEME
SOLDER
5LEEVECPURCH
2
tN5TALLATroN
Figure 6-28. Compensator Harness, PA-31-310;-325

WIRING DIAGRAMS
REVISED: 3/10/78
-350
and PA-31P
6-29
-a
CAPASGF480420-0
126-212
$\002f-8-fDM
22
A/CGROUND
STATOR
-----------
I
2
--
---
STATOR
----
STATOR
1491-9"
(P
g-gp gggy
RECE
PUkW
RCH
ANt
ROTOR
--
CT
CT
ROTOR (Cl
STATOR (1)
21
(7)
CF
(2)
STATOR
(M3
al
=1
=1
16
SLovlNG
COIL
=1
17
SLVING COIL
el
20
21
=1
CT STATOR
CT ROTOR
14
---
g-.....
SHIELD GROUND
15
13
18
14
19
IS
)
)
)
SHIELD GROUND
CT ROTOR (N)
22
5LavlNG
=2
COIL
SLaviNG COIL
CT ROTOR (H)
22
SLaviNG COIL
56119.
24
PLUG
(PURCN)
58-P
--
--
-7-
---g-.
----K
NT.i
S HLO
-
GYRO
SLAVING
AMPLIFIER
1g
17
COlt CENT IIP
28 v.D.C.
--7--
'----A
AN22-----0
USED
CONN
CONN
co-
co-71
is
WHEN
RMI
IS INSTALLED.
MAGNETICFLUX
DETECTOR
GND.
RE (S-G)
CONM
CD-111
NN
SLAVINGMODE
'
NSD-360
IRE (SA-P)
SIOO2.5-1-!F
Figure 6-29. Gyro Salving Hamess PA-31-310,
6-30
-325
and
-350
WIRING DIAGRAMS
REVISED: 3/10/78
Figure 6-30. Boot Strap Harness, PA-31-310;

WIRING DIAGRAMS
REVISED: 3/10/78
325;-350,
and PA-31P
6-31
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
6-32
WIRING DIAGRAMS
ADDED: 4/15/77
PARTII
COUPLER
SLOPE
GLIDE
ISSUED: 11/25/74
VII
SECTION
DESCRIPTION
Paragraph
7-1.
Description
ISSUED: 11/25/74
Page
............................
...
....
.......
7.1
vii-i
SECTION VII
DESCRIPTION
7-1. DESCRIFTION. The Glide Slope Coupler is an optional supporting system to the AltiMatic IIIC. It is
a completely Automatic Analog Computer that directs the Autopilot around the lateral axis to intercept
and track the approach glide path. The system automatically provides for variances in glide path angle, wind
direction and various approach configurations of the airplane.
When the Glide Slope is properly adjusted and normal approach power is applied, the airplane will
accurately follow the glide path. (Refer to Figure 7-1.)
A self contained logic circuit provides for certain conditions to be prevalent before "Lock On" or
coupling will occur. This will prevent the Glide Slope from being "Armed" under unfavorable conditions.
YOR
--
20 SECONDS
MM
LOM
Figure 7-1. AltiMatic IIIC Glide Slope Coupler Approach

DESCRIFTION
ISSUED: 11/25/74
7-1
SECTION
VIII
THEORY
OFOPERATION
Paragraph
8-1.
8-2.
Page
TheoryofOperation
Coupling
.................................................
ISSUED: 11/25/74
..........................................
8-1
8-2
viii-i
SECTION VIII
THEORY OF OPERATION
8-1. THEORY OF OPERATION. The fundamental principle of the Glide Slope Coupler is to couple the
Glide Slope to the Autopilot. The Autopilot will then allow the airplane to descend at an angle which
corresponds to the Glide Slope to be flown and to introduce a radio deviation signal that will cause descent
angle to deviate an amount proportional to the radio signal deviation from the Glide Slope Indicator.
Note in Figure 8-1 that the Glide Slope Coupler is connected in series with the Gyro Horizon and the
Altitude Hold. Figure 8-2 shows the Glide Slope Coupler with the complete AltiMatic IIIC system.
Shown in Figure 8-3 is a block diagram of the elements which make up the Glide Slope Coupler. The
low level DC signal is derived from the Glide Slope Deviation Indicator and is converted into AC in the low
level chopper and then amplified in the AC amplifier. From the amplifier the signal is transformer coupled
to a phase detector. This will provide DC isolation from the Glide Slope Indicator. The high level DC
voltage out of the phase detector is applied to the integrator circuit. The detector furnishes a signal to a rate
network which supplies a DC input to the high level chopper. The high level chopper then receives a signal
from the integrator. The AC output of the high level chopper is fed into the output amplifier which is fed
in series with the pitch output from the Gyro Horizon.
UP
CENTER
DWN
PITCH
COMMAND
ADJUSTABLE
VOLT AGE
LIMITER
AMPLIFIER
LO PASS
FILTER
A LH LUDD
E
I
GLIDE
AMSELRVF
ER
SLOPE
COUPLER
ELECTRONIC
FOLLOW-UP
NETWORK
PITCH
HORIZON
TO RADIO
COUPLER
LOC. NORM
---------~
.-----
AIRCRAFT
DYNAMICS
Figure 8-1. Pitch Axis Control System with Glide Slope Coupler
THEORY OF OPERATION
ISSUED: 11/25/74
8-1
8-2. COUPLING. Coupling or "Arming" will occur ONLY when three conditions have been met, these
conditions are:
1. The airplane must be in ALT Hold Mode.
2.
The Radio Coupler must be in Localizer Normal Mode.
The airplane must be flown under the glide path (at least 60% up indication) for 20 seconds.
3.
The logic circuit, which consists of a bistable multivibrator circuit, insures that all the above
conditions prevail prior to arming the coupler. The logic cirduit also has a reset function which disarms the
circuit if any one of the three inputs are interrupted. After any one of the inputs are interrupted all three
conditions must be met again prior to rearming.
8-2
THEORY OF OPERATION
ISSUED: 11/25/74
oo
do
ASLG
MAGNETIC
TXOR
DE
B)
(RG7D
SLAVE
SWITCH
DE
TTOR
ATHOLDUDE
COUPLER
RADIO
OPTlNt 3
DG
DG 360
COUPLER
GLIDE SLOPE
ATTI
ALTIMATIC
CONSOL
DN (BLA
GS
WN
UP+
GS
GIS LIGHT
TO NS HUMEN
TE
27
sox
RELAY
ROUS
NOISE
FILTER
CD4
TO INSTRUMENT
LIGHT HARNESS
I C
5AS
BREAKER
rais cincuit
D43
NO
PITCH
TRIM
SERVO
YELLOg
(CD36)
<
tNC
SHIEL)
INTERRUPT &
AUTOPILOT DISCONN
SWITCH
TRIM
AMPLIFIER
AMPLIFIER
ELECTRIC
TRIM SWITCH
D
I
CL
oo
OPPELR
UDE
ICFIER
RADIO
COUPLER
LOC. NORM
HT
AMP
RATE
NETWORK
LOGIC CIRCUIT
DETHEACSEOR
INTEGRATOR
AMPLIFIER
ANO
HIGH
GAIN
D. C.
PUSH
BUTTON SWITCH
C
P
A EL A Y
AMPLIFIER
ELR
AA
RELAY
PUT
SECTION IX
Paragraph
9-l.
9-2.
9-3.
9-4.
Page
Introduction
Removal of Glide Slope Coupler (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models
Installation of Glide Slope Coupler (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Models
Removal of Glide Slope Coupler (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350
and PA-31P)
Installation of Glide Slope Coupler (PA-31-3l0, PA-31-325, PA-31-350
and PA-31P)
Removal of Glide Slope Coupler (PA-32-260, S/N 32-7500001 to 7700023
and PA-32-300, S/N 32-7540001 to 7840045)
Installation of Glide Slope Coupler (PA-32-260, S/N 32-7500001 to 7700023
and PA-32-300, S/N 32-7540001 to 7840045)
Removal of Glide Slope Coupler (PA-32-260, S/N 32-7800001 and up;
PA-32-300, S/ N 32-7840046 and up; PA-32R-300, PA-32RT-300,
PA-32RT-300T, PA-32-301, PA-32-301T, PA-32R-301,
PA-32R-301T and PA-34-200T)
Installation of Glide Slope Coupler (PA-32-260, S/N 32-7800001 and up;
PA-32-300, S/ N 32-7840046 and up; PA-32R-300, PA-32RT-300, PA-32RT-300T
PA-32-301, PA-32-301T, PA-32R-301, PA-32R-301T and PA-34-200T)
Removal of Glide Slope Coupler (PA-44-180)
Installation of Glide Slope Coupler (PA-44-180)
Removal of Glide Slope Coupler (PA-28RT-201 and PA-28RT-201T)
Installation of Glide Slope Coupler (PA-28RT-201 and PA-28RT-201T)
.................................................................9-1
.............9-1
.9-1
............................................................9-1
9-5.
............................................................9-1
9-6.
................................9-2
9-7.
................................9-2
9-8.
...........................................9-2
9.9
9-10.
9-11.
9-12.
9-13.
REVISED:
.9-2
.
...................................9-3
.................................9-3
..............9-3
............9-3
11/30/79
ix-i
SECTION IX
9-1. INTRODUCTION.
This section covers the removal and installation of the Glide Slope Coupler.
NOTE
For continuous Autopilot use with the Glide Slope Coupler
removed, it will be necessary to install a jumper plug, Mitchell P/N
9A88 (Piper P/N 757 325), in the 24-pin CD-63 receptacle of the
Glide Slope Cable Harness.

9-2. REMOVALOF GLIDE SLOPE COUPLER. (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Model's.
The Glide Slope Coupler is located under the instrument panel on the right side of the fuselage and is
attached to the fuselage frame.
Remove the Glide Slope Coupler from the mounting brackets by removing the screws and nuts
a.
which secure the mounting brackets.
b.
Release the spring clips on the CD-63 connector. Disconnect CD-63 from the Glide Slope
Coupler.
c.
If the airplane will be flown prior to reinstallation of the Glide Slope Coupler install jumper plug,
Mitchell P/N 9A88 (Piper P/N 757 325), in the CD-63 harness connector.
9-3. INSTALLATION OF GLIDE SLOPE COUPLER. (PA-23-250 Six Place) E & F Model's. (Refer to
Figure 9-1.)
a.
If the jumper plug, Mitchell P/N 9A88 (Piper P/N 757 325), has been installed in the Glide Slope
Harness connector CD-63, remove it.
b.
Connect CD-63 24-pin connector and make sure the spring clips are snapped in place.
c.
Place the Glide Slope on the mounting brackets on the fuselage frame. Position it so the end with
the CD-63 receptacle is aft.
d.
Secure it with the screws and nuts previously removed.
9-4. REMOVALOF GLIDE SLOPE COUPLER. (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P)
(PA-31 only.) The Glide Slope Coupler is located under the right side of the instrument panel.
(PA-31P only.) The Glide Slope Coupler is located under the center of the instrument panel to the rear of
the pedestal.
(PA-3lP only.) Remove the screws securing the center instrument panel and move panel slightly
a.
aft to gain access to Glide Slope Coupler.
b.
Release the spring clips on CD-63 connector. Disconnect CD-63 from the Glide Slope Coupler.
c.
If the airplane will be flown prior to reinstallation of the Glide Slope Coupler, install jumper
plug. Mitchell P/N 9A88 (Piper P/N 757 325), in the CD-63 connector.
d.
Remove the two screws which secure the Glide Slope Coupler to the mounting bracket.
(PA-31P only.) Remove the two screws which secure the Glide Slope mounting bracket to the
e.
instrument panel and remove coupler and mounting bracket.
9-5. INSTALLATION OF GLIDE SLOPE COUPLER. (PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P)
(Refer to Figure 9-2 or Figure 9-3.)
(PA-31P only.) Place the Glide Slope Coupler with mounting bracket under the center of the
a.
instrument panel. Position it so the 24pin receptacle is to the left of the pedestal.
b.
Place the Glide Slope Coupler on the mounting bracket under the right side of the instrument
panel. Position it so the 24-pin receptacle is on top of the Glide Slope Coupler.
REVISED:
8/10/78
9-1
PIPER ALTIMATIC
c.
screws.
d.
e.
f.
IllC SERVICE
MANUAL
(PA-31P only.) Secure the Coupler with mounting bracket to the instrument
panel with two
Secure the Coupler to the mounting bracket with two screws.

If the jumper plug has been installed in the Glide Slope Harness connector CD-63, remove it.
Connect the CD-63, 24-pin connector and make sure the spring clips are snapped in place.
9.6. REMOVAL OF GLIDESLOPE COUPLER. (PA-32-260, S/N 32-7500001 to7700023 and PA-32-300,
Si N 32-7540001 to 7840045)
The Glide Slope Coupler is located beneath the instrument panel and is attached to the forward side of the
glove box.
Release the spring clips on CD-63 connector and disconnect the CD-63 connector from the Glide
a.
Slope Coupler.
Remove the screws and nuts which secure the Glide Slope Coupler to the brake channel and remove
b.
coupler.
If the airplane will be flown prior to reinstallation of the Glide Slope Coupler, install jumper plug,
c.
Mitchell P/ N 9A88 (Piper P/ N 757 325), in the CD43 harness connector.
9-7. INSTALLATION OF GLIDE SLOPE COUPLER. (PA-32-260, S/N 32-7500001 to 7700023 and PA32-300, S/ N 32-7540001 to 7840045) (Refer to Figure 94.)
a.
If the jumper plug, Mitchell P/ N 9A88 (Piper P/ N 757 325), has been installed in the Glide Slope
Coupler Harness Connector CD-63, remove it.
Place the Glide Slope Coupler on the forward side of the glove box with the CD-63 connector
b.
pointing inboard.
Ascertain the ground wire CD-60 from the CD-63 connector harness is located under the screw on
c.
the glove box.
Secure the Glide Slope Coupler to the glove box with the appropriate screws and nuts.
d.
e.
Connect the CD-63 24-pin connector to the coupler and make sure the spring clips are snapped in
place.
9-8. REMOVAL OF GLIDE SLOPE COUPLER. (PA-32-260, SN 32-7800001 and up; PA-32-300, St N
32-7840046 and up; PA-32R-300, PA-32RT-300, PA-32RT-300T, PA-32-301, PA-32-301T, PA-32R-301,
PA-32R-301 and PA-34-200T)
The Glide Slope Coupler is located beneath the instrument panel and is attached to the forward left side of
the brake channel.
Release the spring clips on CD43 connector and disconnect the CD-63 connector from the Glide
a.
Slope Coupler.
b.
coupler.
c.
If the airplane will be flown prior to reinstallation of the Glide Slope Coupler, install
Mitchell PN 9A88 (Piper PN 757 325), in the CD-63 harness connector.
jumper plug,
9-9. INSTALLATION OF GLIDE SLOPE COUPLER.(PA-32-260,

SN 32-7800001 and up; PA-32-300,
SN 32-7840046 and up: PA-32R-300, PA-32RT-300, PA-32RT-300T, PA-32-301, PA-32-301T, PA-32R301, PA-32R-301T and PA-34-200T) (Refer to Figure 9-5.)
a.
If the jumper plug, Mitchell P/N 9A88 (Piper P/N 757 325), has been installed in the Glide Slope
Coupler Harness connector CD-63, remove it.
b.
Place the Glide Slope Coupler on the left side of the brake channel with the CD-63 receptacle of the
coupler pointing forward.
c.
Ascertain the ground wire CD-60 from the CD-63 connector harness is placed under the forward
mounting screw of the coupler.
d.
Secure the Glide Slope Coupler to the brake channel with the appropriate screws and nuts.
e.
place.
9-2
REMOVAL
AND INSTALLATION
REVISED:
11/30/79
PIPER ALTIMATIC
IIIC SERVICE
MANCAL
9-10. REMOVAL OF GLIDE SLOPE COUPLER. (PA44-180)

The Glide Slope Coupler is located on the forward side of the bulkhead at STA.47.65 on the left side of
the airplane.
Release the latches on the nose cone and swing it down out of the way to gain access to the Glide
a.
Slope Coupler.
b.
Slope Coupler.
Remove the screws and nuts which secure the Glide Slope Coupler to the bulkhead and remove
c.
coupler.
d.
Mitchell PN 9A88 (Piper P/ N 757 325), in the CD-63 harness connector.
jumper plug.
9-11. INSTALLATION OF GLIDE SLOPE COUPLER. (PA-44-180) (Refer to Figure 9-6.)

a.
If jumper plug, Mitchell P/N 9A88 (Piper P/N 757 325), has been installed in the Glide Slope
Place the Glide Slope Coupler on the forward side of the bulkhead at STA.47.65 on the left side of
b.
the airplane with the CD-63 connector pointing inboard.
Ascertain the ground wire CD-60 from the CD-63 connector harness is placed under the upper
c.
inboard mounting screw of the coupler.
Secure coupler to bulkhead with screws and nuts previously removed.
d.
e.
place.
9-12. REMOVAL OF GLIDE SLOPE COUPLER. (PA-28RT-20I and PA-28RT-201T)
The Glide Slope Coupler is located under the instrument panel on the right side of the fuselage.
a.
Slope Coupler.
b.
coupler.
c.
Mitchell PN 9A88 (Piper P/N 757 325), in the CD-63 harness connector.
jumper plug,
9-13. INSTALLATION OF GLIDE SLOPE COUPLER (PA-28RT-201 and PA-28RT-201T) (Refer to

Figure 9-8.)
a.
If the jumper plug, Mitchell P/N 9A88 (Piper P/N 757 325), has been installed inthe Glide Slope
b.
Place the Glide Slope Coupler on the mounting bracket under the right side of the instrument panel
with the CD-63 connector pointing up.
c.
Ascertain the ground wire CD-60 from the CD-63 connector harness is placed under the upper rear
mounting screw of the coupler.
d.
Secure the Glide Slope Coupler to the glove box with the appropriate screws and nuts.
e.
place.

REVISED: 11/30/79
9-3
PIPER ALTIMATIC
IIIC SERVICE MANUAL
THIS PAGE
INTENTIONALLY
94
LEFT BLANK
REMOVAL
AND INSTALLATION
REVISED: 11/30/79
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
COUPLER
GL1DE
St..OPE
SUPPORT
BRACKET
NUT
SCREW
FUSELAGE
FRAME
Figure 9-1. Glide Slope Coupler Installation, PA-23-250 (Six Place) E & F Model's
1.
GLIDE
2.
3.
SCREW
4.
RUDDER
SLOPE
MOUNTING
COUPLER
BRACKET
SUPPORT
PEDAL
CHANNEL
Figure 9-2. Glide Slope Coupler Installation, PA-31-310, PA-31-325 and PA-31-350

REVISED:
11/30/79
9-5
1.
GLIDE
1.
SCREW
1NSTRUMENT
3.
4.
SLOPE
COUPLER
PANEL
BRACKET
CONNECTOR
Figure 9-3. Glide Slope Coupler Installation, PA-31P

1. GUDE SLOPE COUPLER
2. SCREW
3. GLOVE BOX
4. CONNECTOR
Figure 9-4. Glide Slope Coupler Installation, PA-32-260, S/N 32-7500001 to 7700023
and PA-32-300, S/N 32-7540001 to 7840045
9-6
I

REVISED:
11/30/79
PIPER ALTIMATIC
1. GLIDE
SLOPE
2.
3.
SCREW
PARKlNG
4.
CONNECTOR
BRAKE
IIIC SERVICE
MANUAL
COUPLER
SUPPORT
CHANNEL
mm
Figure 9-5. Glide Slope Coupler Installation, PA-32-260, S/ N 32-7800001 and up; PA32-300, S/ N 32-7840046 and up; PA-32R-300, PA-32RT-300, PA-32RT-300T, PA32-301, PA-32-301T, PA-32R-301, PA-32R-301T and PA-34-200T
1. GLIDE SLOPE COUPLER
2. SCREW
3. FORWARD CABIN BULKHEAD
4.CONNECTOR
Figure 9-6. Glide Slope Coupler Installation,

ADDED: 11/30/79
PA-44-180
9-7
PIPER ALTIMATIC
1.
GLIDE
2.
3.
4.
SCREW
BRACKET
SLOPE
IIIC SERVICE MANUAL
COUPLER
CONNECTOR
Figure 9-7. Glide Slope Coupler Installation,
9-8
REMOVAL
AND INSTALLATION
ADDED: 11/30/79
SECTION
X
TESTEQUIPMENT
Paragraph
10-1.
10-2.
10-3.
10-4.
Page
TestEquipmentRequirements
66Dl41-4RadioCouplerTester
GlideSlopeCables
..........................................
Troubleshooting
ISSUED: 11/25/74
...........................................
...................................
..................................
10-1
10-1
10-1
10-1
X-i
SECTION X
TEST EQUIPMENT
10-1. TEST EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS. Autopilot
to this test equipment, there are several additional cables
The use of the 66D141-1, 66Dl41-2 and 66Dl41-3
described in Section IV of this manual. The 66D141-4
explained in Paragraph 10-2.
Test Kit Piper P/N 753 439 (66Dl41). In addition

which will be required.
is not explained because they are used the same as
Radio Coupler Tester is used differently.
This is
10-2. 66Dl41-4 RADIO COUPLER TESTER. The Radio Coupler Tester contains a simulated radio signal
source to provide Glide Slope Signal Deviation thus allowing the system to be static tested. The Radio
Coupler Test Box will perform the following functions:
a.
The Lower Radio Signal Meter simulates a Glide Slope Deviation Indicator. Blue represents UP
and yellow represents DOWN.
b.
The Radio Signal Substitute Knob, located to the right of the Lower Omni Meter, when pulled
out "ON" and rotated will give either a fly "UP" or "DOWN" signal.
c.
The 9-pin CD-34 connector connects to Test Cable 30A300 to provide simulated Glide Slope
information to the Glide Slope Coupler.
10-3. GLIDE SLOPE CABLES. Given in this paragraph are the additional items which are used for testing
the Glide Slope Coupler. (Refer to Figure 10-1.)
a.
Glide Slope Coupler Light Cable, Mitchell P/N 30B317 (Piper P/N 757 873).
b.
Glide Slope Coupler Test Cable, Mitchell P/N 30A300 (Piper P/N 757 874).
c.
Glide Slope Coupler Cable, Mitchell P/N 30C291 (Piper P/N 752 010). This is the same cable
used for installation in the airplane and is not shown in Figure 10-1.
d.
Glide Slope Coupler Extension Cable, Mitchell P/N 30C267 (Piper P/N 757 875). Used for flight
adjustment.
e.
Jumper Plug, Mitchell P/N 9A88 (Piper P/N 757 325). This is not used for testing. It is installed
in the airplane Glide Slope Harness while the Glide Slope Coupler is removed.
10-4. TROUBLESHOOTING.
a.
It is recommended
that the technician determine the nature and specific area of trouble as
accurately as possible by questioning the pilot.
b.
Refer to Table X-I before attempting to troubleshoot the system. Isolate the trouble into one
group.
l.
The first group concerns the inputs to the Glide Slope Coupler. It is recommended that the
technician, by use of the appropriate test equipment, reproduce the input signals and observe that the
output, in this case, the Autopilot, responds either correctly or incorrectly. The reason is that this group is
the easiest to work on.
TEST EQUIPMENT
ISSUED: 11/25/74
10-1
TABLE X-l. TROUBLE ISOLATION BLOCK DIAGRAM
INPUT
MIDDLE
Altitude Selector
Radio Coupler
Gyro Horizon
Glide Slope Indicator
Glide Slope Coupler
OUTPUT
-----
AltiMatic III B-1 Amplifier

Pitch Servo
Bridle Cable
2.
If, with the correct inputs, the Autopilot does not respond correctly, the middle group (in
this case the Glide Slope Coupler) should be removed and bench checked in accordance with Section XI.
3.
If the inputs are correct and the middle section (Glide Slope Coupler) performs
satisfactorily on the bench check, the output group should be checked. Since the output group is the pitch
portion of the AltiMatic Autopilot, it is recommended that it be checked out in accordance with Section V
of this manual.
c.
Since the Glide Slope Coupler signal is an additional input to the pitch portion of the AltiMatic
Autopilot it is essential that it be established as to whether or not the problem is peculiar to the Glide Slope
Coupler operation, an example: Complaint, aircraft "porpoises while making ILS approach." This problem
could be caused by malfunctions other than the Glide Slope Coupler such as AltiMatic Amplifier, loose
control or bridle cable and faulty electric trim. At this point it would be wise to check out the AltiMatic
pitch system without the Glide Slope Coupler engaged.
10-2
TEST EQUIPMENT
ISSUED: 11/25/74
30A296
' '
+
+
CD-34
30A300
---
CD-58
Figure 1 1. Glide Slope Coupler Test Cables and Jumper Plug
TEST EQUIPMENT
ISSUED: 11/25/74
10-3
SECTION
XI
SET-UP
BENCH
PROCEDURES
Paragraph
11-1.
11-2.
1 1-3.
11-4.
Page
Introduction
Equipment Required for Bench Check
Bench Checking of the Glide Slope Coupler
WiringDiagrams............................................
ISSUED: 11/25/74
11-1
11-1
1 1-1
11-4
xi-i
SECTION XI
BENCH SET-UP PROCEDURES

11-1. INTRODUCTION. The information in this section
the Glide Slope Coupler and the proper procedure for
procedure is also described. For red button and adjusting
Figure 11-1. For functional ground and flight checks, refer
11-4 of this section.
will list the equipment necessary to bench check

connecting this equipment. The bench set-up
pot location on Glide Slope Amplifier, refer to
to Section X. For Schematics, refer to paragraph
l 1-2. EQUIPMENT REQUIRED FOR BENCH CHECK. The following test equipment will be required to
bench check the Glide Slope Coupler.
a.
Gyro Substitute Test Box, 66D141-1.
b.
Power Section Test Box, 66D141-2.
c.
Radio Coupler Tester, 66Dl41-4.
d.
Console Substitute Test Box, 66Dl41-3.
e.
AltiMatic III Cable Harness, 30D207.
f.
Glide Slope Coupler Cable, 30C291.
g.
Glide Slope Coupler Test Cable, 30A300.
h.
Glide Slope Light and Cable, 30B317.
i.
AltiMatic IIIC Amplifier.
14-Volt DC Power Supply or 28-Volt DC Power Supply, whichever is applicable.
j.
1l-3. BENCH CHECKING OF THE GLIDE SLOPE COUPLER.
a.
Use the 66D141 Test Kit and make the following connections. After all connections are made as
described in Steps 1 to 27 incl. proceed to bench check.
1. Make sure VOLTAGE SELECTOR SWITCH, located on top plate of amplifier is in correct
position (14-volt DC or 28-volt DC) to match bench power supply.
2. Position amplifier so that 30-pin amplifier board is visible.
3. Plug large 30-pin AMP connector of the AltiMatic III test harness onto the amplifier board
with the cable fanning out to the right. Identification placard on the amplifier should be visible.
4. Plug AMP connector CD-20 from the test harness into the CD-20 receptacle located on the
5. Plug the 4-pin male CD-16 connector from the test harness into the female 4-pin receptacle
located on the right hand side of the Power Section Test Box. This receptacle is labeled AMPLIFIER. On
the Power Section Test Box, find the Voltage Selector Switch on the lower left hand corner and insure that
this switch is positioned to match the bench power supply and the Amplifier Voltage Selector Switch in
Step 1. (14 volts DC or 28-volts DC.)
6. Rotate SELECTOR KNOB on Power Section Test Box to the CENTER or "OFF" position.
7. Find the RADIO SIGNAL SUBSTITUTE KNOB located on the RADIO COUPLER TEST
BOX, immediately to the right of the bottom Omni Meter. MAKE SURE THIS RADIO SIGNAL KNOB IS
IN THE "IN" POSITION.
8. Find the VOLTAGE SELECTOR SWITCH located immediately to the left of the Red and
Black DC input terminals on the face of the Radio Coupler Test Box. Place this VOLTAGE SELECTOR
SWITCH in the proper voltage position.
9. Rotate LARGE VERNIER CONTROL KNOB on face of Gyro Substitute Test Box to the
CENTER or "ZERO" position on the BOTTOMSCALE labeled PITCH DEGREES.
ISSUED: 11/25/74
11-1
10. Below the Large Vernier Knob on the Gyro Substitute Box find a SLIDE SWITCH labeled
"ROLL" and "PITCH." Place this slide switch in the "DOWN" or "PITCH" position.
11. Connect a ground lead to the bottom mounting flange of the AltiMatic Amplifier.
-
CAUTION
DO NOT PLACE THE GROUND LEAD NEAR THE OUTPUT
TRANSISTORS LOCATED BETWEEN THE COOLING FINS
ALONG THE SIDE OF THE AMPLIFIER.
12. Place the POWER SELECTOR SWITCH located on the lower left hand corner of the
Console Substitute Test Box to the DOWN or "OFF" position.
13. Attach the DELCO fitting from the white wire CD-27 to the positive side of the power
supply.
14. Immediately to the right of the AMP connector CD-20, find a 14-volt or 28-volt SLIDE
SWITCH, place this switch to the proper voltage position to agree with Voltage Selector Switch on the top
plate of the amplifier.
15. On the Console Substitute Test Box, place the Altitude Selector Switch in the Altitude
Control position.
16. Connect the 24-pin male plug of the 30C291 harness to the Glide Slope Coupler.
17. Connect the FEMALE CD-10 of Glide Slope Coupler Harness (30C291) to the CD-10
connector on the Console Substitute Box.
18. Connect the MALE CD-10 of Glide Slope Coupler Harness (30C291) to the female CD-10 of
the AltiMatic Test Harness.
19. Connect FEMALE CD-18 of the Glide Slope Coupler Harness to CD-18 on the Gyro
Substitute Box.
20. Connect MALE CD-18 of the Glide Slope Coupler Harness to the female CD-18 connector
of the AltiMatic Harness.
21. Connect Power Supply of either 14-volts or 28-volts A+ whichever is applicable to Glide
Slope Harness as listed below:
14-volt A+ connects to CD-6 I
28-volt A+ connects to CD-62
22. Connect ground lead from 308317 Light Assembly to Power Supply Ground.
23. Connect Glide Slope Harness CD-60 to Power Supply Ground.
24. Connect Glide Slope Coupler Harness CD-59 to the appropriate (14 or 28-volts) CD-59 of
the 30B317 Light Assembly.
25. Connect the CD-34 end of the 30A300 Test Cable to the CD-34 (Radio) receptacle of the
66DI41-4 Coupler Tester.
26. Connect the CD-58 end of 30A300 Test Cable to CD-58 of the Glide Slope Coupler Harness.
27. Connect the single lead of the 30A300 Test Cable to ground.
NOTE
Normally the Glide Slope Coupler logic circuit receives its ground
from Pin K (loc norm) of the Radio Coupler; however, when using
test cable 30A300 ground is obtained through an external lead
which permits normal Glide Slope Coupler operation regardless of
Radio Coupler Mode.
28. Turn Power Supply "ON."

11-2

ISSUED: 11/25/74
BUREDON
ADJUSTING
POTENTIOMETER
Figure 11-1. Glide Slope Coupler

29. Place the ON/OFF switch, located in the lower left corner of the Console Substitute Test
Box in the ON position. Depress RED BUTTON located at BOTTOM RIGHT corner of Power Section Test
Box labeled INPUT VOLTAGE. Test box needle should deflect to the right and read 12-14 or 24-28 volts
DC, whichever is applicable, on TOP SCALE.
30. Place the Selector Switch on the Power Section Test Box to the "Res" position.
31. On the Console Substitute Test Box, center the Altitude Control Knob and adjust the Pitch
Trim Knob to center the needle on the Power Section Test Box.
32. Pull OUT radio signal knob on Radio Coupler Tester, rotate COUNTERCLOCKWISE to
obtain 60% in the blue.
NOTE
With reference to the Glide Slope Coupler, blue is UP and yellow
is DOWN.
33. To ARM the Glide Slope Coupler, maintain 60% for 20 seconds.
Reduce radio signal slowly by rotating the Radio Signal Knob clockwise until "LOCK ON"
occurs. This can be determined by the green indicator light coming on. Also, an audible "click" will be
detected from the relay.
35. Push Radio Signal Knob OFF. (This keeps needle centered.)
34.

ISSUED: 11/25/74
11-3
36.
37.
large vernier
Rotate slot head potentiometer on glide slope coupler full clockwise. (Refer to Figure l 1-1.)
With red button depressed, center output meter on Power Section Test Box by rotating the
knob clockwise. On the scale labeled "Pitch Degrees," record the degrees required to center
the needle.
38. Rotate slot head potentiometer
on glide slope coupler full counterclockwise.
39. Depress red button on glide slope coupler and center output meter on Power Section Test
Box by rotating the large vernier knob counterclockwise. On-the scale labeled "Pitch Degrees," record the
degrees required to center the needle.
40. The total separation between the reading obtained in Step 37 and the reading obtained in
-2+3
Step 39 should be 6
41. Center the Attitude Gyro Knob.
42. Adjust the Potentiometer on the Glide Slope Coupler to approximately MID POINT.
43. Depress red button on glide slope coupler. Pull out Radio Signal Knob and rotate it
counterclockwise to obtain 100% UP (blue). Zero the output meter by rotating the large vernier knob
clockwise. Record the degrees required to zero the output meter on the Power Section Test Box.
44. Continue to depress Red Button on Glide Slope Coupler. Rotate Radio Signal Knob to
deflect the Radio Signal Meter to 100% DOWN (yellow). Zero the output meter by rotating the large
vernier knob counterclockwise. Record the degrees required to zero the output meter on the Power Section
Test Box.
45. The total separation between the reading obtained in Step 43 and the reading obtained in
7+ 2.
Step 44 should be
46. With red button released and the Radio Signal Meter indicating 100% DOWN (yellow) rotate
the large vernier knob on the Gyro Substitute Test Box counterclockwise until the output meter is
centered. WAIT 90 SECONDS. Record the reading on the "Pitch Degrees" scale.
47. With red button released and the Radio Signal Meter indicating 100% UP (blue), rotate the
large vernier knob on the Gyro Substitute Test Box clockwise until the output meter is centered. WAIT 90
SECONDS.
102.
48. The total separation between Step 46 and 47 should not exceed
b.
INTEGRATOR RATE TEST.
1. Push Radio Signal Substitute Knob "IN" and momentarily depress red button on glide slope
coupler.
2. Center the output meter on Power Section Test Box by rotating the large vernier knob on
the Gyro Substitute Test Box. WAIT 30 SECONDS after final rotation of knob.
3. Pull Radio Signal Substitute Knob "OUT."
4. With button released, obtain 20% UP (blue) indication on Radio Signal Meter, allow 90
seconds for Integrator to stabilize. Reverse Radio Signal to 20% DOWN (yellow). IMMEDIATELY record
the time required for the needle on the Power Section Test Box to pass through zero from a right
deflection. Time should be 15 to 35 seconds, observe needle now deflects left.
5. Push Radio Signal Knob "IN."
2
6. Rotate the large vernier knob counterclockwise
nose down.
7. Depress Red Button on Glide Slope Coupler and adjust potentiometer on glide slope coupler
to center Output Meter on Power Section Test Box.
c.
This completes Bench Set-Up.
I 1-4. WIRING DIAGRAMS. The following pages consist of wiring diagrams of the electrical harnesses and
mating connectors which pertain to the glide slope coupler. This information should be utilized when
troubleshooting the system for defective wiring. A continuity test of wiring can be performed with an
ohmmeter. This test will verify the harness is good and capable of carrying current. Should any wire or
connector fail to produce a reading on the ohmmeter, they are defective and must be repaired or replaced.
11-4

ISSUED: 11/25/74
XII
SECTION
SET-UP
GROUND
CHECK
ANDFLIGHT
PROCEDURES
Paragraph
12-1.
12-2.
GroundOperationalCheck
FlightSet-UpProcedures
ISSUED: 11/25/74
Page
12-1
12-1
xii-i
SECTION XII
GROUND CHECK AND FLIGHT SET-UP PROCEDURES
NOTE
Normally the Glide Slope Coupler logic circuit receives its ground
from Pin K (loc norm) of the Radio Coupler; however, when using
test cable 30A300 ground is obtained through an external lead
which permits normal Glide Slope Coupler operation regardless of
Radio Coupler Mode.
12-1. GROUND OPERATIONAL CHECK.
a.
Remove aircraft harness connector CD-58 from glide slope coupler and connect test cable
CD-58
30A300
to glide slope coupler. Connect CD-34 end of the 30A300 test cable to the receptacle
CD-34
labeled
(radio) on the coupler tester, 66D141-4. Attach the lead labeled "Ground" of the 30A300
test cable to the airplane ground.
b.
On the 66D141-4 Radio Coupler Tester, adjust the Lower Radio Signal Meter for 60% UP (blue).
c.
Connect CD-18 of the Glide Slope Harness to the 66D141-1 Gyro Substitute Test Box.
d.
With the aircraft master switch ON engage the AltiMatic IIIC, make sure it is in the ALT Hold
Mode.
e.
After 20 seconds slowly decrease the Radio Simulator Signal, the coupler should lock ON when
zero output is indicated on the Radio Signal Meter. The green light also indicates lock ON.
f.
Alternately rotate the Radio Signal Substitute Knob to UP (blue) and DOWN (yellow) 60%
positions. Note that the stabilator or elevator moves accordingly.
NOTE
Response will not be immediate when reversing radio signal as it
will take time for the integrator to stabilize.
12-2. FLIGHT SET-UP PROCEDURES. The flight adjustment is provided for the purpose of establishing
the correct pitch attitude required to maintain the Glide Path Track. This minimizes the corrective action
required of the error integrator to maintain tracking with the Glide Slope Converter centered.
a.
Remove the glide slope coupler by removing the two mounting screws which are located on the
mounting flange.
b.
Connect one end of CD-63 extension cable to the 30C291 harness installed in the airplane.
Connect the other end of this extension cable to the CD-63 receptable on the glide slope coupler.
c.
Connect CD-58 cable from glide slope coupler to CD-58 of the Mitchell P/N 30A300 Test Cable
(Piper P/N 757 874). Connect CD-34 of the Test Cable to CD-34 receptacle on the Radio Coupler Tester
66D1414. Connect the single lead of the 30A300 test cable to the airplane ground.

ISSUED: 11/25/74
12-1
d.
Fly to an area clear of traffic and off the airways. Also fly to an altitude sufficient to make a
simulated approach and descent.
e.
With the autopilot operating, engage ALT Hold.
f.
Establish approach speed with gear down and flaps set in accordance with appropriate Airplane
Flight Manual. (Not to exceed 15 ).
PULL Radio Signal Substitute
Knob, on 66D141-4 Test Box, OUT and rotate it
g.
counterclockwise to 100% blue indication. This is equivalent to being under the glide slope which is
necessary to arm the glide slope coupler.
h.
Maintain 100% UP signal for approximately 20 seconds then slowly rotate the Radio Signal
Substitute Knob to center the needle.
i.
As needle crosses center, glide slope coupler will "Lock ON," which can be noted by the green
indicator light coming on. The aircraft will pitch slightly to a nose down attitude.
j.
Push Radio Signal Substitute Knob OFF (in). This is equivalent to Glide Slope Coupler Needle
being centered.
k.
Adjust power to maintain approach airspeed.
1.
Depress red button on glide slope coupler and adjust adjacent potentiometer to set a 500 feet per
minute descent. (Clockwise is UP.)
m. Repeat procedure to be sure adjustment is satisfactory.
n.
Disconnect test cable 30A300 and connect Glide Slope Coupler CD-58 to Glide Slope Indicator
CD-58 connector.
o.
Disconnect extension cable CD-63 and connect aircraft CD-63 to the glide slope coupler. Make a
coupled ILS approach.
p.
Reinstall Glide Slope Coupler in the airplane.
12-2

ISSUED: 11/25/74
PART III
ALTIMATIC IIIC
ELECTRONIC PITCH TRIM
REVISED: 10/16/81
SECTION Xlli
INTRODUCTION
AND DESCRIPTION
13-1. INTRODUCTION.
This part of the service manual is divided into four sections. Section XIll,
contains a description of the AltiMatic IllC Pitch Trim System. Section XIV, Theory of Operation, explains
of the system. Section XV explains the proper ground check of the system, and
the functional operation
Section X VI provides a Troubleshooting Isolation Block Diagram.
13-2. DESCRIPTION.
The AltiMatic IIIC Electronic Pitch Trim System has both a manual mode
of operation and an automatic mode of operation. The manual mode is operational only when the autopilot
is disengaged or the roll axis only is engaged, and the automatic mode is operational only when the pitch axis
of the autopilot is engaged.
a.
MANUAL MODE. This mode applies to the trim system when the pitch portion of the autopilot
is disengaged. Trim may be accomplished by the htiman pilot electrically by use of the trim switch on the
pilot's control wheel. The disengage button is incorporated in the control wheel mounted trim switch and
must be depressed to make the electric tm switch effective. Also, the panel mounted Trim Master Switch
must be pushed to the ON position. When the trim switch is moved to the forward position with the disengage
button depressed. it completes a circuit to the servo motor, at the same time, power is applied to a solenoid
which engages the trim servo motor to the capstan through a set of gears. Since the trim system cables
are wrapped
around the capstan, any rotation of the trim servo motor results in a change of position of the
airplane's trim system, thus deflecting the stabilator or elevator trim tab in the conventional manner. When
the human pilot releases the switch, it returns to the OFF position and power is then disconnected from the
trim servo motor and the engage solenoid which completely disengages the electric trim motor from the
airplane's trim system cables. If the switch is moved to the rear position. the same events occur except the
polarity of the servo motor is reversed insuring the opposite direction of rotation.
b.
AUTOMATIC MODE. When the Roll and Pitch engage switches on the AltiMatic lllC Console
are engaged, the trim switch on the pilot's control wheel becomes inoperative and electrical power is applied
to the electronic trim amplifier and pitch trim servo engage solenoid. The electronic trim amplifier electronically senses trim requirements and adjusts the trim as required by providing electrical power sufficient
to drive the DC trim servo motor.
NOTE
The engage solenoid will maintain engagement of the servo motor
and capstan gears continuously while the pitch axis of the
Autopilot is engaged.
1NTRODECTION
REVISED:
10/16/81
AND DESCRIPTION
13-1
SECTION
XIV
THEORY
OFOPERATION
ige
ParagrapShystemExplanation
.......
REVISED: 10/16/81
.....
.............
........
xiv-i
SECTION
XIV
THEORY OF OPERATION
14-1. SYSTEM EXPLANTION:
The AltiMatic lllC Autopilot utilizes an Electronic Pitch Trim System in place of the electromechanical system used in previous EDO MITCHELL equipment. An Electronic Pitch Trim Amplifier takes
the place of the Mechanical Pitch Trim Sensor Assembly used to monitor stabilator elevator cable tension.
AUTOMATIC MODE. In the Automatic Mode (Autopilot pitch axis engaged), the Electronic
a.
Pitch Trim Amplifier monitors the analoa voltage being applied to the autopilot pitch servo. Depending on
the amount of voltage and the time period voltage is present and changing, the Electronic Trim Amplifier
pulses the pitch trim servo motor in either very slow pulses, for minute pitch trim charge, or higher
frequency pulses resulting in constant medium speed trim change.
b.
MANUAL MODE. In the Manual Mode (Autopilot pitch axis dis-engaged), the Electronic
Pitch Trim Amplifer operates the pitch trim servo at maximum speed.
This design offers fail-safe runaway trim protection, and can withstand
any type single failure,
trim system results. Further, due to variable trim rates, the system is better suited to
without uncontrolled
higher performance aircraft from an operational standpoint.
14-1
REV1SED:
10/16/81
SECTION XV
GROUND CHECK
ELECTRONIC PITCH TRIM SYSTEM

Page
Paragraph
15-1.
ADDED:
Ground Check
10/16/81
Electronic Pitch Trim System
................................
I5-l
PIPER ALTIMATIC
IIIC SERVICE MANUAL
SECTION XV
GROUND CHECK
ELECTRONIC PITCH TRIM SYSTEM

NOTE
It is very important to never use a substitute trim system component

part, for an original design part, because the fail-safe characteristics
of the system might be compromised. Perform the following ground
checks before flight, when service has been performed. A trim
system running the wrong direction, is the same as a run-away. It
is possible to experience excessive pilot yoke forces in only 3-4
seconds under such conditions.
15-1. GROUND
1.
CHECK OF ELECTRONIC PITCH TRIM SYSTEM.

MANUAL MODE.
Run engines to erect gyros on a level ramp.
a.
Check trim circuit breaker "lN".
b.
-
MANUAL ELECTRIC TRIM

When the AltiMatic IIIC is disengaged. the pilot can adjust pitch
trim electrically through a switch on the pilot's control wheel (see
Figure 15-1). The Master A P Disconnect|Trim
Interrupt Switch
(located on the pilot's control wheel) will disconnect the Autopilot
and Yaw Damper when pressed and released. When pressed and
held this switch will interrupt all electric trim operations.
AUTOPILOT
DISENGAGE
ELECTRIC
PITCH TRIM
MASTER
A/P
DISCONNECT/TRtM
INTERRUPT
SWITCH
vam
PA31
(tte
& TM
usn
PA-32 AND
PA 34-200T
SERIES
Tare
OM/0FF
ONLY
TRIM
MASTER
SWITCH
PA23-250
Figure 15-1
ADDED:
10/16/81
15-1
PIPER ALTIMATIC
IHC SERVICE MANUAL
Turn ON TRIM MASTER SWITCH (Ref. Fig. 15-1).

c.
d.
ENGAGE ROLL on Autopilot Console and ROTATE ROLL COMMAND KNOBto stop
Control Yoke Alleron action.
e.
PL LL AND HOLD CONTROL YOKE to neutral level flight position.
f.
ENGAGE PITCH on Autopilot Console and ROTATE PlTCH COMMAND DISK to
stop Control Yoke Elevator-Stabilator action.
NOTE
It may be necessary to manually assist Pitch Servo to support
Elevator/ Stabilator Weight on ground, due to clutch slip point
setting.
g.
DEPRESS MASTER A P DISCONNECT TRIM INTERRUPT SWITCH (Button-Ref.
Fig. 15-1) on pilot's control yoke, to verify this switch immediately disconnects Autopilot.
h.
INTERRUPT
SWITCH IN and
HOLD THIS MASTER A P DISCONNECT/TRIM
actuate AUTOPILOT ELECTRIC PITCH TRIM SWITCH (Rocker-Ref. Fig. 15-1) on pilot's control
yoke to verify this rocker switch is now inoperative.
i.
RELEASE MASTER A P DISCONNECT BUTTON.
j.
Repeat Steps d, e, and f above and DEPRESS AUTOPILOT/ELECTRIC
PITCH TRlM
ROCKER SWITCH on pilot's control yoke; to verify this rocker switch, also, immediately disengages
Autopilot.
k.
DO NOT RE-ENGAGE AUTOPlLOT.
l.
Again DEPRESS AUTOPILOT/ELECTRIC
PITCH TRIM ROCKER SWITCH. AND
while Top Bar is depressed, move switch AFT
check that PITCH TRIM moves UP.
m. While continumg to depress AUTOPILOT ELECTRIC
PITCH TRIM ROCKER
SWITCH. move this rocker switch FORWARD check that PITCH TRIM moves DOWN.
n.
RELEASE PRESSURE on Top Bar of switch. Verify the AUTOPILOT ELECTRIC
TRIM SWITCH is inoperative in both directions, if Top Bar of rocker switch is not depressed.
AUTOMATIC MODE.
2.
In this mode there will be approximately a 3-second DELAYED Pitch Trim response, after a pitch
change is commanded
on the Autopilot Console.
a.
ENGAGE ROLL on Autopilot Console and rotate ROLL COMMAND KNOB to stop
Control Yoke Aileron motion.
b.
PULL AND HOLD CONTROL YOKE to a neutral or level flight position.
c.
ENGAGE PITCH on Autopilot Console, and ROTATE PITCH COMMAND DISK to stop
Control Yoke. Elevator-Stabilator action.
-
NOTE
lt may be necessary to manually assist Pitch Servo to support
Elevator/Stabilator
Weight on ground due to clutch slip point
setting.
ROTATE PITCH COMMAND DISK for UP Command. Observe PITCH TRIM follows
3-second delay.
e.
ROTATE PITCH COMMAND DISK for DOWN Command. Observe PITCH TRIM
follows with DOWN TRIM after approximately 3-second delay.
d.
with UP TRIM after approximately
15-2
ADDED:
10/16/81
PIPER ALTIMATIC
IIIC SERVICE MANUAL
NOTE
resemble
Pitch Trim Servo response
speed may not
The
models. The Electronic Pitch Trim Amplifier
earlier altimatic
will determine if slow pulse or medium pulse trim servo speed
will occur. If very slow pulses of pitch trim appear before
higher pitch trim speed occurs

DO NOT MISlNTERPRET
AS A FAULT.
-
THIS OCCURANCE
f.
ADDED:
This completes the ground checks of the Electronic Pitch Trim System.
10/16/81
15-3
SECTION XVI
TROUBLESHOOTING
Paragraph
16-1.
Page
Introduction
REVISED:
10/16/81
& Isolation Block Diagram......................................
16-1
xvi
-i
SECTION XVI
INTRODUCTION
16-1. INTRODUCTION.
The AltiMatic IllC Autopilot is equipped
with Electronic Pitch Trim.
No special test equipment or adjustments are required with this system. For appropriate wiring diagrams of
the trim system refer to Section VI of this manual as the trim system is part of the autopilot. Utilize the wiring
the system.
diagrams to troubleshoot
TROUBLE
ISOLATION BLOCK DIAGRAM

TABLE XVI-1.
START
1. Turn aircraft master switch on.
2. Engage autopilot pitch mode.
3. Move autopilot pitch command
wheel for a pitch up command.
Check trim servo and trim amplifier
output with 66DI41-2 power section.
NO
Check trim amplifier

A=(CD-45 Pin B)
Observe aircraft trim wheel movement

for pitch up trim.
NO
NO
YES
Move autopilot pitch command

for a pitch down command.
Check to see if autopilot

is running.
wheel
pitch servo
NO
YES
Observe aircraft trim wheel movement
for pitch down trim.
YES
Check manual trim switch and wiring.
Disengage autopilot and operate manual trim switch, on aircraft control

for pitch up trim.
NO
wheel,
NO
YES
Observe aircraft trim

for pitch up trim
wheel
movement
YES
TROUBLESHOOTING
ADDED:
10/16/81
Observe aircraft trim
Operate manual trim switch for pitch

down trim.
wheel
movement
for pitch down trim.
YES
FINISH
16-1
NOTE
THIS IS A COMPLETE MANUAL
The AltiMatic IllC Service Manual, 761 602 ORG741125 has

been reprinted in its entirety and includes PR750613,
PR791130
and
PR780810,
PR770415,
PR780310,
PR81I016.
Please insert the foldout pages at the end of this manual in
their proper numerical sequence prior to using the manual.
CD-59
30C291
..
CD-62
CD
+28
INDD
CD-59
+
14
VDC
CD-18
(MALE)
CD-58
CD-58
B
C
-
II
I\
Il
il
G S+DN
C S+UP
428VOC
---
10
---
---
11
---
GNO
CD-18
(FEMALE)
13
I6I
1
11
II
II
14
----
---
---
---
E
D
DUT
PITCH COMM.
---
15
PITill313.111
14
PITCH
EX.
18
PITCH
EX.
19
ALT SIG. IN
17
-
CD-10
ALT ENG
(MALE)
-
IIP
---
21
YOC QUT
+14
ALT SIG. OUT

ALT ENG
+i4
YOC IN
GND
CD-10
(FEMALE)
D-43
(MALE)
Figure 11-2. Glide Slope Coupler Hamess

REVISED: 6/13/75
11-5/11-6
OD
(
CD
mzas. 1
Illl--l
24 fin
to
RECEFTACLE
17 16
8
MAY 1 AliD NAV 2
SELECTOR 5WITCH
19 20
It
--
Hll.l+Elllll
15
[4TTE lTfT-1@H'TiT
T49
TTNF
DEFMCia
Il
OF
ll
BAF
ED
Hlll
3MFCBA
lllED
lilllilillillilllllifillillillilli
NAV2
lillililllittititittittitillitilli
1112
918
2021
MAvt
25
1LER
CO
CourtER
Figure 11-3. Plug Bracket Schematic for AltiMatic IIIC With Glide Slope Coupler, PA-31
Issued: H/25/74
11-7/11-8
PRE55URE
BULKHEAD
BULKHEAO
206320-1 C0m. (PURDI)

PS10025-8-305 (2) REU.
E N("Tit").4
CONN Ra108
1------NAV
2------NAV
FLAG
FLAG
14/2BV
3------085
(-)
()
5-E0012-22
(a)
STATOR (G)
-TO
FROM
-(
------
------
------
TO
NS-EOO12-2
1-
FROM
9
10
--
LT
RADIO
RT
(De
latf.-2.P
CONN.
FCP-16
PLLG(90But
(?)?stooti-!
(PuncN)
COMi CD-71
CONN.
IM
R-UIA
(
(
17
(
(
21
--
------11
5-E0012-2
28V
2
15
"
11
------12
MS-EDOt2.-if.]
--
"
----..-
RA010
-----37-----GNO.
-
12f.-l-tXI)
08-24659
SHEt.L
(2)053018 POST (PuRoi)
FCP-30
YAW
D A M PE R
STT.TOR (F)
FROM
11 ------1./R
12------L/R
FLUX
OETECTOR
CONN.
OR (H}------
7------485
? ------TO
10----
0194.-25P
LPMS-E0012-20
INPUT
6------065
8 --------DBS
--
37
(AGG
11
COUPLER
1
P5tootS-2-(,5
ul aE
(RPSE)
RMI
NAV
---------LIGHTS
----
14V
SUP.
(OUT)
+14V ROLL MOD. SUP.
(OUT)
--------HDG
---
-----
---
---
-14
--
---
---
-----
--
--in
SL:
ROTOR
la
15
(
(
17
-------CT
.CT
18
Rd!
NSO-360
p----
FCP-30
(
(
(
(
(
11
23
(C)
G/S CDUPLER
20
-6
41
(T)
41
STATOR
(2)
41
STATOR (H)
MAGNETIC
HAANggs
21
FLUX
22
>-
13
UNNA
WtRE(LSC)
-E
Co
33
3CI
CP
.:Vt
71
SwtTCM
..A
ge
*1
RActo
COUPLER
DETECTOR
i:RNESS
GNO
wtRE(At,CD)
34
COUPLER
91
CGIL
41
SLAVING C0it
----
4tirR
.5EL
------
STATOR
--------SLAVING
0-4(?
NOS-360
1617-
MS-EDO12-20
STATOR (I
--------CT
--
MS-EGO12-22
ROTOR
-.
------CT
-----------CT
--
ROTOR
-O----
IN
STATOR
--
-21-----
15-
STATOR
-21
--
la
STATOR
--
*---20-----
HARNESSASSEMBLY
-ARiESS
NORM
-G/5 FLAG (-)
G/S FLIG ()
2/C GROUND
------
-18
MS-2-22
REC(tP
G/S SIG. UP)

G/5 REC(CN) MS-E0012-22
SIG ( DN)
-----
-17
--
-------LOC
-16-------LDC200E
-CP-1
I
G/S
--------G/S
-i------COURSE
------TO
-
ROLL F.00SIGNAL
-15-------TO
5-E0012-2
(C)
STATOR (1
STATOR (0)
5-------085
GND.
ROTOR
ROTOR
4-------065
(um
Cael R410s
-----------atRFREME
HARNESS
1991-9RPUS (PURDi.)
(a) PS10025-1-1F
2369-1 COM (PURDI.)

P5tu)2H-30S(26
REO.)
MAGNETIC
NAV 1
NAV t
HARNESS
PRESSURE
41
SHIELD GROUND
----
SHIELD GACOND
--
CT ROTOR (H)
----SLAVING
C0tL
SLAVING COIL
--
--------CT
---
--
..-
-..--1AV.
..
--
COIL
C0tL
-22
MS-E0012-2S
I
----.------...-..._
SHIELD
-30------
---31
E0012
(DIL CDITER TM
v.D.C.
SHIELD
------28
PMS-
COIL
--------..SLAVING
2
a2
ROTOR (H)
--------SLAVING
-------,SLAVING
---
42
-----
SHIELD
----------
31------A*YNDAMPER
35------A*CLUTCH
--------------A+YAwDAMPER
...g
-------)
-31---
31
ft
L"Ott10
DJ
(
(
34
35
i
.
Figure 6-32. HSI, EDO-AIRE Mitchell Harness, PA-31P (cont.)
WIRING DIAGRAMS
REVISED: 3/10/78:
6-35
PIPER ALTIMATIC IIIC SERVICE
SIC32
MANUAL
TOP PLATE ASSY

GYRO
MOTOR
EXCITATION
StG
E
\
81831 FRONT
PLATE ASSY
C
6
7
2
GRN
gy
IN4001
WHT
WHT
CLOTCH
COIL
WHT
SCHEMATLKC
FOR
H
[8485
H
CD-104R
CD-IO4P
09
3
2N3055
A/C
CIRCUIT
BREAKER
5
2
40S74-1
MAGNETIC
SWITCH
64
AREC LIGHT
4
CIS
C17
A/C A+
LIGHT
R46
LEFT HEAT
SIC29
SINK ASSY
A
30C4tO
---
---
--
--
SIC30
ASSY
RIGHT HEAT
SINK
____
ASSY
D
IC651-()
--
CABLE
--
----
YAW DAMPER
----
---
--
---
----
-----
----
--
----
-----
---
A/C A+
CD-48
P A NEL
LIGHTS
NC
lAS26 OR 18544
RELAY BOX OR
40 S76 WHEEL Swt TCH
Figure 6-9. Yaw Damper Schematic (Optional)

WIRNG DIAGRAMS
ISSUED: 11/25/74
6-11
fri,
nrto.
GED
arn.
24 PIN RECEPTACLE
is
u ta
un
ti
13
2e
--
NAY 1 AND NAV 2
SELECTOR SWITCH
-----
...amamm..
MOTE:
THE NUMBERS SHOWN ON THE 50
PIN PLUG BRACKET ARE FOR
REFERENCEONLY.
MEDBA
MFEDCSA
MpgOCSA
MEDBA
IJM
lilli
is
oso
eo
oso
oo
BAF
DE
IIO
lli
EDCs
KJMFCes
lilHilii
ca.x
so
Figure 6-31. Plug Bracket Schematic for Altimatic HIC (PA-31)

ULING DIAGRAMS
REVISED: 4/15/77
6-33,
YRO
SLAVIN6
(/P
AMPLIBER
1-30240
DAMPER
anca)
(3)95100,.5-1-let
(1) PSIOORS-t-2M
CONM
(PURCR)
CD-t
i
SELE(TOR
SWITCH
YM
1991-9PPLuo
ISIfo-EP
CONNR3eiA
126-1002
1991-9R
RECEPT.
(PURDI.)(9)PS10025-i-1F
PLUG(EUCH)
(2)PitOO25-1-2.M
CONN
126-222
(PURCH.)
CONN 00-106
00-111
6/5
COUPLER
COUPLER
57-30360 CONN.
PLU
(PifRCH.)
SiM
CONNR3toCA
RADIO
NSO-360
NSE-360
126-215-1001
26-217-loDOCONol.
CONN-
(-33
CONN
CONN.
(PURCH.)
(PURCH.)
(PURCH.)
CONN CD-34
(.OUPLER
ypritSS
60-58
NN
REQUIRED NMEN EMt

15 NOT
INSTALLED
8
RP10C
Ite
28
23
tr.17-
32
is
33
34
19
20
21
22
)
)
GIN H
--------
--
'
a
9
)
)
13
14
15
16
0
E-------------
a
3
----.4
-----(
HEN
Rril
15
----
-------
---
--.--.--------------------.----------
------.-------------------------------
-...--.-----.----
--
35
)--A
36
)---0
E TO PIN & s REcuiRED

NOT INSTALLED
.nfHOUTRMI
-
--
--
--
..
..
--.
-.
--
-.--
...
-...
--
--
-.
-------------------
JUf1PERTROM PIN
URCH
-------------------------
----------------.--
-------------
--------
------------
IRES $2,33.34REQUIRED
-.
--------------------------------------
---------
---
)
)
)
---------------
IRES29,io,*3tREQutREOWancufRnl
RE5 35.3G./37
1-sG351-O
--
FOLIIREQWITio;TRMI
PSICOPS-8 2-3P
r-------
31
15
-----.------------------
-B
19
--
9-
---------
PS10025-5-2
14
25
26
33
L9C
11
..----...-
--a
-------....
---.-
--.,.
710. 5WITC.M(PORC.w)
NSTAL ONLY WHEM RTM 15 tNSTALLEO)

45
IRES 45
44,
41 REcutRED
WITH RMI
---
--
Figure 6-32. HSI, EDO-AIRE Mitchell Harness, PA-31P

6-34.
WIRING DIAGRAMS
REVISED: 3/10/78:
NSO 360
+HOGICOURSE
EX.
-HDGICOURSE
EX.
4-106
CD-33
;
C
20
IC368-2
RADIO COUPLER
Da MODULE SUPPLY(OUTI
ROLL MODULE SUPPLY (OUT)
-14v
/C775
NAV FLAG ADARTE
"gg"""'
CD
-/5/
L/H
NEEDLE INPUT +LT
17
L/R
NEEDLE INPUT +RT
18
CD-34
8 L/R
A
D
(A/P
(+UP)
GIS.5tG
GIS SIG (+ DN)
OMNI t.OC MOOE SW INPUT
LT
CD 58
'
18
-----
35
3/3
G/5
NAV RECEIVER
LOC SwfTCN
HC
RT
GUT
ALAG te
m/d
60
CONVEf
CAs,
N-'O 360
Atv 7
TO
PIN
K OF
JOCSSO
TE CAdCE
CD-34
ADA
IN
AIRFRAME GNO
SPARE
UT
QM
fEC
CONVEgT2
---
sPARE
3
4
SPARE
NS)-36O
7
9
9
10------
5WITCHED
JPARE
3AE
JPAR
NAV fthff
--
i
10
! sio"'S
rear impar
OBS STATOR (G)

0BS STATOR (F)
G/S FLAG
GIS FLAG +
LOC FLAG
LOC FLAG
TO -FROM TO
ROM + FROM
UK
25
2G
29
30
31
32
33
re
--
.ner;
6
7
I
MV M/ATT
MVINPUT
20
--
eED--A+(42dvoC)
aut
3
a
$
3Paf
NAV FLAdt-)
A+
AME 6 OUND
IC
II
12
065 ROTOR(AIOR(H)
085ROTOR(C)
..
At
NAV FLAG
NAV FLAG +
SPARE
(4VINPUT
14/2BV INPUT
14/2BV INPUT
TUUREUSE
Wy(qgg
T
NAV
30C291 GIS COUPt.ER

SIG (+UP)
SIG (+ONI
70-TFOMfs&PQui
INTUT JECM
YN
C
D isPARE
----
L/R RADIO
GROUND
UNE
RADIO COUPLER
NSO
ER SWITC
tC388-2
RADIO ti
.--seurfyg----.
-fw
10
swer/GeAv
---
A+
,2
sa
cs.
-r.
ECO-AIRE
IC707
"
::NO
TAP
'
GYRO SLAVING AMP
O'O /*fl?) 27
6/3/,cg;
74
4/5 ftAG t-) 29
V.D.C.
:
STA TOR
LO
'
' 'I
C
A
1I
i
I i
'
JUMPER
AMPHENOL 126-1082
9 PM PLUGl
TCHELL P/NOSt02
IC714
CON TU
11
J
O
0
F
E
K
--
no
pio
A/DTED-
er
24 14/28
22
:.
6 F D.
C.S.
OETECTQR
NSO36O
AIR ORIVEN SLAVED
NAVIGATION SITUATION DISPLAY
CT ROTOR (C)
CT STATOR (X)
CT STATOR (Y).
CT STATOR (ZI
CT ROTOR (H)
SLAVING COIL
SLAVING COtt
SLAVING COIL +
SLAVING COlt. CENTER
"
At/LW-50o6
UNLJS
MITCHELL
CD-Ill
CC-t!5
A+ TO LOAD SIDE OF NSO-360
TOAIRCRAFT
::
ALL WIP/N6
Z2da.M/N
21
22
TEffDNNCT
SLAVING MODESELECTOA
SWITCH,3POT
ON-OFF-0N
AMPHENOt.
2 FD.ROTOR
23
3 CT ROTOR (C)!
5 CT STATOR (X) et
7 CT STATOR tYl ei
D CT STATOR(Z) mi
4 CT ROTOR (M) mi
toC
LAG(F2CM)
I-
3--
W/6LK/
If
LOCALIZEF
MT/SLX/YEL
JP
16 SLAvtNGCOILM
17 SL.IVING WIL se
20 GROUNO (SHIELDwil
21 GROUNO(SHIELOa21
4
SPARE
11 SPARE
12 SPAne
Ig
gpggg
15
CTROTOR(H)a2
10 SLAVING CQite2
IS SLAVING COIL*2
JW
9 9 ;4
72 Q 24
J 2 ZZ
36
NAV
PECE/VE
USED
THAM
h/tTM
CONVEATERS
1C707.
OTHER
MITCNELL
57-30240
(24 PIN RECETACLE)

MITCHELL
PIN 2BS61
Figure 6-12. Horizontal Situation Indicator Schematic Slaved (Optional)

WIRING DIAGRAMS
REVISED: 3/10/78
6-15
RELAY BOX
S
NC
NG
NO
G
NO
NC
NO
TRIM
A/P A+
BUS BAR
SERVO
SOLENOID
SWITCH
TRIM DIREGTION SWITGH
S-3:TRIM
DISCONNECT
ENABLE/AP
S
S-2:
-t
TRIM
DIRECTION
CD-76
TRIM
INNTERRUPT SWITCH
BCOEF
CD-73
La
\
---
1C
L_
---
TO GD-27
NO
NC
CD-45
_NO
CD-43
GD-44
CO-83
GO-II3
CO-83
GD- IO2
GO-lO2
10709
CD-Il3
yr
GD-16
CD-36
CD-36
AMPLIFIER
i A/G GND.
PITCH SERVO MOTOR

LEAD FROM MAIN
CABLE HARNESS
00-37
CD-42
TRIM MASTER
SWITCH
ELECTRONIC
PITGH TRIM
CD-39
CD-16
--
A
A+
TRIM CIRGUIT
BREAKER
3 AMP
-40
CD-lf
A B
SHOWN IN PiTCH
OFF PONSS EN
I
SOLENOlD
PITCH
SERVO
Figure 6-13. Electronic Trim System Schematic

6-16
WIRING DIAGRAMS
ISSUED: 11/25/74

Altimatic IIIc Maintenance

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Altimatic IIIc Maintenance

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

IER

Piper Aircraft Corporation, Vero Beach, Florida

PIPER ALTIMATIC IIIC SERVICE MANUAL

Current, Permanent and Temporary Revisions to this AltiMatic IIIC

June 13, 1975

PIPER ALTIMATIC IIIC SERVICE MANUAL

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY

PIPER ALTIMATIC IIIC SERVICE MANUAL

PIPER ALTIMATIC IIIC SERVICE MANUAL

PIPER ALTIMATIC IRC SERVICE MANUAL

PIPER ALTIMATIC IIIC SERVICE MANUAL

INTRODUCTION AND DESCRIPTION

IIIC SERVICE MANUAL

AltiMatic IllC Block Diagram

Pitch and Rudder Servo Cable Tension Diagram

AltiMatic IIIC Console.....................................................

HIC SERVICE MANUAL

IIIC SERVICE MANUAL

Altitude Hold Unit Schematic...............................................

Servo, AltiMatic IIIC A P Harness, PA-23-250 (Six Place)

AltiMatic IIIC Glide Slope Coupler Approach

Manual Electric Trim.............................................

IIIC SERVICE MANUAL

PIPER ALTIMATIC IIIC SERVICE MANUAL

INTRODUCTION AND DESCRIPTION

Piper AltiMatic IIIC Automatic Flight Control System

PIPER ALTIMATIC IIIC SERVICE MANUAL

PIPER ALTIMATIC IIIC SERVICE MANUAL

PIPER ALTIMATIC IIIC SERVICE MANUAL

must be periodically reset to manually counteract

the effects of gyro

PIPER ALTIMATIC IIIC SERVICE MANUAL

AUTOPILOT AUTO MODE

TO CONTROL WHEEL MASTER

Installation of Autopilot Amplifier (PA-32-260, S/N 32-7500001 to

Installation of Relay Box (PA-32-260, S/N 32-7800001 and up;

Removal of Console (PA-34-200T)

Removal of Directional Gyro and/or Horizontal

PIPER ALTIMATIC IIIC SERVICE MANUAL

for the 1C363-1,

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

PIPER ALTIMATIC IIIC SERVICE MANUAL

TABLE III-I. ALTIMATIC IIIC TRIM SERVO CLUTCH TENSION

SEE NOTE IC373-6-529

IC373-6-529 Trim Servo and IC508-1-775P Pitch Servo used on

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

PIPER ALTIMATIC IIIC SERVICE MANUAL

ALTERNATE WIRING FOR

PA-32-260 300. PA-32R-300

Figure 3-1. Roll, Rudder and Pitch Servo Guide

PIPER ALTIMATIC IIIC SERVICE MANUAL

P/N 757 863 (42A 173-1)

PA-23-250 (Six Place) E & F Models

ROLL AND PITCH

P/N 758 082 (42A 184-1)

PA-31-310, PA-31-325, PA-31-350 and PA-31P

Figure 3-2. Bridle Cable Clamp Installation

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

10725 Altjiude Hold Unit used

IC725 Aliitude Hold Unit used

RadioCoupler Piper P/N

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY

11. FLUX DETECTOR

13. FLUX DETECTOR